2008 Owners Manual Subaru Forester

Foreword
Congratulations on choosing a SUBARU vehicle. This Owner’s

Manual has all the information necessary to keep your SUBARU in
excellent condition and to properly maintain the emission control
system for minimizing emission pollutants. We urge you to read
this manual carefully so that you may understand your vehicle and
its operation. For information not found in this Owner’s Manual,
such as details concerning repairs or adjustments, please contact
the dealer from whom you purchased your SUBARU or the nearest
SUBARU dealer.
The information, specifications and illustrations found in this
manual are those in effect at the time of printing. FUJI HEAVY
INDUSTRIES LTD. reserves the right to change specifications and
designs at any time without prior notice and without incurring any
obligation to make the same or similar changes on vehicles
previously sold. This Owner’s Manual applies to all models and
covers all equipment, including factory installed options. Some
explanations, therefore may be for equipment not installed in your
vehicle.
Please leave this manual in the vehicle at the time of resale. The
next owner will need the information found herein.
FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD., TOKYO, JAPAN
is a registered trademark of FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD.
*
C copyright 2007 FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD.
Black plate (2,1)
This manual describes the following vehicle types.*
* The illustrated vehicle is one of the FORESTER series.
北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

Black plate (2,1)
北米Model "ALL_MODEL_SHIRO" EDITED: 2006/ 4/ 17

Black plate (3,1)
Warranties ! Vehicle with HID headlights How to use this Owner’s 0

Manual
& Warranties for U.S.A. CAUTION
All SUBARU vehicles distributed by & Using your Owner’s Manual
High Intensity Discharge (HID) head-
Subaru of America, Inc. and sold at retail Before you operate your vehicle, carefully
lights contain mercury. For that
by an authorized SUBARU dealer in the read this manual. To protect yourself and
reason, it is necessary to remove
United States come with the following extend the service life of your vehicle,
HID headlights before vehicle dis-
warranties: follow the instructions in this manual.
posal. Once removed, please reuse,
. SUBARU Limited Warranty recycle or dispose of the HID head- Failure to observe these instructions may
lights as hazardous waste. result in serious injury and damage to your
. Emission Control Systems Warranty
vehicle.
. Emissions Performance Warranty
! Vehicle without HID headlights This manual is composed of fourteen
All warranty information, including details chapters. Each chapter begins with a brief
of coverage and exclusions, is in the CAUTION table of contents, so you can usually tell at
“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”. a glance if that chapter contains the
Please read these warranties carefully. This vehicle does not contain mer- information you want.
cury devices or parts.
& Warranties for Canada Chapter 1: Seat, seatbelt and SRS
airbags
All SUBARU vehicles distributed by
This chapter informs you how to use the
Subaru Canada, Inc. and sold at retail by
seat and seatbelt and contains precau-
an authorized SUBARU dealer in Canada
tions for the SRS airbags.
come with the following warranties:
Chapter 2: Keys and doors
. SUBARU Limited Warranty This chapter informs you how to operate
. Anti-Corrosion Warranty the keys, locks and windows.
. Emission Control Warranty Chapter 3: Instruments and controls
This chapter informs you about the opera-
All warranty information, including details
tion of instrument panel indicators and
of coverage and exclusions, is in the
how to use the instruments and other
Warranty and Service Booklet. Please
switches.
read these warranties carefully.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (4,1)
Chapter 4: Climate Control Chapter 12: Specifications CAUTION

This chapter informs you how to operate This chapter informs you about dimension
the climate control. and capacities of your SUBARU. A CAUTION indicates a situation in
Chapter 5: Audio Chapter 13: Consumer information and which injury or damage to your
This chapter informs you how to operate Reporting safety defects vehicle, or both, could result if the
your audio system. This chapter informs you about Uniform caution is ignored.
Chapter 6: Interior equipment tire quality grading standards and Report-
This chapter informs you how to operate ing safety defects. NOTE
interior equipment. Chapter 14: Index
A NOTE gives information or sugges-
Chapter 7: Starting and operating This is an alphabetical listing of all that’s in tions how to make better use of your
This chapter informs you how to start and this manual. You can use it to quickly find vehicle.
operate your SUBARU. something you want to read.
Chapter 8: Driving tips
& Safety warnings & Safety symbol
This chapter informs you how to drive your
SUBARU in various conditions and ex- You will find a number of WARNINGs,
plains some safety tips on driving. CAUTIONs and NOTEs in this manual.
Chapter 9: In case of emergency These safety warnings alert you to poten-
This chapter informs you what to do if you tial hazards that could result in injury to
have a problem while driving, such as a you or others.
flat tire or engine overheating. Please read these safety warnings as well
Chapter 10: Appearance care as all other portions of this manual care-
fully in order to gain a better understand-
This chapter informs you how to keep your
ing of how to use your SUBARU vehicle
SUBARU looking good.
safely.
Chapter 11: Maintenance and service
This chapter informs you when you need WARNING
to take your SUBARU to the dealer for
scheduled maintenance and informs you A WARNING indicates a situation in You will find a circle with a slash through it
how to keep your SUBARU running which serious injury or death could in this manual. This symbol means “Do
properly. result if the warning is ignored. not”, “Do not do this”, or “Do not let this
happen”, depending upon the context.

Black plate (5,1)
Vehicle symbols Mark Name Mark Name 0

There are some of the symbols you may Parking lights, tail lights, li-
Seat heater cense plate light and instru-
see on your vehicle. ment panel illumination
Mark Name Child restraint top tether an-
chorages Headlights
WARNING
Child restraint lower an-
chorages Headlight beam leveler
CAUTION
Horn Illumination brightness
Power door lock
Windshield wiper deicer Fan speed
Passengers’ windows lock
Wiper intermittent Instrument panel outlets
Fuel
Windshield washer Instrument panel outlets and
foot outlets
Front fog lights
Windshield wiper mist (for
single wipe) Foot outlets
Parking lights
Rear window wiper Windshield defroster and foot
outlets
Hazard warning flasher
Rear window washer Windshield defroster
Engine hood
Lights Outside mirror defogger
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (6,1)
Safety precautions when . The SRS airbags deploy with

Mark Name
driving considerable speed and force.
Occupants who are out of proper
Rear window defogger
& Seatbelt and SRS airbag position when the SRS airbag
deploys could suffer very serious
Air recirculation injuries. Because the SRS airbag
WARNING
needs enough space for deploy-
. All persons in the vehicle should ment, the driver should always
Engine oil fasten their seatbelts BEFORE sit upright and well back in the
the vehicle starts to move. Other- seat as far from the steering
wise, the possibility of serious wheel as practical while still
Washer injury becomes greater in the maintaining full vehicle control
event of a sudden stop or acci- and the front passenger should
dent. move the seat as far back as
Door lock (Transmitter) possible and sit upright and well
. To obtain maximum protection in
back in the seat.
the event of an accident, the
Door unlock (Transmitter) driver and all passengers in the Carefully read the sections “Seatbelts”
vehicle should always wear seat- and “*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint
belts when the vehicle is moving. System airbag)” in chapter 1 of this Own-
The SRS (Supplemental Restraint er’s Manual for instructions and precau-
System) airbag does not do away tions concerning the seatbelt system and
with the need to fasten seatbelts. SRS airbag system.
In combination with the seat-
belts, it offers the best combined
protection in case of a serious
accident.
Not wearing a seatbelt increases
the chance of severe injury or
death in a crash even when the
vehicle has the SRS airbag.

Black plate (7,1)
& Child safety The SRS airbag deploys with . Never leave unattended children 0
considerable speed and force in the vehicle. They could acci-
WARNING and can injure or even kill chil- dentally injure themselves or
dren, especially if they are 12 others through inadvertent op-
. Never hold a child on your lap or years of age and under and are eration of the vehicle. Also, on
in your arms while the vehicle is not restrained or improperly re- hot or sunny days, temperature
moving. The passenger cannot strained. Because children are in a closed vehicle could quickly
protect the child from injury in a lighter and weaker than adults, become high enough to cause
collision, because the child will their risk being injured from severe or possibly fatal injuries
be caught between the passen- deployment is greater. to them.
ger and objects inside the vehi- . NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD
cle. FACING CHILD SEAT IN THE Carefully read the sections “Child restraint
. While riding in the vehicle, in- FRONT SEAT. DOING SO RISKS systems”, “*SRS airbag (Supplemental
fants and small children should SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO Restraint System airbag)”, and “Seatbelts”
always be placed in the REAR THE CHILD BY PLACING THE in chapter 1 of this Owner’s Manual for
seat in an infant or child restraint CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO instructions and precautions concerning
system which is appropriate for THE SRS AIRBAG. the child restraint system, seatbelt system
the child’s age, height and and SRS airbag system.
. Always use the child safety locks
weight. If a child is too big for a whenever a child rides in the rear
child restraint system, the child seat. Serious injury could result
& Engine exhaust gas (Carbon
should sit in the REAR seat and if a child accidentally opened the monoxide)
be restrained using the seatbelts. door and fell out. Refer to the
According to accident statistics, “Child safety locks” section in WARNING
children are safer when properly chapter 2.
restrained in the rear seating . Never inhale engine exhaust gas.
positions than in the front seat- . Always lock the passenger’s win- Engine exhaust gas contains
ing positions. Never allow a child dows using the lock switch when carbon monoxide, a colorless
to stand up or kneel on the seat. children are riding in the vehicle. and odorless gas which is dan-
Failure to follow this procedure gerous, or even lethal, if inhaled.
. Put children aged 12 and under in could result in injury to a child
the REAR seat properly re- . Always properly maintain the en-
operating the power window. Re-
strained at all times in a child gine exhaust system to prevent
fer to the “Windows” section in
restraint device or in a seatbelt. engine exhaust gas from enter-
chapter 2.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (8,1)
ing the vehicle. & Drinking and driving & Drugs and driving
. Never run the engine in a closed
space, such as a garage, except WARNING WARNING
for the brief time needed to drive
the vehicle in or out of it. Drinking and then driving is very There are some drugs (over the
dangerous. Alcohol in the blood- counter and prescription) that can
. Avoid remaining in a parked stream delays your reaction and delay your reaction time and impair
vehicle for a lengthy time while impairs your perception, judgment your perception, judgment and at-
the engine is running. If that is and attentiveness. If you drive after tentiveness. If you drive after taking
unavoidable, then use the venti- drinking – even if you drink just a them, it may increase your, your
lation fan to force fresh air into little – it will increase the risk of passengers’ and other persons’ risk
the vehicle. being involved in a serious or fatal of being involved in a serious or
. Always keep the front ventilator accident, injuring or killing yourself, fatal accident.
inlet grille free from snow, leaves your passengers and others. In
or other obstructions to ensure addition, if you are injured in the If you are taking any drugs, check with
that the ventilation system al- accident, alcohol may increase the your doctor or pharmacist or read the
ways works properly. severity of that injury. literature that accompanies the medication
. If at any time you suspect that Please don’t drink and drive. to determine if the drug you are taking can
exhaust fumes are entering the impair your driving ability. Do not drive
vehicle, have the probl em Drunken driving is one of the most after taking any medications that can
checked and corrected as soon frequent causes of accidents. Since alco- make you drowsy or otherwise affect your
as possible. If you must drive hol affects all people differently, you may ability to safely operate a motor vehicle. If
under these conditions, drive have consumed too much alcohol to drive you have a medical condition that requires
only with all windows fully open. safely even if the level of alcohol in your you to take drugs, please consult with
your doctor.
. Keep the rear gate closed while blood is below the legal limit. The safest
driving to prevent exhaust gas thing you can do is never drink and drive. Never drive if you are under the influence
from entering the vehicle. However if you have no choice but to of any illicit mind-altering drugs. For your
drive, stop drinking and sober up comple- own health and well-being, we urge you
tely before getting behind the wheel. not to take illegal drugs in the first place
and to seek treatment if you are addicted
to those drugs.

Black plate (9,1)
& Driving when tired or sleepy performance problems resulting harness which can be secured to the rear
0
from modification may not be cov- seat with a seatbelt or use a pet carrier
WARNING ered under warranties. which can be secured to the rear seat by
routing a seatbelt through the carrier’s
When you are tired or sleepy, your handle. Never restrain pets or pet carriers
reaction will be delayed and your & Car phone/cell phone and in the front passenger’s seat. For further
perception, judgment and attentive- driving information, consult your veterinarian,
ness will be impaired. If you drive local animal protection society or pet
when tired or sleepy, your, your CAUTION shop.
passengers’ and other persons’
chances of being involved in a Do not use a car phone/cell phone & Tire pressures
serious accident may increase. while driving; it may distract your Check and, if necessary, adjust the
attention from driving and can lead pressure of each tire (including the spare)
Please do not continue to drive but to an accident. If you use a car at least once a month and before any long
instead find a safe place to rest if you phone/cell phone, pull off the road journey.
are tired or sleepy. On long trips, you and park in a safe place before
should make periodic rest stops to refresh using your phone. In some States/ Check the tire pressure when the tires are
yourself before continuing on your journey. Provinces, only hands-free phones cold. Use a pressure gauge to adjust the
When possible, you should share the may legally be used while driving. tire pressures to the values shown on the
driving with others. tire placard.
Refer to the “Tires and wheels” section in
& Modification of your vehicle & Driving with pets chapter 11 for detailed information.
Unrestrained pets can interfere with your
CAUTION driving and distract your attention from WARNING
driving. In a collision or sudden stop,
Your vehicle should not be modified Driving at high speeds with exces-
unrestrained pets or cages can be thrown
other than with genuine Subaru sively low tire pressures can cause
around inside the vehicle and hurt you or
parts and accessories. Other types the tires to deform severely and to
your passengers. Besides, the pets can
of modifications could affect its rapidly become hot. A sharp in-
be hurt under these situations. It is also for
performance, safety or durability, crease in temperature could cause
their own safety that pets should be
and may even violate governmental tread separation, and destruction of
properly restrained in your vehicle. Re-
regulations. In addition, damage or the tires. The resulting loss of
strain a pet with a special traveling
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (10,1)
vehicle control could lead to an

accident.
& California proposition 65

warning
WARNING
Engine exhaust, some of its consti-
tuents, and certain vehicle compo-
nents contain or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or
other reproductive harm. In addi-
tion, certain fluids in vehicles and
certain components of product wear
contain or emit chemicals known to
the State of California to cause
cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm.

Black plate (1,1)
Table of contents
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1

Keys and doors 2
Instruments and controls 3
Climate control 4
Audio 5
Interior equipment 6
Starting and operating 7
Driving tips 8
In case of emergency 9
Appearance care 10
Maintenance and service 11
Specifications 12
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects 13
Index 14
北米Model "A8130BE-B" Edited: 2007/ 7/ 25

Black plate (12,1)
10
1) Headlight switch (page 3-20)
Illustrated index 2) Replacing bulbs (page 11-46)
3) Engine hood (page 11-4)
& Exterior 4) Wiper switch (page 3-25)
5) Roof rails (page 8-13)
6) Door locks (page 2-4)
7) Tire pressure (page 11-33)
8) Flat tires (page 9-4)
9) Tire chains (page 8-10)
10) Front fog light button (page 3-24)
11) Tie-down/Towing hooks (page 9-12)

Black plate (13,1)
11
1) Rear window defogger button
(page 3-28) 0
2) Rear gate (page 2-20)
3) Child safety locks (page 2-17)
4) Fuel filler lid and cap (page 7-3)
5) Tie-down/Towing hook (page 9-12)
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (14,1)
12
& Interior 1) Lower anchorage for child restraint sys-

tem (page 1-31)
! Passenger compartment area 2) Seatbelt (page 1-10)
3) Moonroof (page 2-21)
4) Parking brake lever (page 7-26)
5) Front seat (page 1-2)
6) Rear seat (page 1-7)

Black plate (15,1)
13
1) Cup holder (page 6-7)
2) Center console (page 6-4) 0
3) Glove box (page 6-4)
4) Front power supply socket (page 6-8)
5) Pocket (if equipped) (page 6-7)
AUX unit (if equipped) (page 6-8)
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (16,1)
14
& Instrument panel 1) Door locks (page 2-4)

2) Outside mirror switch (page 3-30)
3) Light control lever (page 3-20)
4) Combination meter (page 3-6)
5) Wiper control lever (page 3-24)
6) Hazard warning flasher switch (page 3-6)
7) Audio (page 5-1)
8) Gear shift lever (MT) (page 7-9)
Selector lever (AT) (page 7-11)
9) Climate control (page 4-1)
10) Cruise control (page 7-28)
11) Horn (page 3-32)
12) SRS airbag (page 1-35)
13) Tilt steering (page 3-32)
14) Fuse (page 11-43)
15) Hood lock release knob (page 11-4)
16) Power windows (page 2-18)

Black plate (17,1)
15
& Light control and wiper control levers/switches 1) Parking light switch (page 3-23)
0
2) Windshield wiper (page 3-24)
3) Mist (page 3-26)
4) Windshield washer (page 3-26)
5) Rear window wiper and washer switch
(page 3-26)
6) Wiper control lever (page 3-25)
7) Illumination brightness control
(page 3-23)
8) Light control lever (page 3-20)
9) Headlight ON/OFF (page 3-20)
10) Headlight flasher High/Low beam
change (page 3-21)
11) Turn signal (for lane change) (page 3-22)
12) Turn signal (page 3-22)
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (18,1)
16
& Combination meter 1) Fuel gauge (page 3-7)

2) Temperature gauge (page 3-8)
! U.S.-spec. models 3) Speedometer (page 3-6)
4) Tachometer (page 3-7)
! AT vehicles 5) Trip meter A/B selection and trip meter
reset knob (page 3-6)
6) Odometer and trip meter (page 3-6)
7) Outside temperature indicator (page 3-9)
8) Select lever position indicator
(page 3-17)
Type A

Black plate (19,1)
17
1) Fuel gauge (page 3-7)
2) Temperature gauge (page 3-8) 0
3) Speedometer (page 3-6)
5) Trip meter A/B selection and trip meter
(page 3-17)
Type B
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (20,1)
18
! MT vehicles 1) Fuel gauge (page 3-7)

Type A

Black plate (21,1)
19
Type B
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (22,1)
20
! Canada-spec. models 1) Fuel gauge (page 3-7)

! AT vehicles 3) Speedometer (page 3-6)
(page 3-17)
Type A

Black plate (23,1)
21
(page 3-17)
Type B
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (24,1)
22
! MT vehicles 1) Fuel gauge (page 3-7)

Type A

Black plate (25,1)
23
Type B
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (26,1)
24
& Warning and indicator light Mark Name Page Mark Name Page
Mark Name Page Vehicle Dynamics Control

Brake system warning warning light/Vehicle Dy- 3-14
or light 3-15 namics Control OFF indi-
Seatbelt warning light 3-10 cator light (if equipped)
Low tire pressure warning 3-17

SRS airbag system warn- Door open warning light 3-16 light (if equipped)
ing light 3-10
All-Wheel Drive warning 3-16

Front passenger’s frontal light (AT vehicles)
or airbag ON indicator light 3-11
Low fuel warning light 3-16
or Front passenger’s frontal 3-11

airbag OFF indicator light Turn signal indicator lights 3-17
CHECK ENGINE warning High beam indicator light 3-17

light/Malfunction indicator 3-12
lamp
Security indicator light (if 2-4
Charge warning light 3-12 equipped)
Cruise control indicator 3-19

Oil pressure warning light 3-12 light (if equipped)
Cruise control set indica- 3-19

AT OIL temperature 3-13 tor light (if equipped)
warning light (AT vehicles)
Vehicle Dynamics Control
operation indicator light (if 3-16
equipped)
or ABS warning light 3-13

Black plate (27,1)
25
& Tire changing tools 1) Jack (page 9-15)

0
2) Jack handle (page 9-15)
3) Spare tire (page 9-4)
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (28,1)
26
& Cargo area cover 1) Cargo area cover (page 6-13)

2) Cargo tie-down hook (page 6-14)
3) Accessory power outlet (page 6-8)
4) Shopping bag hook (page 6-14)

Black plate (1,1)
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
System servicing ............................................... 1-23

1
Front seats........................................................... 1-2
Manual seat ........................................................ 1-3 Precautions against vehicle modification ............ 1-23
Power seat (if equipped) ...................................... 1-4 Child restraint systems ..................................... 1-24
Lumbar support (Driver’s seat) ............................ 1-5 Where to place a child restraint system .............. 1-25
Head restraint adjustment.................................... 1-6 Choosing a child restraint system ...................... 1-26
Active head restraint ........................................... 1-6 Installing child restraint systems with A/ELR
Seat heater (if equipped) .................................... 1-7 seatbelt ........................................................... 1-26
Rear seats............................................................ 1-7 Installing a booster seat..................................... 1-29
Head restraint adjustment.................................... 1-8 Installation of child restraint systems by use of
lower and tether anchorages (LATCH) .............. 1-31
Folding down the rear seatback ........................... 1-9
Top tether anchorages ....................................... 1-33
Armrest (if equipped) ......................................... 1-10
*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint
Seatbelts ............................................................. 1-10 System airbag)................................................ 1-35
Seatbelt safety tips............................................. 1-10 Vehicle with driver’s and front passenger’s SRS
Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) ................... 1-11 airbags and lap/shoulder restraints .................. 1-35
Automatic/Emergency Locking Retractor Subaru advanced frontal airbag system.............. 1-39
(A/ELR) ............................................................ 1-11 SRS side airbag (if equipped) ............................. 1-51
Seatbelt warning light and chime ........................ 1-12 SRS airbag system monitors.............................. 1-56
Fastening the seatbelt ........................................ 1-12 SRS airbag system servicing ............................. 1-57
Seatbelt maintenance ......................................... 1-19 Precautions against vehicle modification ............ 1-58
Seatbelt extender ............................................... 1-19
Front seatbelt pretensioners ............................. 1-20
System monitors ................................................ 1-22

Black plate (32,1)
1-2 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
Front seats deploys could suffer very serious and can injure or even kill children,
injuries. Because the SRS airbag especially if they are 12 years of age
needs enough space for deploy- and under and are not restrained or
WARNING ment, the driver should always improperly restrained. Because chil-
sit upright and well back in the dren are lighter and weaker than
. Never adjust the seat while driv- seat as far from the steering adults, their risk of being injured
ing to avoid the possibility of wheel as practical while still from deployment is greater. Conse-
loss of vehicle control and of maintaining full vehicle control quently, we strongly recommend
personal injury. and the front passenger should that ALL children (including those
. Before adjusting the seat, make move the seat as far back as in child seats and those that have
sure the hands and feet of rear possible and sit upright and well outgrown child restraint devices) sit
seat passengers are clear of the back in the seat. in the REAR seat properly re-
adjusting mechanism. strained at all times in a child
. Seatbelts provide maximum re- restraint device or in a seatbelt,
straint when the occupant sits whichever is appropriate for the
well back and upright in the seat. child’s age, height and weight. Se-
To reduce the risk of sliding cure ALL types of child restraint
under the seatbelt in a collision, devices (including forward facing
the front seatbacks should be child seat) in the REAR seats at all
always used in the upright posi- times.
tion while the vehicle is running. NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FA-
If the front seatbacks are not CING CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT
used in the upright position in a SEAT. DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS
collision, the risk of sliding under INJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD
the lap belt and of the lap belt BY PLACING THE CHILD’S HEAD
sliding up over the abdomen will TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.
increase, and both can result in According to accident statistics,
serious internal injury or death. WARNING children are safer when properly
. The SRS airbags deploy with Put children aged 12 and under in restrained in the rear seating posi-
considerable speed and force. the rear seat properly restrained at tions than in the front seating posi-
Occupants who are out of proper all times. The SRS airbag deploys tions. For instructions and precau-
position when the SRS airbag with considerable speed and force tions concerning child restraint sys-

Black plate (33,1)
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-3
tems, see the “Child restraint sys- ! Reclining the seatback 1

tems” section in this chapter.
& Manual seat

! Fore and aft adjustment
Pull the reclining lever up and adjust the

seatback to the desired position. Then
WARNING release the lever and make sure the
seatback is securely locked into place.
To prevent the passenger from slid- The seatback placed in a reclined position
ing under the seatbelt in the event of can spring back upward with force when
a collision, always put the seatback released. When operating the reclining
Pull the lever upward and slide the seat to in the upright position while the lever to return the seatback, hold it lightly
the desired position. Then release the vehicle is in motion. Also, do not so that it may be raised back gradually.
lever and move the seat back and forth to place objects such as cushions
make sure that it is securely locked into between the passenger and the
place. seatback. If you do so, the risk of
sliding under the lap belt and of the
lap belt sliding up over the abdomen
will increase, and both can result in
serious internal injury or death.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (34,1)
! Seat height adjustment (Driver’s & Power seat (if equipped) ! Seat cushion angle adjustment
seat)
! Fore and aft adjustment
To adjust the seat cushion angle, pull up

1) Turn the dial backward to lower the seat. or push down the front end of the control
2) Turn the dial forward to raise the seat. To adjust the seat forward or backward, switch.
move the control switch forward or back-
Use the adjusting dial to adjust the height ward. ! Seat height adjustment
of the seat.

Black plate (35,1)
To adjust the seat height, pull up or push & Lumbar support (Driver’s 1
down the rear end of the control switch. seat)
! Reclining the seatback
To adjust the angle of the seatback, move

the control switch forward or backward.
Pull the lever forward or backward.
Pulling the lever forward will increase the
WARNING amount of support for your lower back.
To prevent the passenger from slid-
ing under the seatbelt in the event of
a collision, always put the seatback
in the upright position while the
vehicle is in motion. Also, do not
place objects such as cushions
between the passenger and the
seatback. If you do so, the risk of
sliding under the lap belt and of the
lap belt sliding up over the abdomen
will increase, and both can result in
serious internal injury or death.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (36,1)
& Head restraint adjustment & Active head restraint CAUTION

. Each active head restraint is
effective only when its height is
properly adjusted and the driver/
passenger sits in the correct
position on the seat.
. If your vehicle is involved in a
rear-end collision, have an
authorized SUBARU dealer in-
spect the active head restraints.
. The active head restraints may
not operate in the event the
vehicle experiences only a slight
To raise the head restraint, pull it up. The front seats of your vehicle are impact in the rear.
To lower it, push the head restraint down equipped with active head restraints. They . The active head restraints may be
while pressing the release button on the automatically tilt forward slightly in the damaged if they are pushed hard
top of the seatback. event the vehicle is struck from the rear, from behind or subjected to
The head restraint should be adjusted so decreasing the amount of rearward head shock. As a result, they may not
that the center of the head restraint is movement and thus reducing the risk of function if the vehicle suffers a
closest to the top of the occupant’s ears. whiplash. For maximum effectiveness the rear impact.
head restraint should be adjust so that the
WARNING center of the head restraint is closest to
the top of the occupant’s ears.
Never drive the vehicle with the
head restraints removed because
they are designed to reduce the risk
of serious neck injury in the event
that the vehicle is struck from the
rear.

Black plate (37,1)
Seat heater (if equipped) CAUTION Rear seats 1

. There is a possibility that people
with delicate skin may suffer
slight burns even at low tempera-
tures if he/she uses the seat
heater for a long period of time.
When using the heater, always be
sure to warn the persons con-
cerned.
. Do not put anything on the seat
which insulates against heat,
such as a blanket, cushion, or
similar items. This may cause the
seat heater to overheat.
HI – Rapid heating
LO – Normal heating WARNING
NOTE
The seat heater operates when the igni- Seatbelts provide maximum re-
tion switch is either in the “Acc” or “ON” Use of the seat heater for a long period
of time while the engine is not running straint when the occupant sits well
position. back and upright in the seat. Do not
can cause battery discharge.
To turn on the seat heater, push the “LO” put cushions or any other materials
or “HI” position on the switch, as desired, between occupants and seatbacks
depending on the temperature. Selecting or seat cushions. If you do so, the
the “HI” position will cause the seat to heat risk of sliding under the lap belt and
up quicker. of the lap belt sliding up over the
abdomen will increase, and both can
The indicator located on the switch comes result in serious internal injury or
on when the seat heater is in operation. death.
When the vehicle’s interior is warmed
enough or before you leave the vehicle,
be sure to turn the switch off.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (38,1)
& Head restraint adjustment

WARNING
Never drive the vehicle with the
head restraints removed because
they are designed to reduce the risk
of serious neck injury in the event
that the vehicle is struck from the
rear.
! Rear windows side seating position
CAUTION To raise the head restraint, pull it up.

WARNING To lower it, push the head restraint down
The head restraint is not intended to while pressing the release button on the
Never stack luggage or other cargo
be used at the lowest position. top of the seatback.
higher than the top of the seatback
Before sitting on the seat, raise the
because it could tumble forward and When the seats are not occupied, lower
head restraint to the click position
injure passengers in the event of a the head restraint to improve rearward
depending on your sitting height.
sudden stop or accident. visibility.
! Rear center seating position
CAUTION
The head restraint is not intended to
be used at the lowest position.
Before sitting on the seat, raise the
head restraint to the click position
depending on your sitting height.

Black plate (39,1)
& Folding down the rear seat- 1

back
WARNING
. After returning the rear seatback
to its original position, make
certain that the shoulder belts
are fully visible.
. Never allow passengers to ride
on the folded rear seatback or in
the cargo area. Doing so may
result in serious injury or death.
To raise the head restraint, pull it up. 1. Lower the head restraints.
. Secure lengthy items properly to
To lower it, push the head restraint down prevent them from shooting for- 2. Unlock the seatback by pulling the
while pressing the release button on the ward and causing serious injury release knob and then fold the seatback
top of the seatback. during a sudden stop. down.
When the rear center seating position is To return the seatback to its original
occupied, place the head restraint to the position, raise the seatback until it locks
click position. When the rear center seat- into place and make sure that it is securely
ing position is not occupied, lower the locked.
head restraint to improve rearward visibi-
lity.

Black plate (40,1)
Armrest (if equipped) Seatbelts the rear seat properly restrained

at all times. The SRS airbag
& Seatbelt safety tips deploys with considerable speed
and force and can injure or even
WARNING kill children, especially if they are
12 years of age and under and
. All persons in the vehicle should are not restrained or improperly
fasten their seatbelts BEFORE restrained. Because children are
the vehicle starts to move. Other- lighter and weaker than adults,
wise, the possibility of serious their risk of being injured from
injury becomes greater in the deployment is greater. Conse-
event of a sudden stop or acci- quently, we strongly recommend
dent. that ALL children (including
. All belts should fit snugly in order those in child seats and those
to provide full restraint. Loose that have outgrown child re-
To lower the armrest, pull on the top edge fitting belts are not as effective in straint devices) sit in the REAR
of the armrest. preventing or reducing injury. seat properly restrained at all
times in a child restraint device
. Each seatbelt is designed to or in a seatbelt, whichever is
WARNING support only one person. Never appropriate for the child’s height
To avoid the possibility of serious use a single belt for two or more and weight.
injury, passengers must never be persons – even children. Other-
wise, in an accident, serious Secure ALL types of child re-
allowed to sit on the center armrest straint devices (including for-
while the vehicle is in motion. injury or death could result.
ward facing child seats) in the
. Replace all seatbelt assemblies REAR seats at all times.
including retractors and attach-
ing hardware worn by occupants NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD
of a vehicle that has been in a FACING CHILD SEAT IN THE
serious accident. The entire as- FRONT SEAT. DOING SO RISKS
sembly should be replaced even SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO
if damage is not obvious. THE CHILD BY PLACING THE
CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO
. Put children aged 12 and under in THE SRS AIRBAG.

Black plate (41,1)
According to accident statistics, the face or neck, adjust the shoulder belt & Emergency Locking Retrac- 1
children are safer when properly anchor height (window-side seating posi- tor (ELR)
restrained in the rear seating tions only) and then if necessary move the
positions than in the front seat- child closer to the belt buckle to help The driver’s seatbelt has an Emergency
ing positions. For instructions provide a good shoulder belt fit. Care must Locking Retractor (ELR).
and precautions concerning the be taken to securely place the lap belt as The emergency locking retractor allows
child restraint system, see the low as possible on the hips and not on the normal body movement but the retractor
“Child restraint systems” section child’s waist. If the shoulder portion of the locks automatically during a sudden stop,
in this chapter. belt cannot be properly positioned, a child impact or if you pull the belt very quickly
restraint system should be used. Never out of the retractor.
Your vehicle is equipped with a crash place the shoulder belt under the child’s
sensing and diagnostic module, which will arm or behind the child’s back. & Automatic/Emergency Lock-
record the use of the seatbelt(s) by the ! Expectant mothers ing Retractor (A/ELR)
driver and/or front passenger when any of Each passenger’s seatbelt has an Auto-
the SRS frontal and side airbags deploys. matic/Emergency Locking Retractor (A/
! Infants or small children ELR). The Automatic/Emergency Locking
Use a child restraint system that is Retractor normally functions as an Emer-
suitable for your vehicle. See information gency Locking Retractor (ELR). The A/
on “Child restraint systems” in this chap- ELR has an additional locking mode
ter. “Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
mode” intended to secure a child restraint
! Children system. When the seatbelt is once drawn
If a child is too big for a child restraint out completely and is then retracted even
system, the child should sit in the rear seat slightly, the retractor locks the seatbelt in
and be restrained using the seatbelts. that position and the seatbelt cannot be
According to accident statistics, children extended. As the belt is rewinding, clicks
are safer when properly restrained in the Expectant mothers also need to use the will be heard which indicate the retractor
rear seating positions than in the front seatbelts. They should consult their doctor functions as an ALR. When the seatbelt is
seating positions. Never allow a child to for specific recommendations. The lap belt retracted fully, the ALR mode is released.
stand up or kneel on the seat. should be worn securely and as low as When securing a child restraint system on
If the shoulder portion of the belt crosses possible over the hips, not over the waist. the rear seats by the use of the seatbelt,
the seatbelt must be changed over to the
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (42,1)
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode. between flashing and steady illumination tion resumes. For further details about
at 15-second intervals, and the chime will canceling the warning operation,
When the child restraint system is re- sound while the warning light is flashing. please contact your SUBARU dealer.
moved, make sure that the seatbelt
retracts fully and the retractor returned to Alternate flashing and steady illumination
the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) of the warning lights and sounding of the & Fastening the seatbelt
mode. chime will continue until the driver fastens
the seatbelt.
For instructions on how to convert the WARNING
retractor to the ALR mode and restore it to NOTE
the ELR mode, see the “Child restraint . Never use a belt that is twisted or
. If the driver unfastens the seatbelt reversed. In an accident, this can
systems” section in this chapter. after fastening, the seatbelt warning increase the risk or severity of
device operates as follows according
& Seatbelt warning light to the vehicle speed.
injury.
and chime . Keep the lap belt as low as
. At speeds lower than approxi-
possible on your hips. In a colli-
Your vehicle is equipped with a seatbelt mately 9 mph (15 km/h)
sion, this spreads the force of the
warning device at the driver’s seat, as The warning light will alternate lap belt over stronger hip bones
required by current safety standards. between flashing and steady illumi- instead of across the weaker
There is a seatbelt warning light in the nation at 15-second intervals. The abdomen.
combination meter. chime will not sound.
. At speeds higher than approxi- . Seatbelts provide maximum re-
If the driver has not yet fastened the straint when the occupant sits
seatbelt when the ignition switch is turned mately 9 mph (15 km/h)
well back and upright in the seat.
to the “ON” position, the seatbelt warning The warning light will alternate
To reduce the risk of sliding
light will flash for 6 seconds, to warn that between flashing and steady illumi-
under the seatbelt in a collision,
the seatbelt is unfastened. If the driver’s nation at 15-second intervals and
the front seatbacks should be
seatbelt is not fastened, a chime will also the chime will sound while the
always used in the upright posi-
sound simultaneously. warning light is flashing.
tion while the vehicle is running.
If the driver’s seatbelt is still not fastened 6 . It is possible to cancel the warning
If the front seatbacks are not
seconds later, the warning light will remain operation that follows the 6-second
used in the upright position in a
lit for 15 seconds. If the driver’s seatbelt is warning after turning ON the ignition
collision, the risk of sliding under
still not fastened even 15 seconds later switch. When the ignition switch is
the lap belt and of the lap belt
(21 seconds after turning ON the ignition turned ON next time, however, the
sliding up over the abdomen will
switch), the warning lights will alternate complete sequence of warning opera-
increase, and both can result in

Black plate (43,1)
serious internal injury or death. CAUTION 1

. Do not put cushions or any other
materials between occupants Metallic parts of the seatbelt can
and seatbacks or seat cushions. become very hot in a vehicle that
If you do so, the risk of sliding has been closed up in sunny weath-
under the lap belt and of the lap er; they could burn an occupant. Do
belt sliding up over the abdomen not touch such hot parts until they
will increase, and both can result cool.
in serious internal injury or
death. ! Front seatbelts
1. Adjust the seat position:
Driver’s seat: Adjust the seatback to the
upright position. Move the seat as far from 4. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle
the steering wheel as practical while still until you hear a click.
maintaining full vehicle control.
Front passenger’s seat: Adjust the seat-
back to the upright position. Move the seat
as far back as possible.
2. Sit well back in the seat.
3. Pick up the tongue plate and pull the
belt out slowly. Do not let it get twisted. If
the belt stops before reaching the buckle,
return the belt slightly and pull it out more
slowly. If the belt still cannot be unlocked,
WARNING let the belt retract slightly after giving it a
strong pull, then pull it out slowly again.
Never place the shoulder belt under
the arm or behind the back. If an 5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on
accident occurs, this can increase the shoulder belt.
the risk or severity of injury.
6. Place the lap belt as low as possible
on your hips, not on your waist.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (44,1)
! Adjusting the front seat shoulder neck. If it does, adjust the seatbelt ! Rear seatbelts (except rear center
belt anchor height anchor to a lower position. Placing seatbelt)
the shoulder belt over the neck may 1. Sit well back in the seat.
result in neck injury during sudden
braking or in a collision. 2. Pick up the tongue plate and pull the
belt out slowly. Do not let it get twisted. If
the belt stops before reaching the buckle,
! Unfastening the seatbelt return the belt slightly and pull it out more
slowly. If the belt still cannot be unlocked,
let the belt retract slightly after giving a
strong pull on it, then pull it out slowly
again.
The shoulder belt anchor height should be

adjusted to the position best suited for the
driver/front passenger.
To lower the anchor height, push the
release button and slide the anchor down.
To raise the anchor height, slide the Push the button on the buckle.
anchor up. Pull down on the anchor to Before closing the door, make sure that
make sure that it is locked in place. the belts are retracted properly to avoid
Always adjust the anchor height so that catching the belt webbing in the door.
the shoulder belt passes over the middle 3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle
of the shoulder without touching the neck. until you hear a click.
WARNING
When wearing the seatbelts, make
sure the shoulder portion of the
webbing does not pass over your

Black plate (45,1)
! Adjusting the rear seat shoulder belt WARNING 1

anchor height (window-side seating
positions only) When wearing the seatbelts, make
sure the shoulder portion of the
webbing does not pass over your
neck. If it does, adjust the seatbelt
anchor to a lower position. Placing
the shoulder belt over the neck may
result in neck injury during sudden
braking or in a collision.
! Unfastening the seatbelt

4. To make the lap part tight, pull up on
the shoulder belt.
on your hips, not on your waist. The shoulder belt anchor height should be
adjusted to the position best suited for
you.
To lower the anchor height, push the
release button and slide the anchor down.
To raise the anchor height, slide the
anchor up. Pull down on the anchor to
make sure that it is locked in place.
Always adjust the anchor height so that
the shoulder belt passes over the middle Push the button on the buckle.
of the shoulder without touching the neck. Before closing the door, make sure that
the belts are retracted properly to avoid
catching the belt webbing in the door.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (46,1)
! Rear center seatbelt

WARNING WARNING
Fastening the seatbelt with the web- Be sure to fasten both tongue plates
bing twisted can increase the risk or to the respective buckles. If the
severity of injury in an accident. seatbelt is used only as a shoulder
When fastening the belt after it is belt (with the connector’s tongue
pulled out from the retractor, espe- plate not fastened to the connec-
cially when inserting the connector’s buckle on the right-hand side),
tor’s tongue plate into the mating it cannot properly restrain the wear-
buckle (on right-hand side), always er in position in an accident, possi-
check that the webbing is not bly resulting in serious injury or
twisted. death.
1) Center seatbelt tongue plate

2) Connector (tongue)
3) Connector (buckle)
4) Center seatbelt buckle
Rear center seatbelt is stowed in the

recess of the ceiling.
1. Remove the connector (tongue) plate
from the slot located at the front of the
recess by pulling the connector (tongue)

Black plate (47,1)
plate rearward. comfort guide located beside the head

restraint.
1
5. Insert the center seatbelt tongue plate

2. Pull out the seatbelt slowly from the into the center seatbelt buckle marked
overhead retractor. 4. After confirming that the webbing is not “CENTER” on the left-hand side until it
twisted, insert the connector (tongue) clicks.
attached at the webbing end into the
buckle on the right-hand side until a click
is heard.
If the belt stops before reaching the
buckle, return the belt slightly and pull it
out more slowly. If the belt still cannot be
unlocked, let the belt retract slightly after
giving it a strong pull, then pull it out slowly
again.
1) Seatbelt comfort guide
3. Pass the seatbelt through the seatbelt 6. To make the lap part tight, pull up on
the shoulder belt.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (48,1)

on your hips, not on your waist.
! Unfastening the seatbelt
2. Allow the retractor to roll up the belt.

You should hold the webbing end and
guide it back into the retractor while it is
rolling up. Neatly store the tongue plates
Push the release button of the center in the recess on the ceiling and then insert
seatbelt buckle (on the left-hand side) to the connector (tongue) plate into the slot
unfasten the seatbelt. located at the front of the recess.
NOTE
When the seatback is folded down for
greater cargo area, it is necessary to
disconnect the connector.
1. Insert a key or other hard pointed

object into the slot in the connector
(buckle) on the right-hand side and push
it in, and the connector (tongue) plate will
disconnect from the buckle.

Black plate (49,1)
& Seatbelt maintenance Seatbelt extender 1

To clean the seatbelts, use a mild soap
and lukewarm water. Never bleach or dye If the front seatbelts are not long enough
the belts because this could seriously to permit the tongue plate to engage with
affect their strength. the seatbelt buckle, an optional seatbelt
extender is available from your SUBARU
Inspect the seatbelts and attachments dealer. When ordering an extender, only
including the webbing and all hardware order one particularly designed for your
periodically for cracks, cuts, gashes, vehicle. Several different types of exten-
tears, damage, loose bolts or worn areas. ders are available to match various
Replace the seatbelts even if only minor varieties of front seatbelt designs. See
damage is found. your SUBARU dealer for assistance.
CAUTION The extender adds approximately 8
CAUTION inches (200 mm) of length and it can be
. Keep the belts free of polishes, used for either the driver or front passen-
. Do not allow the retractor to roll oils, chemicals and particularly ger seating position.
up the seatbelt too quickly. battery acid.
Otherwise, the metal tongue For the safety of others, the extender
. Never attempt to make modifica- should be removed after each use, espe-
plates may hit against the trim, tions or changes that will prevent
resulting in damaged trim. cially if the next person using the seatbelt
the seatbelt from operating prop- does not need one.
. Have the seatbelt fully rolled up erly.
Note that leaving the seatbelt extender’s
so that the tongue plates are tongue plate engaged with the seatbelt
neatly stored. A hanging tongue buckle may prevent the Subaru advanced
plate can swing and hit against front airbag system from functioning cor-
the trim during driving, causing rectly or cause the system to fail.
damage to the trim.
WARNING
Be sure to observe the following
when using the seatbelt extender.
Failure to follow these instructions
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (50,1)
and warnings could reduce the NOTE Front seatbelt pretensioners

effectiveness of the seatbelt and When the seatbelt extender is used by
result in more serious injury in the a pregnant passenger, consult a doctor
event of a collision. to get approval in advance.
. Never use the extender when the
belt itself is long enough to
permit it to be buckled properly.
If removal of heavy clothing is all
that is needed to permit the
seatbelt to be buckled properly,
remove the heavy clothing and
do not use the extender.
. Do not use the extender if the
buckle of the extender rests over
the abdomen.
The driver’s and front passenger’s seat-
. Do not let someone else use the
belts have a seatbelt pretensioner. The
extender. Use of an extender
To connect the extender to the seatbelt, seatbelt pretensioners are designed to be
when it is not needed could
insert the tongue plate into the seatbelt activated in the event of an accident
reduce the effectiveness of the
buckle so that the “PRESS” signs on the involving a moderate to severe frontal
seatbelt and result in more ser-
buckle-release buttons of the extender collision.
ious injury in the event of a
collision. and the seatbelt are both facing outward Also, the seatbelt pretensioners are de-
as shown in the diagram. You will hear a signed to be activated in the event of an
. Use the extender only for the accident involving a moderate to severe
click when the tongue plate locks into the
front seatbelts and only for the side impact collision.
buckle.
model for which it was originally
provided. Never use the extender When releasing the seatbelt, press on the The pretensioner sensor also serves as
for the rear seatbelts or for a buckle-release button on the extender, not the frontal and side SRS airbag sensors. If
different model. on the seatbelt. This helps to prevent the sensors detect a certain predeter-
damage to the vehicle interior and ex- mined amount of force during a frontal
tender itself. collision or a side impact collision, the
front seatbelt is quickly drawn back in by

Black plate (51,1)
the retractor to take up the slack so that

the belt more effectively restrains the front
SUBARU dealer. When replacing seat-
belt retractor assemblies, use only
ing in serious injury. Seatbelt
pretensioners have no user-ser-
1
seat occupant. genuine SUBARU parts. viceable parts. For required ser-
When a seatbelt pretensioner is activated, . If either front seatbelt does not vicing of front seatbelt retractors
an operating noise will be heard and a retract or cannot be pulled out due to equipped with seatbelt preten-
small amount of smoke will be released. a malfunction or activation of the sioners, see your nearest
These occurrences are normal and not pretensioner, contact your SUBARU SUBARU dealer.
harmful. This smoke does not indicate a dealer as soon as possible. . When discarding front seatbelt
fire in the vehicle. . If the front seatbelt retractor assem- retractor assemblies or scrap-
bly or surrounding area has been ping the entire vehicle due to
Once the seatbelt pretensioner has been damaged, contact your SUBARU dealer
activated, the seatbelt retractor remains collision damage or for other
as soon as possible. reasons, consult your SUBARU
locked. Consequently, the seatbelt can not . When you sell your vehicle, we urge
be pulled out and retracted and therefore dealer.
you to explain to the buyer that it has
must be replaced. seatbelt pretensioners by alerting him
to the contents of this section.
NOTE
. Seatbelt pretensioners are not de-
signed to activate in minor frontal WARNING
impacts, in minor side impacts or in . To obtain maximum protection,
rear impacts or in roll-over accidents. the occupants should sit in an
. The driver’s seat and passenger’s upright position with their seat-
seat pretensioners and frontal SRS belts properly fastened. Refer to
airbag operate simultaneously. the “Seatbelts” section in this
. The driver’s and passenger’s seat- chapter.
belt pretensioners and the SRS side
airbag operate simultaneously. . Do not modify, remove or strike
. Pretensioners are designed to func- the front seatbelt retractor as-
tion on a one-time-only basis. In the semblies or surrounding area.
event that a pretensioner is activated, This could result in accidental
both the driver’s and front passenger’s activation of the seatbelt preten-
seatbelt retractor assemblies must be sioners or could make the sys-
replaced only by an authorized tem inoperative, possibly result-
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (52,1)
& System monitors pact sensors) WARNING

. Frontal airbag module (Driver’s side)
. Frontal airbag module (Front passen- If the warning light exhibits any of
ger’s side) the following conditions, there may
. Side airbag sensor (Center pillar right- be a malfunction in the seatbelt
hand side) pretensioners and/or SRS airbag
. Side airbag sensor (Center pillar left- system. Immediately take your vehi-
hand side) cle to your nearest SUBARU dealer
to have the system checked. Unless
. Side airbag module (Driver’s side) checked and properly repaired, the
. Side airbag module (Front passenger’s seatbelt pretensioners and/or SRS
side) airbags will not operate properly in
. Seatbelt pretensioner (Driver’s side) the event of a collision, which may
. Seatbelt pretensioner (Front passen- increase the risk of injury.
ger’s side) . Flashing or flickering of the warn-
A diagnostic system continually monitors
the readiness of the seatbelt pretensioner . Seatbelt buckle switch (Driver’s side) ing light
while the vehicle is being driven. The . Seatbelt buckle switch (Front passen- . No illumination of the warning
seatbelt pretensioners share the control ger’s side) light when the ignition switch is
module with the SRS airbag system. . Driver’s seat position sensor first turned to the “ON” position
Therefore, if any malfunction occurs in a . Front passenger’s seatbelt tension . Continuous illumination of the
seatbelt pretensioner, the SRS airbag sensor warning light
system warning light will illuminate. The . Front passenger’s occupant detection . Illumination of the warning light
SRS airbag system warning light will show system weight sensor
normal system operation by lighting for while driving
. Front passenger’s occupant detection
approximately 6 seconds when the igni- control module
tion switch is turned to the “ON” position.
. Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON
The following components are monitored and OFF indicator
by the indicator: . All related wiring
. Front sub sensor (Right-hand side)
. Front sub sensor (Left-hand side)
. Airbag control module (including im-

Black plate (53,1)
& System servicing CAUTION & Precautions against vehicle 1

modification
WARNING The front sub sensors are located Always consult your SUBARU dealer if
near the bottom of the radiator and you want to install any accessory parts to
. When discarding a seatbelt re- the side airbag sensor is located your vehicle.
tractor assembly or scrapping inside each center pillar and the
the entire vehicle damaged by a SRS airbag control module includ- CAUTION
collision, consult your SUBARU ing the impact sensors is located
dealer. under the center console. If you Do not perform any of the following
. Tampering with or disconnecting need service or repair in those areas modifications. Such modifications
the system’s wiring could result or near the front seatbelt retractors, can interfere with proper operation
in accidental activation of the we recommend that you have an of the seatbelt pretensioners.
seatbelt pretensioner and/or authorized SUBARU dealer perform . Attachment of any equipment
SRS airbag or could make the the work. (bush bar, winches, snow plow,
system inoperative, which may skid plate, etc.) other than genu-
result in serious injury. The wir- ine SUBARU accessory parts to
ing harnesses of the seatbelt NOTE
the front end.
pretensioner and SRS airbag If the front part of the vehicle is
damaged in an accident to the extent . Modification of the suspension
systems are covered with yellow
that the seatbelt pretensioner does not system or front end structure.
insulation and the connectors of
the system are yellow for easy operate, contact your SUBARU dealer . Installation of a tire of different
identification. Do not use electri- as soon as possible. size and construction from the
cal test equipment on any circuit tires specified on the vehicle
related to the seatbelt preten- placard attached to the driver’s
sioner and SRS airbag systems. door pillar or specified for indivi-
For required servicing of the dual vehicle models in this Own-
seatbelt pretensioner, see your er’s Manual.
nearest SUBARU dealer.

Black plate (54,1)
Child restraint systems accident if their child restraints are not The passenger cannot protect the
properly secured in the vehicle. When child from injury in a collision,
installing the child restraint system, care- because the child will be caught
fully follow the manufacturer’s instructions. between the passenger and objects
inside the vehicle.
According to accident statistics, children
are safer when properly restrained in the Additionally, holding a child in your
rear seating positions than in the front lap or arms in the front seat exposes
seating positions. that child to another serious danger.
Since the SRS airbag deploys with
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces considerable speed and force, the
require that infants and small children be child could be injured or even killed.
restrained in an approved child restraint
system at all times while the vehicle is
moving.
Infants and small children should always

be placed in an infant or child restraint
system in the rear seat while riding in the
vehicle. You should use an infant or child
restraint system that meets Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standards or Canada
Motor Vehicle Safety Standards, is com-
patible with your vehicle and is appro-
priate for the child’s age and size. All child
restraint systems are designed to be
secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or
the lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt WARNING
(except those covered under the section in
this manual, entitled “Installation of child WARNING Children should be properly re-
restraint systems by use of lower and strained at all times. Never allow a
tether anchorages (LATCH)”). Never let a passenger hold a child child to stand up, or to kneel on any
on his or her lap or in his or her seat. Unrestrained children will be
Children could be endangered in an arms while the vehicle is moving.

Black plate (55,1)
thrown forward during sudden stop

or in an accident and can be injured
A: Front passenger’s seat only a child restraint system that has a
bottom base that fits snugly against the
1
You should not install a child restraint
seriously. system (including a booster seat) due to contours of the seat cushion and can be
Additionally, children standing up or the hazard to children posed by the securely retained using the seatbelt.
kneeling on or in front of the front passenger’s airbag.
seat are exposed another serious
WARNING
B: Rear seat, window-side seating
danger. Since the SRS airbag de- positions Put children aged 12 and under in
ploys with considerable speed and the rear seat properly restrained at
Recommended positions for all types of
force, the child could be injured or all times. The SRS airbag deploys
child restraint systems.
even killed. with considerable speed and force
In these positions, Automatic/Emergency
Locking Retractor (A/ELR) seatbelts and and can injure or even kill children,
especially if they are 12 years of age
& Where to place a child re- lower anchorages (bars) are provided for
and under and are not restrained or
straint system installing a child restraint system.
improperly restrained. Because chil-
Some types of child restraints might not be
The following are SUBARU’s recommen- dren are lighter and weaker than
able to be secured firmly due to projection
dations on where to place a child restraint adults, their risk of being injured
of the seat cushion.
system in your vehicle. from deployment is greater.
In this seating position, you should use
only a child restraint system that has a Consequently, be sure to secure
bottom base that fits snugly against the ALL types of child restraint devices
contours of the seat cushion and can be (including forward facing child
securely retained using the seatbelt. seats) in the REAR seats at all times.
You should choose a restraint de-
C: Rear seat, center seating position vice which is appropriate for the
Installing a child restraint system is not child’s age, height and weight. Ac-
recommended, although the A/ELR seat- cording to accident statistics, chil-
belt and an upper anchorage (tether dren are safer when properly re-
anchorage) are provided in this position. strained in the rear seating posi-
Some types of child restraints might not be tions than in the front seating posi-
able to be secured firmly due to projection tions.
of the seat cushion.
In this seating position, you should use
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (56,1)
& Choosing a child restraint & Installing child restraint sys-

system tems with A/ELR seatbelt
WARNING
. Child restraint systems and seat-
belts can become hot in a vehicle
that has been closed up in sunny
weather; they could burn a small
child. Check the child restraint
system before you place a child
in it.
. Do not leave an unsecured child
restraint system in your vehicle.
WARNING Unsecured child restraint sys-
SINCE YOUR VEHICLE IS Choose a child restraint system that is tems can be thrown around in-
EQUIPPED WITH A PASSENGER’S appropriate for the child’s age and size side of the vehicle in a sudden
SRS AIRBAG, NEVER INSTALL A (weight and height) in order to provide the stop, turn or accident; they can
R E A R W A R D FA C I N G C H I L D child with proper protection. The child strike and injure vehicle occu-
SAFETY SEAT IN THE FRONT PAS- restraint system should meet all applic- pants as well as result in serious
SENGER’S SEAT. DOING SO RISKS able requirements of Federal Motor Vehi- injuries or death to the child.
SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO cle Safety Standards for United States or
THE CHILD BY PLACING THE Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO for Canada. It can be identified by looking CAUTION
THE SRS AIRBAG. for the label on the child restraint system When you install a child restraint
or the manufacture’s statement of com- system, follow the manufacturer’s
pliance in the document attached to the instructions supplied with it. After
system. Also it is important for you to installing the child restraint system,
make sure that the child restraint system check to ensure that it is held
is compatible with the vehicle in which it securely in position. If it is not held
will be used. tight and secure, the danger of your

Black plate (57,1)
child suffering personal injury in the

event of an accident may be in-
1
creased.
! Installing a rearward facing child

restraint
4. Take up the slack in the lap belt. 6. Push and pull the child restraint
5. Pull out the seatbelt fully from the system forward and from side to side to
retractor to change the retractor over from check if it is firmly secured.
the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) Sometime a child restraint can be more
to the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) firmly secured by pushing it down into the
function. Then, allow the belt to rewind seat cushion and then tightening the
into the retractor. As the belt is rewinding, seatbelt.
1. Place the child restraint system in the clicks will be heard which indicate the 7. Pull at the shoulder portion of the belt
rear seating position. retractor functions as ALR. to confirm that it cannot be pulled out (ALR
2. Run the lap and shoulder belt through properly functioning).
or around the child restraint system
following the instructions provided by its
manufacturer.
3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle
until you hear a click.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (58,1)
NOTE
When the child restraint system is no
longer in use, remove it and restore the
ELR function of the retractor. That
function is restored by allowing the
seatbelt to retract fully.
! Installing forward facing child re-
straint
8. To remove the child restraint system, 4. Take up the slack in the lap belt.
press the release button on the seatbelt 5. Pull out the seatbelt fully from the
buckle and allow the belt to retract retractor to change the retractor over from
completely. The belt will return to the the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)
ELR mode. to the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
function. Then, allow the belt to rewind
WARNING into the retractor. As the belt is rewinding,
clicks will be heard which indicate the
NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FA- retractor functions as ALR.
CING CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT 1. Place the child restraint system in the
PASSENGER’S SEAT. DOING SO rear seating position.
RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH 2. Run the lap and shoulder belt through
TO THE CHILD BY PLACING THE or around the child restraint system
CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE following the instructions provided by its
SRS AIRBAG. manufacturer.
until you hear a click.

Black plate (59,1)
press the release button on the seatbelt

buckle and allow the belt to retract
1
completely. The belt will return to the
ELR mode. Unhook the top tether hook
from the top tether anchor.
NOTE
When the child restraint system is no
longer in use, remove it and restore the
ELR function of the retractor. That
function is restored by allowing the
seatbelt to retract fully.
6. Before having a child sit in the child 8. If the child restraint system requires a & Installing a booster seat
restraint system, move it back and forth top tether, latch the hook onto the top
and right and left to check if it is firmly tether anchor and tighten the top tether. WARNING
secured. Sometimes a child restraint can See the “Top tether anchorages” for
be more firmly secured by pushing it down additional instructions. . Child restraint systems and seat-
into the seat cushion and then tightening belts can become hot in a vehicle
the seatbelt. that has been closed up in sunny
7. Pull at the shoulder portion of the belt weather; they could burn a small
to confirm that it cannot be pulled out (ALR child. Check the child restraint
properly functioning). system before you place a child
in it.
restraint system in your vehicle.
Unsecured child restraint sys-
tems can be thrown around in-
side of the vehicle in a sudden
stop, turn or accident; they can
strike and injure vehicle occu-
9. To remove the child restraint system, pants as well as result in serious
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (60,1)
injuries or death to the child. seat. WARNING

2. Run the lap and shoulder belt through
or around the booster seat and the child . Never use a belt that is twisted or
CAUTION following the instructions provided by its reversed. In an accident, this can
manufacturer. increase the risk or severity of
When you install a child restraint injury to the child.
system, follow the manufacturer’s
instructions supplied with it. After
until you hear a click. Take care not to . Never place the shoulder belt
twist the seatbelt. under the child’s arm or behind
installing the child restraint system,
check to ensure that it is held Make sure the shoulder belt is positioned the child’s back. If an accident
securely in position. If it is not held across the center of child’s shoulder and occurs, this can increase the risk
tight and secure, the danger of your that the lap belt is positioned as low as or severity of injury to the child.
child suffering personal injury in the possible on the child’s hips. . The seatbelt should fit snugly in
event of an accident may be in- order to provide full restraint.
creased. Loose fitting belts are not as
effective in preventing or redu-
cing injury.
. Place the lap belt as low as
possible on the child’s hips. A
high-positioned lap belt will in-
crease the risk of sliding under
the lap belt and of the lap belt
sliding up over the abdomen, and
both can result in serious inter-
nal injury or death.
. Make sure the shoulder belt is
4. To remove the booster seat, press the
positioned across the center of
release button on the seatbelt buckle and
child’s shoulder. Placing the
allow the belt to retract.
shoulder belt over the neck may
1. Place the booster seat in the rear result in neck injury during sud-
seating position and sit the child on it. The den braking or in a collision.
child should sit well back on the booster

Black plate (61,1)
& Installation of child restraint tight and secure, the danger of your modating such child restraint systems.
1
systems by use of lower and child suffering personal injury in the
tether anchorages (LATCH) event of an accident may be in-
creased.
WARNING
. Child restraint systems and seat-
belts can become hot in a vehicle
that has been closed up in sunny
weather; they could burn a small
child. Check the child restraint
system before you place a child
in it.
restraint system in your vehicle. The lower anchorages (bars) are used for
Unsecured child restraint sys- installing a child restraint system only on
tems can be thrown around in- the rear seat window-side seating posi-
side of the vehicle in a sudden tions. For each window-side seating posi-
stop, turn or accident; they can Some types of child restraint systems can tion, two lower anchorages are provided.
strike and injure vehicle occu- be installed on the rear seat of your Each anchor bar is located where the seat
pants as well as result in serious vehicle without use of the seatbelts. Such cushion meets the seatback.
injuries or death to the child. child restraint systems are secured to the
designated anchorages provided on the
vehicle body.
CAUTION The lower and tether anchorages are
When you install a child restraint sometimes referred to as the LATCH
system, follow the manufacturer’s system (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
instructions supplied with it. After CHildren).
installing the child restraint system, Your vehicle is equipped with four lower
check to ensure that it is held anchorages (bars) and three upper an-
securely in position. If it is not held chorages (tether anchorages) for accom-
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (62,1)
indicate the positions of the lower an-

chorages (bars).
The tether anchorages (upper an- 2. While following the instructions sup-
chorages) are provided for all the seating plied by the child restraint system manu-
positions (center and both window-side Each lower anchorage is located where facturer, connect the lower hooks onto the
ones) of the rear seat. the seat cushion meets the seatback. lower anchorages located at “ ” marks on
the bottom of the rear seatback. When the
1. Use the “ ” marks to locate the two
hooks are connected, make sure the
lower anchorages (bars) for the position
adjacent seatbelts are not caught.
where you want to install the child restraint
system.
You will find marks “ ” at the bottom of

the rear seat seatbacks. These marks

Black plate (63,1)
manufacturer.
1
Since a top tether can provide additional
stability by offering another connection
between a child restraint system and the
vehicle, we recommend that you use a top
tether whenever one is required or avail-
able.
3. [If your child restraint system is of a 5. Before seating a child in the child
flexible attachment type (which uses restraint system, try to move seat back
tether belts to connect the child restraint and forth and left and right to verify that it
system properly to the lower anchorages)] is held securely in position.
While pushing the child restraint into the 6. To remove the child restraint system,
seat cushion, pull both left and right lower follow the reverse procedures of installa-
tether belts up to secure the child restraint tion.
system firmly by taking up the slack in the
belt. If you have any question concerning this
type of child restraint system, ask your
4. Connect the top tether hook to the
SUBARU dealer.
tether anchorage and firmly tighten the
tether. & Top tether anchorages
For information on how to set the top Your vehicle is equipped with three top
tether, read the following “Top tether tether anchorages so that a child restraint
anchorages”. system having a top tether can be
installed in the rear seat. When installing
a child restraint system using top tether,
proceed as follows, while observing the
instructions by the child restraint system
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (64,1)
! Anchorage location Open the cover flaps to use the tether

anchorages.
! To hook the top tether
2. Open the cover flaps to use the

anchorages. Fasten the top tether hook
of the child restraint system to the appro-
priate top tether anchorage.
1. Remove the head restraint at the
seating position where the child restraint
system has been installed with the lower
anchorages or seatbelt; lift up the head
restraint while pressing the release button.
Store the head restraint in the cargo area.
Avoid placing the head restraint in the
passenger compartment to prevent it from
being thrown around in the passenger
compartment in a sudden stop or a sharp
1) For left seat turn.
2) For center seat
3) For right seat
Three upper anchorages are installed on 3. Tighten the top tether securely.
the rear edge of the roof.

Black plate (65,1)
CAUTION *SRS airbag (Supplemental The system also controls front seatbelt
pretensioners. For operation instructions
1
Restraint System airbag) and precautions concerning the seatbelt
Always remove the head restraint
when mounting a child restraint *SRS: This stands for supplemental re- pretensioner, see the “Front seatbelt pre-
system with a top tether. Otherwise, straint system. This name is used be- tensioners” section in this chapter.
it may not be possible to fasten the cause the airbag system supplements the
top tether tightly. vehicle’s seatbelts.
WARNING
Your vehicle is equipped with a crash . To obtain maximum protection in

sensing and diagnostic module, which will the event of an accident, the
record the use of the seatbelt(s) by the driver and all passengers in the
driver and/or front passenger when any of vehicle should always wear seat-
the SRS frontal and side airbags deploys. belts when the vehicle is moving.
The SRS airbag is designed only
& Vehicle with driver’s and as a supplement to the primary
protection provided by the seat-
front passenger’s SRS air- belt. It does not do away with the
bags and lap/shoulder re- need to fasten seatbelts. In com-
straints bination with the seatbelts, it
Your vehicle is equipped with a supple- offers the best combined protec-
mental restraint system in addition to a tion in case of a serious accident.
lap/shoulder belt at each front seating Not wearing a seatbelt increases
position. the chance of severe injury or
The supplemental restraint system (SRS) death in a crash even when the
consists of two airbag (driver’s and front vehicle has the SRS airbag.
passenger’s frontal airbags) or four air- For instructions and precautions
bags (driver’s and front passenger’s fron- concerning the seatbelt system,
tal airbags and driver’s and front passen- see the “Seatbelts” section in
ger’s side airbags). this chapter.
These SRS airbags are designed only
as a supplement to the primary protec- . Do not sit or lean unnecessarily
tion provided by the seatbelt. close to the SRS airbag. Because
the SRS airbag deploys with
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (66,1)
considerable speed – faster than and the front passenger should deploys with considerable speed
the blink of an eye – and force to move the seat as far back as and force and can injure or even
protect in high speed collisions, possible and sit upright and well kill children, especially if they are
the force of an airbag can injure back in the seat. 12 years of age and under and
an occupant whose body is too . Do not place any objects over or are not restrained or improperly
close to SRS airbag. near the SRS airbag cover or restrained. Because children are
It is also important to wear your between you and the SRS airbag. lighter and weaker than adults,
seatbelt to help avoid injuries If the SRS airbag deploys, those their risk of being injured from
that can result when the SRS objects could interfere with its deployment is greater.
airbag contacts an occupant not proper operation and could be Consequently, we strongly re-
in proper position such as one propelled inside the vehicle and commend that ALL children (in-
thrown forward during pre-acci- cause injury. cluding those in child seats and
dent braking. those that have outgrown child
Even when properly positioned, restraint devices) sit in the REAR
there remains a possibility that seat properly restrained at all
an occupant may suffer minor times in a child restraint device
injury such as abrasions and or in a seatbelt, whichever is
bruises to the face or arms appropriate for the child’s age,
because of the SRS airbag de- height and weight.
ployment force. Secure ALL types of child re-
. The SRS airbags deploy with straint devices (including for-
considerable speed and force. ward facing child seats) in the
Occupants who are out of proper REAR seats at all times.
position when the SRS airbag According to accident statistics,
deploys could suffer very serious children are safer when properly
injuries. Because the SRS airbag restrained in the rear seating
needs enough space for deploy- positions than in the front seat-
ment, the driver should always
WARNING ing positions.
sit upright and well back in the . Put children aged 12 and under in For instructions and precautions
seat as far from the steering the rear seat properly restrained concerning the child restraint
wheel as practical while still at all times. The SRS airbag system, see the “Child restraint
maintaining full vehicle control

Black plate (67,1)
systems” section in this chapter. . A deploying SRS airbag releases 1

. NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD hot gas. Occupants could get
FACING CHILD SEAT IN THE burned if they come into direct
FRONT SEAT. DOING SO RISKS contact with the hot gas.
SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO
THE CHILD BY PLACING THE NOTE
CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO
THE SRS AIRBAG. When you sell your vehicle, we urge
you to explain to the buyer that it is
. Never allow a child to stand up, equipped with SRS airbags by alerting
or to kneel on the front passen- him or her to the applicable section in
ger’s seat, or never hold a child this Owner’s Manual.
on your lap or in your arms. The
SRS airbag deploys with consid-
erable force and can injure or
even kill the child.
CAUTION
. When the SRS airbag deploys,
some smoke will be released.
This smoke could cause breath-
ing problems for people with a
history of asthma or other
breathing trouble. If you or your
passengers have breathing pro-
blems after SRS airbag deploys,
get fresh air promptly.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (68,1)
1) Airbag control module (including impact

sensors)
2) Frontal airbag module (driver’s side)
3) Frontal airbag module (front passenger’s
side)
4) Front sub sensor (left-hand side)
5) Front sub sensor (right-hand side)
6) Side airbag module (driver’s side)
7) Side airbag module (front passenger’s
side)
8) Side airbag sensor (center pillar left-hand
side)
9) Side airbag sensor (center pillar right-
hand side)
10) Airbag wiring (yellow)
11) Seatbelt pretensioner (driver’s side)
12) Seatbelt pretensioner (front passenger’s
side)
13) Seatbelt buckle switch (front passenger’s
side)
14) Seatbelt buckle switch (driver’s side)
15) Driver’s seat position sensor
16) Front passenger’s seatbelt tension sen-
sor
17) Front passenger’s occupant detection
system weight sensor
18) Front passenger’s occupant detection
control module
19) Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON and
OFF indicator
20) SRS airbag system warning light

Black plate (69,1)
& Subaru advanced frontal air- system.

WARNING 1
bag system The driver’s SRS frontal airbag is stowed
Your vehicle is equipped with a Subaru in the center portion of the steering wheel. NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FA-
advanced frontal airbag system that com- The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag CING CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT
plies with the new advanced frontal airbag is stowed near the top of the dashboard SEAT. DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS
requirements in the amended Federal under an “SRS AIRBAG” mark. INJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS) In a moderate to severe frontal collision, BY PLACING THE CHILD’S HEAD
No. 208. the driver’s and front passenger’s SRS TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.
The Subaru advanced frontal airbag sys- frontal airbags deploy and supplement the
tem automatically determines the deploy- seatbelts by reducing the impact on the
ment force of the driver’s SRS frontal driver’s and front passenger’s head and
airbag at the time of deployment as well as chest.
whether or not to activate the front
passenger’s SRS frontal airbag and, if
activated, the deployment force of the
SRS frontal airbag at the time of deploy-
ment.
Your vehicle has warning labels on the
driver’s and front passenger’s sun visors
beginning with the phrase “EVEN WITH
ADVANCED AIR BAGS” and a tag
attached to the glove box lid beginning
with the phrase “Even with Advanced Air
Bags”. Make sure that you carefully read WARNING
the instructions on the warning labels and Never allow a child to stand up, or to
tag. kneel on the front passenger’s seat.
Always wear your seatbelt. The subaru The SRS airbag deploys with con-
advanced frontal airbag system is a siderable force and can injure or
supplemental restraint system and must even kill the child.
be used in combination with a seatbelt. All
occupants should wear a seatbelt or be
seated in an appropriate child restraint
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (70,1)
seatbelt to help avoid injuries that

can result when the SRS airbag
contacts an occupant not in proper
position such as one thrown toward
the front of the vehicle during pre-
accident braking.
WARNING WARNING
Never hold a child on your lap or in The SRS airbag deploys with con-
your arms. The SRS airbag deploys siderable speed and force. Occu-
with considerable force and can pants who are out of proper position
injure or even kill the child. when the SRS airbag deploys could
suffer very serious injuries. Be-
cause the SRS airbag needs enough WARNING
space for deployment, the driver
should always sit upright and well Do not put any objects over the
back in the seat as far from the steering wheel pad and dashboard.
steering wheel as practical while If the SRS frontal airbag deploys,
still maintaining full vehicle control those objects could interfere with its
and the front passenger should proper operation and could be pro-
move the seat as far back as pelled inside the vehicle and cause
possible and sit upright and well injury.
back in the seat.
It is also important to wear your

Black plate (71,1)

NOTE
driver’s seat position sensor under the
driver’s seat.
1
The driver’s SRS side airbag and
Whether or not the driver is wearing the seatbelt pretensioner are not controlled
seatbelt is monitored by the seatbelt by the Subaru advanced frontal airbag
buckle switch. system.
Observe the following precautions. Failure
to do so may cause the seatbelt buckle ! Front passenger’s SRS frontal air-
switch and/or the seat position sensor to bag
malfunction, preventing the Subaru ad- The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
vanced frontal airbag system from func- uses a dual stage inflator. The inflator
tioning correctly or causing the system to operates in different ways depending on
fail. the severity of impact.
. Do not place articles/metal objects or The total load on the seat is monitored by
install any accessory other than a genuine the occupant detection system’s weight
WARNING SUBARU accessory under the driver’s sensor located under the seat.
Do not attach accessories to the seat. Do not allow the rear seat occupant The system has another sensor that
windshield, or fit an extra-wide mir- to kick the driver’s seat or push up its monitors the tension of the front passen-
ror over the rear view mirror. If the bottom surface with his/her feet. ger seatbelt. Using the total seat load and
SRS airbag deploys, those objects . Do not place a magnet near the seatbelt tension data from the sensors,
could become projectiles that could seatbelt buckle or under the driver’s seat. the occupant detection system determines
seriously injure vehicle occupants. whether the front passenger’s SRS frontal
If the seatbelt buckle switch and/or the airbag should or should not be inflated.
driver’s seat position sensor have failed, The occupant detection system may not
! Driver’s SRS frontal airbag the SRS airbag system warning light will inflate the front passenger’s SRS frontal
The driver’s SRS frontal airbag uses a illuminate. Although the driver’s SRS airbag even when the driver’s SRS frontal
dual stage inflator. The inflator operates in frontal airbag can deploy regardless of airbag deploys. This is normal.
different ways depending on the severity the backward-forward adjustment of the Observe the following precautions. Failure
of impact, backward-forward adjustment driver’s seat position even when the to do so may prevent the Subaru ad-
of the driver’s seat position and whether or warning light is on, have the system vanced frontal airbag system from func-
not he/she is wearing the seatbelt. inspected by your SUBARU dealer im- tioning correctly or cause the system to
The backward-forward adjustment of the mediately if the SRS airbag system warn- fail.
driver’s seat position is monitored by the ing light comes on.
. Do not apply any strong impact to the
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (72,1)
front passenger’s seat such as by kicking. “Seatbelt extender” section in this chap- ! Passenger’s frontal airbag ON and
. Do not spill liquid on the front passen- ter.) OFF indicators
ger’s seat. If liquid is spilled, wipe it off
immediately. If the seatbelt buckle switch and/or front
passenger’s occupant detection system
. Do not remove or disassemble the front have failed, the SRS airbag system
passenger’s seat. warning light will illuminate. Have the
. Do not install any accessory (such as system inspected by your SUBARU deal-
an audio amplifier) other than a genuine er immediately if the SRS airbag system
SUBARU accessory under the front pas- warning light comes on.
senger’s seat. If your vehicle has sustained impact, this
. Do not place anything (shoes, umbrel- may affect the proper function of the
la, etc.) under the front passenger’s seat. Subaru advanced frontal airbag system.
. The front passenger’s seat must not be Have your vehicle inspected at your
used with the head restraint removed. SUBARU dealer.
. Do not leave any article including a
child restraint system on the front passen- NOTE 1) U.S.-spec. models
The front passenger’s SRS side airbag 2) Canada-spec. models
ger’s seat or the seatbelt tongue and
and seatbelt pretensioner are not con- or : Front passenger’s frontal airbag
buckle engaged when you leave your ON indicator
vehicle. trolled by the Subaru advanced frontal or : Front passenger’s frontal airbag
. Do not place a magnet near the airbag system. OFF indicator
seatbelt buckle and the seatbelt retractor.
The front passenger’s frontal airbag ON
. Do not use front seats with their back- and OFF indicators show you the status of
ward-forward position and seatback not the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag.
being locked into place securely. If any of
The indicators are located next to the
them are not locked securely, adjust them
clock in the central portion of the instru-
again. For adjusting procedure, refer to
ment panel.
the “Manual seat” in the front seats section
in chapter 1 in this Owner’s Manual. When the ignition switch is turned to the
(Models equipped with manual seats only) “ON” position, both the ON and OFF
indicators illuminate for 6 seconds during
. If you use an optional seatbelt exten-
which time the system is checked. Follow-
der, remove it after each use. (Refer to the
ing the system check, both indicators

Black plate (73,1)
extinguish for 2 seconds. After this, one of

the indicators illuminates depending on
facing child restraint system and an infant
is restrained with it. (See WARNING that
even children who have outgrown a
child restraint system be also
1
the status of the front passenger’s SRS follows.) seated in the REAR seat. This is
frontal airbag reached by the Subaru . The seat is equipped with a forward because children sitting in the front
advanced frontal airbag system monitor- facing child restraint system and a small passenger’s seat may be killed or
ing. child is restrained with it. (See WARNING severely injured should the front
If the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag that follows.) passenger’s SRS frontal airbag de-
is activated, the passenger’s frontal airbag . The seat is equipped with a booster ploy. REAR seats are the safest
ON indicator will illuminate while the OFF seat and a small child is in the booster place for children.
indicator will remain extinguished. seat. (See WARNING that follows.)
If the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag . The seat is relieved of the occupant When the front passenger’s seat is occu-
is deactivated, the passenger’s frontal load for a time exceeding the predeter- pied by a child, observe the following
airbag ON indicator will remain extin- mined period. precautions. Failure to do so may increase
guished while the OFF indicator will the load on the front passenger’s seat,
. The seat is occupied by a child who
illuminate. activating the front passenger’s SRS
has outgrown a child restraint system
With the ignition switch turned to the “ON” frontal airbag even though that seat is
(See WARNING that follows.) or a small
position, if both the ON and OFF indica- occupied by a child.
adult.
tors remain lit or extinguished simulta- . Do not place any article on the seat
. The front passenger’s occupant detec-
neously even after the system check other than the child occupant and a child
tion system is faulty.
period, the system is faulty. Contact your restraint system.
SUBARU dealer immediately for an in- WARNING . Do not place more than one child on
spection. the seat.
! Conditions in which front passen- NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FA- . Do not install any accessory such as a
ger’s SRS frontal airbag is not CING CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT table or TV onto the seatback.
activated PASSENGER’S SEAT EVEN IF THE . Do not store a heavy load in the
FRONT PASSENGER’S SRS FRON- seatback pocket.
The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag TAL AIRBAG IS DEACTIVATED. Be
will not be activated when any of the . Do not allow the rear seat occupant to
sure to install it in the REAR seat in place his/her hands or legs on the front
following conditions are met regarding the a correct manner. Also, it is strongly
front passenger’s seat: passenger’s seatback, or allow him/her to
recommended that any forward fa- pull the seatback.
. The seat is empty. cing child seat or booster seat be
. The seat is equipped with a rearward installed in the REAR seat, and that
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (74,1)
! If the front passenger’s frontal air- . Ensure that the backward-forward po- the fact that the actions noted above
bag ON indicator illuminates and the sition and seatback of front passenger’s have been taken, seat the child/small
OFF indicator extinguishes even seat are locked into place securely by adult in the rear seat and immediately
when an infant or a small child is in moving the seat back and forth. (Models contact your SUBARU dealer for an
a child restraint system (including equipped with manual seats only) inspection. Even if the system has
booster seat) passed the dealer inspection, it is
If the ON indicator still illuminates while recommended that on subsequent trips
Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK” the OFF indicator extinguishes after taking the child/small adult always take the
position if the front passenger’s frontal relevant corrective actions described rear seat.
airbag ON indicator illuminates and the above, relocate the child restraint system
OFF indicator extinguishes even when an to the rear seat and immediately contact Children who have outgrown a child
infant or a small child is in a child restraint your SUBARU dealer for an inspection. restraint system should always wear the
system (including booster seat). Remove seatbelt irrespective of whether the airbag
the child restraint system from the seat. By NOTE is deactivated or activated.
referring to the child restraint manufac- When a child who has outgrown a child ! Conditions in which front passen-
turer’s recommendations as well as the restraint system or a small adult is ger’s SRS frontal airbag is activated
child restraint system installation proce- seated in the front passenger’s seat,
dures in the “Child restraint systems” the Subaru advanced frontal airbag The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
section in this chapter, correctly install system may or may not activate the will be activated for deployment upon
the child restraint system. Turn the ignition front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag impact when any of the following condi-
switch to the “ON” position and make sure depending on the occupant’s seating tions is met regarding the front passen-
that the front passenger’s frontal airbag posture. If the front passenger’s SRS ger’s seat.
ON indicator goes out and the OFF frontal airbag is activated (the ON . When the seat is occupied by an adult.
indicator comes on. indicator illuminates while the OFF . When a heavy article is placed on the
indicator extinguishes), take the follow- seat.
If the ON indicator remains illuminated
while the OFF indicator extinguishes, take ing actions.
When the front passenger’s seat is occu-
the following actions. . Ensure that no article is placed on pied by an adult, observe the following
. Ensure that no article is placed on the the seat other than the occupant. precautions. Failure to do so may lessen
seat other than the child restraint system . Ensure that there is no article left in the load on the front passenger’s seat,
and the child occupant. the seatback pocket. deactivating the front passenger’s SRS
. Ensure that there is no article left in the If the ON indicator still illuminates while frontal airbag despite the fact that the seat
seatback pocket. the OFF indicator extinguishes despite is occupied by an adult.

Black plate (75,1)
. Do not allow the rear seat occupant to . Ensure that there are no articles,
lift the front passenger’s seat cushion books, shoes or other objects trapped
system. If you have any questions, you
may contact the following Subaru distribu-
1
using his/her feet. under the seat, at the rear of the seat, or tors:
. Do not place any article under the front on the side of the seat.
<Continental U.S., Alaska and the District
passenger’s seat, or squeeze any article . Ensure that the backward-forward po- of Columbia>
from behind and under the seat. This may sition and seatback of front passenger’s
lift the seat cushion. seat are locked into place securely by Subaru of America, Inc.
. Do not squeeze any article between moving the seat back and forth. (Models Customer Dealer Services Department
the front passenger’s seat and side trim/ equipped with manual seats only) P.O. Box 6000
pillar, door or center console box. This . Next, turn the ignition switch to the Cherry Hill, NJ 08034-6000
may lift the seat cushion. “ON” position and wait 6 seconds to allow 1-800-SUBARU3 (1-800-782-2783)
the system to complete self-checking.
<Hawaii>
! If the passenger’s frontal airbag OFF Following the system check, both indica-
indicator illuminates and the ON tors extinguish for 2 seconds. Now, the Servco Subaru Inc., dba Subaru Hawaii
indicator extinguishes even when ON indicator should illuminate while the 2850 Pukoloa Street, Suite 202, Honolulu,
the front passenger’s seat is occu- OFF indicator remains extinguished. HI 96819
pied by an adult 808-839-2273
If the OFF indicator still illuminates while
This can be caused by the adult incor- the ON indicator remains extinguished, <Guam>
rectly sitting in the front passenger’s seat. ask the occupant to move to the rear seat Shen’s Corporation dba Prestige
Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK” and immediately contact your SUBARU Automobile
position. Ask the front passenger to set dealer for an inspection. 491, East Marine Drive, Route 1 Dededo,
the seatback to the upright position, sit up
straight in the center of the seat cushion, ! Effect vehicle modifications made Guam
correctly fasten the seatbelt, position his/ for persons with disabilities may 671-633-2698
her legs out forward, and adjust the seat to have on Subaru advanced frontal
airbag system operation (U.S. only) <Puerto Rico>
the rearmost position. Turn the ignition Trebol Motors
switch to the “ON” position. If the OFF Changing or moving any parts of the front
seats, seatbelts, front bumper, front side P.O. Box 11204, San Juan, Puerto Rico
indicator remains illuminated while the ON
frame, instrument panel, combination me- 00910
indicator remains extinguished, take the
following actions. ter, steering wheel, steering column, tire, 787-793-2828
. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK” suspension or floor panel can affect the There are currently no Subaru distributors
position. operation of the Subaru advanced airbag in any other U.S. territories. If you are in
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (76,1)
such an area, please contact the Subaru

distributor or dealer from which you
bought your vehicle.

Black plate (77,1)
! Operation The SRS airbag can function only when

1
the ignition switch is in the “ON” position.
The Subaru advanced frontal airbag sys-
tem is designed to determine the activa-
tion or deactivation condition of the front
passenger’s SRS frontal airbag depend-
ing on the total load on the front passen-
ger’s seat monitored by the front passen-
ger’s occupant detection system weight
sensor. For this reason, only the driver’s
SRS frontal airbag may deploy in the
event of a collision, but this does not mean
failure of the system.
A) Driver’s side
B) Passenger’s side
1) SRS AIRBAGs deploy as soon as a collision occurs.
2) After deployment, SRS AIRBAGs start to deflate immediately so that the driver’s vision is not
obstructed.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (78,1)
If the front sub sensors inside both front Although it is highly unlikely that the SRS deploy in side or rear impacts or in roll-
fenders and the impact sensors in the airbag would activate in a non-accident over accidents because deployment of
airbag control module detect a predeter- situation, should it occur, the SRS airbag only the driver’s SRS frontal airbag or both
mined amount of force during a frontal will deflate quickly, not obscuring vision driver’s and front passenger’s SRS frontal
collision, the control module sends signals and will not interfere with the driver’s airbags would not help the occupant in
to the airbag module(s) (only driver’s ability to maintain control of the vehicle. those situations. The driver’s and front
module or both driver’s and front passen- passenger’s SRS frontal airbags are de-
ger’s modules) instructing the module(s) When the SRS airbag deploys, a sudden, signed to function on a one-time-only
to inflate the SRS frontal airbag(s). The fairly loud inflation noise will be heard and basis.
driver’s and front passenger’s SRS frontal some smoke will be released. These
airbags use dual stage inflators. The two occurrences are a normal result of the SRS airbag deployment depends on the
inflators of each airbag are triggered either deployment. This smoke does not indicate level of force experienced in the passen-
sequentially or simultaneously, depending a fire in the vehicle. ger compartment during a collision. That
on the severity of impact, backward- level differs from one type of collision to
CAUTION another, and it may have no bearing on
forward adjustment of the driver’s seat
position and fastening/unfastening of the the visible damage done to the vehicle
Do not touch the SRS airbag system itself.
seatbelt in the case of the driver’s SRS components around the steering
frontal airbag and depending on the wheel and dashboard with bare
severity of impact and the total load on hands right after deployment. Doing
the seat in the case of the front passen- so can cause burns because the
ger’s SRS frontal airbag. After deploy- components can be very hot as a
ment, the SRS airbags immediately start result of deployment.
to deflate so that the driver’s vision is not
obstructed. The time required from detect- The driver’s SRS frontal airbag and front
ing impact to the deflation of the SRS passenger’s SRS frontal airbag are de-
airbag after deployment is shorter than the signed to deploy in the event of an
blink of an eye. accident involving a moderate to severe
Both when only the driver’s SRS frontal frontal collision. They are basically not
airbag deploys and the driver’s and front designed to deploy in lesser frontal im-
passenger’s SRS frontal airbags deploy, pacts because the necessary protection
the driver’s and front passenger’s seatbelt can be achieved by the seatbelt alone.
pretensioners operate at the same time. Also, they are basically not designed to

Black plate (79,1)
! Examples of accidents in which the ! Examples of the types of accidents both driver’s and front passenger’s SRS
1
driver’s/driver’s and front passen- in which it is possible that the frontal airbags may be activated when the
ger’s SRS frontal airbag(s) will most driver’s/driver’s and front passen- vehicle sustains a hard impact in the
likely deploy. ger’s SRS frontal airbag(s) will de- undercarriage area from the road surface
ploy. (such as when the vehicle plunges into a
deep ditch, is severely impacted or
knocked hard against an obstacle on the
road such as a curb).
A head-on collision against a thick con-

crete wall at a vehicle speed of 12 to 19
mph (20 to 30 km/h) or higher activates
only the driver’s SRS frontal airbag or both
driver’s and front passenger’s SRS frontal
airbags. The airbag(s) will also be acti-
vated when the vehicle is exposed to a
frontal impact similar in fashion and
magnitude to the collision described
above.
Only the driver’s SRS frontal airbag or
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (80,1)
! Examples of the types of accidents of driver’s/driver’s and front passenger’s ! Examples of the types of accidents
in which deployment of the driver’s/ SRS frontal airbag(s). If the vehicle strikes in which the driver’s/driver’s and
driver’s and front passenger’s SRS an object, such as a telephone pole or front passenger’s SRS frontal
frontal airbag(s) is unlikely to occur. sign pole, or if it slides under a truck’s load airbag(s) will basically not deploy.
bed, or if it sustains an oblique offset
frontal impact, the driver’s/driver’s and
front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag(s)
may not deploy depending on the level of
accident forces involved.
There are many types of collisions which The driver’s and front passenger’s SRS
might not necessarily require deployment frontal airbags are designed basically not

Black plate (81,1)
to deploy if the vehicle is struck from the & SRS side airbag (if equipped) 1
side or from behind, or if it rolls onto its
side or roof, or if it is involved in a low- The SRS side airbag is stored in the door
speed frontal collision. side of each front seat seatback, which
bears an “SRS AIRBAG” label.
In a moderate to severe side impact
collision, the SRS side airbag on the
impacted side of the vehicle deploys
between the occupant and the door panel
and supplements the seatbelt by reducing
the impact on the occupant’s chest and
head.
WARNING
The SRS side airbag is designed as
WARNING
only a supplement to the primary Do not sit or lean unnecessarily
protection provided by the seatbelt. close to either front door. The SRS
1) First impact They do not do away with the need
2) Second impact side airbag is stored in both front
to fasten seatbelts. It is also impor- seat seatbacks next to the door, and
In an accident where the vehicle is tant to wear your seatbelt to help it provides protection by deploying
impacted more than once, the driver’s avoid injuries that can result when rapidly (faster than the blink of an
and/or front passenger’s SRS frontal an occupant is not seated in a eye) in the event of a side impact
airbag(s) will deploy only once on the first proper upright position. collision. However, the force of SRS
impact. side airbag deployment may cause
Example: In the case of a double collision, injuries if your head or other parts of
first with another vehicle, then against a the body are too close to the SRS
concrete wall in immediate succession, side airbag.
once either or both of the driver’s and front
passenger’s SRS frontal airbags is/are
activated on the first impact, it/they will not
be activated on the second impact.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (82,1)
the event of an accident, the force of

the SRS side airbag deployment
could injure the child seriously
because his/her head or arms or
other parts of the body are too close
to the SRS side airbag. Since your
vehicle is also equipped with a
passenger’s SRS frontal airbag,
children aged 12 and under should
be placed in the rear seat anyway
and should be properly restrained at
all times.
WARNING
Do not rest your arm on either front
door or its internal trim. It could be
injured in the event of SRS side
airbag deployment.
WARNING WARNING
Never allow a child to kneel on the Do not attach accessories to the
front passenger’s seat facing the door trim or near either SRS side
side window or to wrap his/her arms airbags and do not place objects
around the front seat seatback. In near the SRS side airbags. In the

Black plate (83,1)
event of the SRS side airbag deploy- ! Operation The SRS side airbag can function only
1
ment, they could be propelled dan- when the ignition switch is in the “ON”
gerously toward the vehicle’s occu- position.
pants and cause injuries.
The driver’s and front passenger’s SRS
side airbags deploy independently of each
other since each has its own impact
sensor. Also, the SRS side airbag deploys
independently of the frontal airbags in the
steering wheel and instrument panel.
An impact sensor is incorporated into
each of the vehicle’s center pillars. If
either sensor detects a certain predeter-
mined amount of force during a side
impact collision, the control module sends
a signal to the side airbag module on the
impacted side of the vehicle, instructing it
to inflate the SRS side airbag. Then the
side airbag module produces gas, which
WARNING instantly inflates the SRS side airbag.
After deployment, the SRS side airbag
Do not put any kind of cover or will deflate in a few seconds.
clothes or other objects over either
front seatback and do not attach The SRS side airbag deploys even when
labels or stickers to the front seat no one occupies the seat on the side on
surface on or near the SRS side which an impact is applied.
airbag. They could prevent proper When the SRS side airbag deploys, a
deployment of the SRS side airbag, 1) SRS side airbag deploys as soon as a sudden, fairly loud inflation noise will be
reducing protection available to the collision occurs.
heard and some smoke will be released.
front seat’s occupant. 2) SRS side airbag protects the front
These occurrences are a normal result of
passenger’s head and chest.
3) After deployment, SRS side airbag starts the deployment. This smoke does not
to deflate immediately. indicate a fire in the vehicle.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (84,1)
CAUTION ! Example of the type of accident in

which the SRS side airbag will most
Do not touch the SRS side airbag likely deploy.
system components around the
front seat seatback with bare hands
right after deployment. Doing so can
cause burns because the compo-
nents can be very hot as a result of
deployment.
The SRS side airbag is designed to

deploy in the event of an accident invol-
ving a moderate to severe side impact
collision. It is basically not designed to
deploy in a lesser side impact. Also, it is
basically not designed to deploy in frontal
or rear impacts because SRS side airbag
deployment would not help the occupant A severe side impact near the front seat
in those situations. activates the SRS side airbag.
Each SRS side airbag is designed to
function on a one-time-only basis.
SRS side airbag deployment depends on
the level of force experienced in the
passenger compartment during a side
impact collision. That level differs from
one type of collision to another, and it may
have no bearing on the visible damage
done to the vehicle itself.

Black plate (85,1)
! Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS side airbag is unlikely to 1) The vehicle is involved in an oblique
side-on impact. 1
deploy. 2) The vehicle is involved in a side-on
impact in an area outside the vicinity of
the passenger compartment.
3) The vehicle strikes a telephone pole or
similar object.
4) The vehicle is involved in a side-on
impact from a motorcycle.
5) The vehicle rolls onto its side or roof.
There are many types of collisions which
might not necessarily require SRS side
airbag deployment. In the event of acci-
dents like those illustrated, the SRS side
airbag may not deploy depending on the
level of accident forces involved.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (86,1)
! Examples of the types of accidents The SRS side airbag is basically not & SRS airbag system monitors
in which the SRS side airbag will designed to deploy if the vehicle is
basically not deploy. involved in a frontal collision or is struck
from behind. Examples of such accidents
are illustrated.
A diagnostic system continually monitors

the readiness of the SRS airbag system
(including front seatbelt pretensioners)
1) First impact
while the vehicle is being driven. The
2) Second impact SRS airbag system warning light “ ” will
show normal system operation by lighting
In an accident where the vehicle is struck for approximately 6 seconds when the
from the side more than once, the SRS ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
side airbag deploys only once on the first position.
impact.
The following components are monitored
Example: In the case of a double side by the indicator:
impact collision, first with one vehicle and . Front sub sensor (Right-hand side)
immediately followed by another from the . Front sub sensor (Left-hand side)
same direction, once the SRS side airbag
is activated on the first impact, it will not be . Airbag control module (including im-
1) The vehicle is involved in frontal collision
with another vehicle (moving or station- activated on the second. pact sensors)
ary). . Frontal airbag module (Driver’s side)
2) The vehicle is struck from behind. . Frontal airbag module (Front passen-

Black plate (87,1)
ger’s side) system. Immediately take your vehi- system. For required servicing of 1
. Side airbag sensor (Center pillar right- cle to your nearest SUBARU dealer the SRS airbag, see your nearest
hand side) to have the system checked. Unless SUBARU dealer. Tampering with
. Side airbag sensor (Center pillar left- checked and properly repaired, the or disconnecting the system’s
hand side) seatbelt pretensioners and/or SRS wiring could result in accidental
. Side airbag module (Driver’s side) airbags will not operate properly in inflation of the SRS airbag or
the event of a collision, which may could make the system inopera-
. Side airbag module (Front passenger’s
increase the risk of injury. tive, which may result in serious
side)
. Flashing or flickering of the warn- injury. The wiring harnesses of
. Seatbelt pretensioner (Driver’s side) the SRS airbag system are cov-
ing light
. Seatbelt pretensioner (Front passen- ered with yellow insulation and
ger’s side) . No illumination of the warning system connectors are yellow for
. Seatbelt buckle switch (Driver’s side) light when the ignition switch is easy identification.
first turned to the “ON” position
. Seatbelt buckle switch (Front passen-
ger’s side) . Continuous illumination of the
. Driver’s seat position sensor warning light CAUTION
. Front passenger’s seatbelt tension . Illumination of the warning light
If you need service or repair in areas
sensor while driving
listed below, have an authorized
. Front passenger’s occupant detection SUBARU dealer perform the work.
system weight sensor The SRS airbag control module,
. Front passenger’s occupant detection & SRS airbag system servicing impact sensors and airbag modules
control module are stored in these areas.
. Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON WARNING
. Under the center console
and OFF indicator . When discarding an airbag mod- . Inside each front fender
. All related wiring ule or scrapping the entire vehi- . Steering wheel and column and
cle damaged by a collision, con- nearby areas
WARNING sult your SUBARU dealer.
. Top of the dashboard on front
If the warning light exhibits any of . The SRS airbag has no user- passenger’s side and nearby
the following conditions, there may serviceable parts. Do not use areas
be a malfunction in the seatbelt electrical test equipment on any
circuit related to the SRS airbag . Each front seat and nearby area
pretensioners and/or SRS airbag
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (88,1)
. Inside each center pillar damaged. and/or wiring is not advisable.

This could interfere with prop-
In the event that the SRS airbag is & Precautions against vehicle er operation of the SRS airbag
deployed, replacement of the system system.
should be performed only by an author-
modification
ized SUBARU dealer. When the compo-
nents of the SRS airbag system are WARNING CAUTION
replaced, use only genuine SUBARU . To avoid accidental activation of
parts. Do not perform any of the following
the system or rendering the sys- modifications. Such modifications
NOTE tem inoperative, which may re- can interfere with proper operation
sult in serious injury, no modifi- of the SRS airbag system.
In the following cases, contact your
cations should be made to any
SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.
components or wiring of the SRS . Attachment of any equipment
. The front part of the vehicle was airbag system. (brush bar, winches, snow plow,
involved in an accident in which only skid plate, etc.) other than genu-
the driver’s SRS frontal airbag or both This includes following modifica- ine SUBARU accessory parts to
driver’s and front passenger’s SRS tions: the front end.
frontal airbags did not deploy. . Installation of custom steering . Modification of the suspension
. The pad section of the steering wheels system or front end structure.
wheel or front passenger’s frontal air- . Attachment of additional trim . Installation of a tire of different
bag cover is scratched, cracked, or materials to the dashboard size and construction from the
otherwise damaged.
. Installation of custom seats tires specified on the vehicle
In addition, if your vehicle is equipped placard attached to the driver’s
. Replacement of seat fabric or door pillar or specified for indivi-
with SRS side airbags, contact your leather
SUBARU dealer as soon as possible in dual vehicle models in this Own-
the following cases. . Installation of additional fabric er’s Manual.
. Either center pillar or a nearby area or leather on the front seat . Attachment of any equipment
of the vehicle was involved in an . Installation of additional elec- (side steps or side sill protectors,
accident in which the SRS side airbag trical/electronic equipment etc.) other than genuine SUBARU
did not deploy. such as a mobile two-way accessory parts to the side body.
. The fabric or leather of either front radio on or near the SRS
seatback is cut, frayed, or otherwise airbag system components

Black plate (89,1)
Always consult your SUBARU dealer if

you want to install any accessory parts on
1
your vehicle.

Black plate (2,1)
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
Left Page
Model "ALL_MODEL_MEMO" EDITED: 2006/ 1/ 17
Black plate (3,1)
Keys and doors
Keys ..................................................................... 2-2 Alarm system ..................................................... 2-13

Key number ........................................................ 2-2 System operation............................................... 2-13
Activating and deactivating the alarm system ..... 2-13
2
Immobilizer (if equipped) .................................... 2-3
Security ID plate.................................................. 2-3 If you have accidentally triggered the alarm
Security indicator light ........................................ 2-4 system ............................................................ 2-13
Key replacement ................................................. 2-4 Arming the system ............................................ 2-13
Door locks ........................................................... 2-4 Disarming the system ........................................ 2-15
Locking and unlocking from the outside .............. 2-4 Valet mode ........................................................ 2-15
Locking and unlocking from the inside ................ 2-5 Passive arming .................................................. 2-15
Power door locking switches ............................. 2-6 Tripped sensor identification .............................. 2-16
Shock sensors (dealer option)............................ 2-17
Key lock-in prevention function ........................... 2-6
Remote keyless entry system ............................ 2-7 Child safety locks .............................................. 2-17
Locking the doors ............................................... 2-7 Windows............................................................. 2-18
Unlocking the doors ............................................ 2-8 Power windows ................................................. 2-18
Illuminated entry ................................................. 2-8 Rear gate ............................................................ 2-20
Vehicle finder function......................................... 2-8 Moonroof (if equipped)...................................... 2-21
Sounding a panic alarm....................................... 2-8 To open the moonroof ....................................... 2-22
Selecting audible signal operation ....................... 2-8 To close the moonroof ....................................... 2-22
Replacing the battery .......................................... 2-9 Anti-entrapment function.................................... 2-22
Replacing lost transmitters .................................. 2-9 Sun shade ......................................................... 2-22

Black plate (92,1)
2-2 Keys and doors
Keys CAUTION
Do not attach a large key holder or
key case to either key. If it bangs
against your knees while you are
driving, it could turn the ignition
switch from the “ON” position to the
“Acc” or “LOCK” position, thereby
stopping the engine.
& Key number

The key number is stamped on the key
Vehicle without immobilizer system number plate attached to the key set.
1) Master key Write down the key number and keep it in
Vehicle with immobilizer system 2) Submaster key another safe place, not in the vehicle. This
1) Master key (Black) 3) Valet key number is needed to make a replacement
2) Submaster key (Black) 4) Key number plate key if you lose your key or lock it inside the
3) Valet key (Gray) vehicle.
Three types of keys are provided for your
4) Key number plate
vehicle: For information on making replacement
5) Security ID plate
Master key, submaster key and valet key. keys for vehicles with the immobilizer
system, refer to the “Immobilizer” section
The master key and submaster key fit all
in this chapter.
locks on your vehicle.
. Ignition switch
. Driver’s door
. Glove box
The valet key fits only the ignition switch
and door lock. You can keep the glove box
locked when you leave your vehicle and
valet key at a parking facility.

Black plate (93,1)
Keys and doors 2-3
Immobilizer (if equipped) device may not cause harmful inter- . Do not get the key wet. If the key
ference, and (2) this device must gets wet, wipe it dry with a cloth
The immobilizer system is designed to accept any interference received, in- immediately.
prevent an unauthorized persons from cluding interference that may cause 2
starting the engine. Only keys registered undesired operation.
with your vehicle’s immobilizer system can Changes or modifications not ex- & Security ID plate
be used to operate your vehicle. Even if pressly approved by the party respon-
an unregistered key fits into the ignition sible for compliance could void the
switch and can be turned to the “START” user’s authority to operate the equip-
position, the engine will automatically stop ment.
after several seconds.
NOTE
Each immobilizer key contains a trans- To protect your vehicle from theft,
ponder in which the key’s ID code is please pay close attention to the fol-
stored. When a key is inserted into the lowing security precautions:
ignition switch and turned to the “ON”
. Never leave your vehicle unattended
position, the transponder transmits the
with its keys inside.
key’s ID code to the immobilizer system’s
. Before leaving your vehicle, close all
receiver. If the transmitted ID code
windows and lock the doors and rear
matches the ID code registered in the
gate. 1) Key number plate
immobilizer system, the system allows the
. Do not leave spare keys or any 2) Security ID plate
engine to be started. Since the ID code is
record of your key number in the
transmitted and acted upon almost in- The security ID is stamped on the security
vehicle.
stantly, the immobilizer system does not ID plate attached to the key set. Write
impede normal starting of the engine. down the security ID and keep it in
If the engine fails to start, pull out the key CAUTION another safe place, not in the vehicle.
once before trying again. (Refer to the . Do not place the key under direct This number is needed to make a replace-
“Ignition switch” section [chapter 3].) sunlight or anywhere it may ment key if you lose your key or lock it
become hot. inside the vehicle.
This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of This number is also needed for replace-
Industry Canada. Operation is subject ment or repair of the engine control
to the following two conditions: (1) This module and immobilizer control module.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (94,1)
2-4 Keys and doors
& Security indicator light Up to four keys can be registered for use Door locks
with one vehicle.
The security indicator light deters potential
thieves by indicating that the vehicle is
For security, all the keys registered with & Locking and unlocking from
your vehicle’s immobilizer system will the outside
equipped with an immobilizer system. It have their ID codes erased and re-
begins flashing approximately 60 seconds registered when a new key is made.
after the ignition switch is turned from the Therefore, all of your vehicle’s keys must
“ON” position to the “Acc” or “LOCK” be presented when a new key is regis-
position or immediately after the key is tered. Any key that is not re-registered
pulled out. when a new key is made cannot be used
If the security indicator light does not flash, after the other keys are re-registered. For
the immobilizer system may be faulty. If information on replacement keys and on
this occurs, contact your SUBARU dealer the registration of keys with your immo-
as soon as possible. bilizer system, contact your SUBARU
In case an unauthorized key is used (e.g. dealer.
an imitation key), the security indicator
light comes on.
1) Lock
NOTE 2) Unlock
Even if the security indicator light
flashes irregularly or its fuse blows To lock the driver’s door from the outside
(the light does not flash if its fuse is with the key, turn the key toward the rear.
blown), the immobilizer system will To unlock the door, turn the key toward the
function normally. front (Driver’s side only).
Pull the outside door handle to open the
& Key replacement unlocked door.
Your key number plate and security ID
plate will be required if you ever need a
replacement key made. Any new key must
be registered for use with your vehicle’s
immobilizer system before it can be used.

Black plate (95,1)
Keys and doors 2-5
doors from the outside without the key.
& Locking and unlocking from 2

the inside
WARNING
Keep all doors locked when you
drive, especially when small chil-
dren are in your vehicle.
Along with the proper use of seat-
belts and child restraints, locking
1) Rotate the lock lever rearward. the doors reduces the chance of 1) Lock
2) Close the door. being thrown out of the vehicle in an 2) Unlock
accident.
To lock the door from the outside without To lock the door from the inside, rotate the
the key, rotate the lock lever rearward and It also helps prevent passengers lock lever rearward. To unlock the door
then close the door. from falling out if a door is acciden- from the inside, rotate the lock lever
tally opened, and intruders from forward.
To lock the door from the outside using the unexpectedly opening doors and
power door locking switch, push the front entering your vehicle. The red mark on the lock lever appears
side of the switch (“LOCK” side) and then when the door is unlocked.
close the door. In this case, all closed
doors and the rear gate are locked at the Pull the inside door handle to open an
same time. unlocked door.
Always make sure that all doors and the Always make sure that all doors and the
rear gate are locked before leaving your rear gate are closed before starting to
vehicle. drive.
NOTE
Make sure that you do not leave the key
inside the vehicle when locking the

Black plate (96,1)
2-6 Keys and doors
Power door locking switches NOTE NOTE

Make sure that you do not leave the key When leaving the vehicle, make sure
inside the vehicle before locking the you are holding the key before locking
doors from the outside using the power the doors.
door locking switches.
& Key lock-in prevention func-

tion
This function prevents the doors from
being locked with the key still in the
ignition switch.
! Behavior with key lock-in preven-
tion function operational
With the driver’s door open, the doors are
1) Lock automatically kept unlocked even if the
2) Unlock
door locking switch is pushed to the
All doors and the rear gate can be locked “LOCK” side.
and unlocked by the power door locking ! Behavior with key lock-in preven-
switches located at the driver’s side and tion function non-operational
the front passenger’s side doors.
. If the lock lever is turned to the rear
To lock all the doors and the rear gate, (“LOCK”) position with the driver’s door
push the “LOCK” side of the switch. open and the driver’s door is then closed
To unlock all the doors and the rear gate, with the lock lever in that position, the
push the “UNLOCK” side of the switch. driver’s door is locked.
. If the spare key is used to lock the
When you close the doors after you set driver’s door from the outside of the
the door locks, the doors remain locked. vehicle, the door is locked.

Black plate (97,1)
Keys and doors 2-7
Remote keyless entry system vehicle.

The remote keyless entry system has the
CAUTION following functions. 2
. Locking and unlocking the doors and
. Do not expose the transmitter to rear gate without a key
severe shocks, such as those . Sounding a panic alarm
experienced as a result of drop- . Arming and disarming the alarm sys-
ping or throwing. tem (if your vehicle is equipped with an
. Do not take the transmitter apart optional alarm system). See the next
except when replacing the bat- section “Alarm system” for detailed infor-
tery. mation.
. Do not get the transmitter wet. If it The operable distance of the keyless entry : LOCK/ARM button
gets wet, wipe it dry with a cloth system is approximately 30 feet (10 Press to Lock all doors.
immediately. meters). However, this distance will vary Press and Hold to activate panic alarm.
depending on environmental conditions. Press 3 times in a 5-second period to use
This device complies with Part 15 of vehicle finder function.
The system’s operable distance will be
the FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of : UNLOCK/DISARM button
shorter in areas near a facility or electronic 1) Press once to Unlock driver’s door.
Industry Canada. Operation is subject equipment emitting strong radio waves 2) Press a second time to Unlock all
to the following two conditions: (1) This such as a power plant, broadcast station, other doors and rear gate.
device may not cause harmful inter- TV tower, or remote controller of home
ference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference received, in-
electronic appliances. & Locking the doors
cluding interference that may cause The keyless entry system does not oper- Briefly press the “ ” button (for less than 2
undesired operation. ate when the key is inserted in the ignition seconds) to lock all doors and rear gate.
Changes or modifications not ex- switch to prevent accidental lockout. An electronic chirp will sound once and
pressly approved by the party respon- the turn signal lights will flash once.
sible for compliance could void the If any of the doors or the rear gate is not
user’s authority to operate the equip- fully closed, an electronic chirp will sound
ment. 5 times and the turn signal lights will flash
5 times to alert you that the doors or the
Two transmitters are provided for your rear gate are not properly closed. When
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (98,1)
2-8 Keys and doors
you close the door, it will automatically & Illuminated entry & Sounding a panic alarm
lock. The interior (dome and cargo area) light To activate the alarm, keep the “ ” button
NOTE will illuminate when the “ ” button is pressed for more than 2 seconds.
pressed. This light stay illuminated for The horn will sound and the turn signal
If the “ ” button is pressed for 2
approximately 30 seconds if any of the lights will flash.
seconds or longer, the panic alarm will
doors or the rear gate is not opened. To deactivate it, press any button on the
sound. When locking the doors in
normal circumstances, press the “ ” If the “ ” button is pressed before 30 remote transmitter. Unless a button on the
button for less than 2 seconds. For seconds have elapsed, this light will go remote is pressed, the alarm will be
details on the panic alarm, refer to out. deactivated after approximately 30 sec-
“Sounding a panic alarm”. To activate this function, set the following onds.
interior light switches to the indicated
positions: & Selecting audible signal op-
& Unlocking the doors Dome light: Middle position eration
Briefly press the “ ” button (for less than Cargo area light: DOOR position
2 seconds) to unlock the driver’s door. An Using an electronic chirp, the system will
electronic chirp will sound twice and the give you an audible signal when the doors
& Vehicle finder function lock and unlock. If desired, you may turn
turn signal lights will flash twice. To unlock
all other doors and the rear gate, briefly Use this function to find your vehicle the audible signal off.
press the “ ” button a second time within parked among many vehicles in a large Do the following to deactivate the audible
5 seconds. parking lot. Provided you are within 30 feet signal. You can also use the same steps
(10 meters) of the vehicle, pressing the “ ” to restore the function.
NOTE button 3 times in a 5-second period will 1. Sit in the driver’s seat and shut all
If the interval between the first and cause your vehicle’s horn to sound once doors and the rear gate.
second presses of the “ ” button (for and its turn signal lights to flash 3 times. 2. Open the driver’s door, then remove
unlocking of all of the doors and the the key from the ignition switch.
NOTE
rear gate) is extremely short, the sys- 3. Hold down the “UNLOCK” side of the
tem may not respond. If the interval between presses is too
power door locking switch.
short when you press the “ ” button 3
times, the system may not respond to 4. While holding down the “UNLOCK”
the signals from the remote transmitter. side of the power door locking switch,
insert the key into the ignition switch and
remove it again at least 6 times within 10
seconds after Step 3.

Black plate (99,1)
Keys and doors 2-9
5. While still holding down the “UNLOCK” To replace the battery:

side of the power door locking switch,
close the driver’s door once within 10
seconds after Step 4. 2
6. The turn signal lights flashes 3 times to
indicate completion of the setting.
NOTE
If you do not close the driver’s door
within 10 seconds after Step 4, a flash
of the turn signal lights will signal time-
out. If this happens, repeat the whole
procedure from Step 1. 1) Negative (−) side facing up
You may have the above settings done by 1. Open the transmitter case using a flat-
your SUBARU dealer. 4. Replace with a new battery (Type
head screwdriver. CR2025 or equivalent) making sure to
& Replacing the battery install the new battery with the negative
(−) side facing up.
CAUTION 5. Reinstall the back half of the transmit-
ter case by snapping it back on.
. Do not let dust, oil or water get on
or in the transmitter when repla- After the battery is replaced, the trans-
cing the battery. mitter must be synchronized with the
keyless entry system’s control unit.
. Be careful not to damage the
Press either the “ ” or “ ” button 6
printed circuit board in the trans-
times to synchronize the unit.
mitter when replacing the battery.
& Replacing lost transmitters
When the transmitter battery begins to get
If you lose a transmitter or want to
weak, transmitter range will begin to
2. Separate the case. purchase additional transmitters (up to
decrease. Replace the battery as soon
four can be programmed), you should re-
as possible. 3. Remove the old battery from the
program all of your transmitters for secur-
holder.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (100,1)
2-10 Keys and doors
ity reasons. It is recommended that you

have your dealer program all of your
transmitters into your system.
! Programming the transmitters
The keyless entry system is equipped with
a special code learning feature that allows
you to program new transmitter codes into
the system or to delete old ones. The
system can learn up to four unique
transmitter codes. The four transmitter
codes may be the same or different.
Programming transmitter codes into
Transmitter circuit board 1) Open and close the driver’s door once.
system:
To register a new transmitter with the
keyless entry system, it is necessary to
program the transmitter’s code (identifica-
tion number) into the system. A label
showing the code is affixed to the bag
containing the transmitter, and another is
affixed to the circuit board inside the
transmitter. If there is no bag, open the
transmitter case and make a note of the
eight-digit number. Program the number
into the system in accordance with the
following procedure:
1. Firmly close the doors and the rear
Bag containing transmitter gate. 1) ON
2. Open the driver’s door, sit on the 2) LOCK
driver’s seat, and close the door. 2) Insert the key into the ignition switch,
3. Perform the following steps within 45 then turn it from the “LOCK” position to the
seconds. “ON” position 10 times within 15 seconds.

Black plate (101,1)
Keys and doors 2-11

NOTE the switch and the next exceeds 5
. When you complete step 2), an seconds, an error will occur. In this
electronic tone will sound once. event, perform the procedure again
. If you do not perform steps 1) and 2) beginning with part 4. If an error occurs 2
within 45 seconds, an error will occur. 6 times, perform the procedure again
An electronic tone will not sound. In starting with part 3.
this event, perform the whole proce-
dure again beginning with part 1.
4. Open and close the door once within
15 seconds.
NOTE
. When part 4 of the procedure is
completed, an electronic tone will 5. Before the electronic tone stops
sound for 30 seconds. sounding, push the “LOCK” side of the
. If you do not perform the operations power door lock switch the same number
in part 4 within 15 seconds, an error of times as the leftmost digit of the
will occur and the electronic tone will transmitter code. For example, push the
not sound. In this event, perform the lock switch 8 times if the leftmost digit of
registration steps again beginning with the code is 8. 6. When you have finished entering the
part 3 of the procedure.
NOTE number, push the “UNLOCK” side of the
lock switch within 5 seconds.
. The electronic tone will stop sound-
ing when you start entering the num- NOTE
ber. . An electronic tone will sound.
. If you do not start entering the . If you push the “UNLOCK” side of
number using the lock switch before the lock switch when more than 5
the electronic tone stops sounding, an seconds have passed, an error will
error will occur. In this event, perform occur. In this event, perform the proce-
the registration steps again beginning dure again beginning with part 4. If an
with part 3 of the procedure. error occurs 6 times, perform the
. If the interval between one push of procedure again starting with part 3.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (102,1)
2-12 Keys and doors
7. Perform parts 5 and 6 of the procedure the second time is identical to that entered four transmitter codes into the system. If
for each of the remaining digits of the the first time. you have only one current transmitter,
transmitter code beginning with the sec- program it 4 times. If you have two current
ond digit (counting from the left) and NOTE transmitters, program each one twice. If
finishing with the eighth digit. If the code entered the second time is you have three current transmitters, pro-
not identical to the code entered the gram two of them once and the third one
NOTE first time, an error will occur. In this twice. This process will leave only current
. When you finish entering the eighth event, perform the procedure again transmitter codes in the system’s memory.
digit, an electronic tone will sound for beginning with part 5. If an error occurs
30 seconds. 5 times, perform the procedure again NOTE
. If the interval between one push of starting with part 3. Make sure no one else is operating
the switch and the next exceeds 5 their keyless entry system within range
10. If you wish to program another trans-
seconds, an error will occur. In this of your vehicle when programming
mitter code into the system (up to four
event, perform the procedure again transmitters. If someone else were to
transmitter codes can be programmed into
beginning with part 4. If an error occurs operate their remote transmitter while
the system), perform the procedure begin-
6 times, perform the procedure again you are programming your transmit-
ning with part 4. When you have finished
starting with part 3. ters, it is possible that their transmitter
programming all of the necessary trans-
code will be programmed into your
8. Before the electronic tone stops mitter codes into the system, remove the
system, allowing them unauthorized
sounding, use the power door lock switch key from the ignition switch.
access to your vehicle.
to reenter the transmitter code beginning 11. Test every registered transmitter to
with the leftmost digit. confirm correct operation.
NOTE ! Deleting old transmitter codes
If you do not start entering the number
The control unit of the keyless entry
using the lock switch before the elec-
system has four memory locations to store
tronic tone stops sounding, an error
transmitter codes, giving it the ability to
will occur. In this event, perform the
operate with up to four transmitters. When
procedure again beginning with part 3.
you lose a transmitter, the lost transmit-
9. When you have finished entering the ter’s code remains in the memory. For
code a second time, an electronic tone will security reasons, lost transmitter codes
sound for 1 second to indicate completion should be deleted from the memory.
of registration, provided the code entered To delete old transmitter codes, program

Black plate (103,1)
Keys and doors 2-13
Alarm system to 30 seconds. system is now activated.
The alarm system helps to protect your The alarm is triggered by: NOTE
vehicle and valuables from theft. The horn . Opening a door or the rear gate. You may have the above setting 2
sounds and the turn signal lights flash if . Physical impact to the vehicle, such as change done by your SUBARU dealer.
someone attempts to break into your forced entry (only vehicles with shock
vehicle. The starter motor is also inter- sensors (dealer option)) & If you have accidentally trig-
rupted to prevent starting the vehicle gered the alarm system
without a key. & Activating and deactivating ! To stop the alarm
The system can be armed and disarmed
the alarm system
Do any of the following operations:
with the remote transmitter. To change the setting of your vehicle’s
. Press any button on the remote trans-
The system does not operate when the alarm system for activation or deactiva-
mitter.
key is inserted into the ignition switch. tion, do the following.
. Cycle the ignition switch from the
1. Disarm the alarm system (see “Dis-
Your vehicle’s alarm system has been set “LOCK” to “ON” position 3 times within 5
arming the system” in this section).
for activation at the time of shipment from seconds.
2. Sit in the driver’s seat and shut all
the factory. You can set the system for doors and the rear gate.
deactivation yourself or have it done by & Arming the system
3. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
your SUBARU dealer. ! To arm the system using remote
position.
4. Hold down the UNLOCK side of the transmitter
& System operation driver’s power door locking switch, open 1. Close all windows and the moonroof (if
The alarm system will give the following the driver’s door within the following 1 so equipped).
alarm when triggered: second, and wait 10 seconds without 2. Remove the key from the ignition
. The vehicle’s horn will sound and the releasing the switch. The setting will then switch.
turn signal lights will flash for 30 seconds. be changed as follows:
3. Open the doors and get out of the
. If any door or the rear gate remains vehicle.
open after the 30-second period, the horn If the system was previously activated:
will continue to sound for a maximum of 3 The horn sounds twice, indicating that the 4. Make sure that the engine hood is
minutes. If the door and the rear gate are system is now deactivated. locked.
closed while the horn is sounding, the 5. Close all doors and the rear gate.
If the system was previously deactivated:
horn will stop sounding with a delay of up The horn sounds once, indicating that the
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (104,1)
2-14 Keys and doors
once, the turn signal lights will flash once,

and the indicator lights will start flashing
rapidly. After rapid flashing for 30 seconds
(standby time), the indicator lights will then
flash slowly (twice approximately every 2
seconds), indicating that the system has
been armed for surveillance.
If any of the doors or the rear gate is not
fully closed, an electronic chirp sounds 5
times, the turn signal lights flash 5 times to
alert you that the doors or the rear gate
are not properly closed. When you close
: Press to Arm the system.
the door, the system will automatically arm
and doors will automatically lock. 6. Push the front side (“LOCK” side) of
: Press to Disarm the system. the power door locking switch to set the
! To arm the system using power door locks.
door locking switches 7. Close the door. An electronic chirp will
sound once, the turn signal lights will flash
1. Close all windows. once, and the indicator lights will start
2. Remove the key from the ignition flashing rapidly. After rapid flashing for 30
switch. seconds (standby time), the indicator
3. Open the doors and get out of the lights will then flash slowly (twice approxi-
vehicle. mately every 2 seconds), indicating that
4. Make sure that the engine hood is the system has been armed for surveil-
locked. lance.
5. Close the doors and the rear gate but
leave only the driver’s door or the front NOTE
passenger’s door open. . The system can be armed even if the
Security indicator light
engine hood, the windows and/or
6. Briefly press the “ ” button (for less moonroof are opened. Always make
than 2 seconds). All doors and the rear sure that they are fully closed before
gate will lock, an electric chirp will sound arming the system.

Black plate (105,1)
Keys and doors 2-15
. The 30-second standby time can be NOTE (Models with immobilizer) for locking and unlocking the doors and
eliminated if you prefer. Have it per- If your vehicle is equipped with an rear gate and panic activation.
formed by your SUBARU dealer. immobilizer, the immobilizer’s function
. The system is in the standby mode will cause the security indicator light to
To enter the valet mode, change the 2
for a 30-second period after locking the setting of your vehicle’s alarm system for
flash (approximately once every 3 deactivation mode. (Refer to “Activating
doors with the remote transmitter. The seconds) even after the system is
security indicator light will flash at and deactivating the alarm system” in this
disarmed. section.) The security indicator light will
short intervals during this period.
. If any of the following actions is continue to flash once every 3 seconds
NOTE indicating that the system is in the valet
done during the standby period, the The system can be disarmed by the
system will not switch to the surveil- mode (only vehicle with an immobilizer).
following method, too.
lance state. To exit valet mode, change the setting of
. Cycle the ignition switch from the
. Doors are unlocked using the your vehicle’s alarm system for activation
“LOCK” to the “ON” position 3 times
remote transmitter.
within 5 seconds. mode. (Refer to “Activating and deactivat-
. Any door or the rear gate is ing the alarm system” in this section.)
opened. ! Emergency disarming
. Ignition switch is turned to the NOTE
If you cannot disarm the system using the
“ON” position. transmitter (i.e. the transmitter is lost, If your vehicle is not equipped with an
. The engine does not start even broken or the transmitter battery is too immobilizer, the security indicator light
when the ignition switch is turned to weak), you can disarm the system without does not flash during the valet mode.
the “START” position once the alarm using the transmitter.
system has been triggered. 1. Unlock the door with the key and then & Passive arming
open the door.
& Disarming the system When passive arming mode has been
2. Insert the key into the ignition switch programmed by the dealer, arming of the
Briefly press the “ ” button (for less than and cycle it from the “LOCK” to the “ON” system is automatically accomplished
2 seconds) on the remote transmitter. The position 3 times within 5 seconds. without using the remote transmitter. Note
driver’s door will unlock, an electronic that in this mode, DOORS MUST BE
chirp will sound twice, the turn signal
lights will flash twice and the indicator
& Valet mode MANUALLY LOCKED.
light will go off. When you choose the valet mode, the ! To enter the passive mode
security system does not operate. In valet If you wish to program the passive arming
mode, the remote transmitter is used only mode, have it done by your SUBARU
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (106,1)
2-16 Keys and doors
dealer. vehicle.
! Arming the system 4. Before closing the doors, lock all doors
with the inside door lock levers.
CAUTION 5. Close the doors. The system will
automatically arm after one minute.
In passive mode, the system will
automatically activate the alarm but In the passive mode, the system can also
WILL NOT automatically lock the be armed with the remote transmitter or
doors. In order to lock the doors with the power door locking switches. If
you must either lock them as in- the remote transmitter or power door
dicated in the following step 4 or locking switch is used to lock the vehicle,
with the key once they have been arming will take place immediately regard-
closed. Failure to lock the doors less of whether or not the passive mode
manually will result in a higher 1) ON has been selected.
security risk. 2) LOCK ! Disarming the system
2. Turn the ignition switch from “ON” to To disarm the system, briefly press the
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” “LOCK” position and remove the key from “ ” button on the transmitter.
position. the ignition switch. & Tripped sensor identification
The security indicator light flashes when
the alarm system has been triggered.
Also, the number of flashes indicates the
location of unauthorized intrusion or the
severity of impact on the vehicle.
. When the ignition switch is turned to
the “ON” position, the indicator light will
light for 1 second and then flash as
follows:
When a door or rear gate was opened:
5 times
When the ignition switch was turned to
3. Open the doors and get out of the the “ON” position: 3 times

Black plate (107,1)
Keys and doors 2-17
When a strong impact or multiple NOTE Child safety locks

impacts were sensed: twice (only . The shock sensors are not always
vehicles with shock sensors (dealer able to sense impacts caused by break-
option)) ing in, and cannot sense an impact that WARNING 2
When a light impact was sensed: once does not cause vibration (such as
(only vehicles with shock sensors breaking the glass using a rescue Always use the child safety lock
(dealer option)) hammer). whenever a child rides in the rear
. The shock sensors may sense vi- seat. Serious injury could result if a
NOTE bration like those shown below and child accidentally opened the door
Any of the above indicator light flash- trigger the alarm system. Select the and fell out.
ings will recur each time the ignition settings of the alarm system and shock
switch is turned to the “ON” position. sensors appropriately depending on
Rearming the alarm system cancels the where you usually park your vehicle.
flashing. Example:
Vibration from a construction site
& Shock sensors (dealer op- Vibration in a multistory parking
tion) garage
The shock sensors trigger the alarm Vibration from trains
system when they sense impacts applied . You can have the sensitivity of the
to the vehicle and when any of their shock sensors adjusted to your pre-
electric wires is cut. The alarm system ference by your SUBARU dealer.
causes the horn to sound and the turn
signal lights to flash for a short time when
the sensed impact is weak, but it warns of 1) Lock
a strong impact or multiple impacts by 2) Unlock
sounding the horn and flashing the turn
Each rear door has a child safety lock that
signal lights, both lasting approximately 30
prevents the doors from being opened
seconds.
even if the inside door handle is pulled.
If you desire, your SUBARU dealer can
When the child safety lock lever is in the
connect them and set them for activation
lock position, the door cannot be opened
or deactivation.
from inside regardless of the position of
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (108,1)
2-18 Keys and doors
the inner door handle lock lever. The door Windows ! Driver’s side switches
can only be opened from the outside.
& Power windows
WARNING
To avoid serious personal injury
caused by entrapment, you must
do the following.
. When operating the power win-
dows, be extremely careful to
prevent anyone’s fingers, arms,
neck or head from being caught
in the window.
. Always lock the passengers’ win- 1) Lock switch
dows using the lock switch when 2) For driver’s window (with one-touch auto
down feature)
children are riding in the vehicle.
3) For front passenger’s window
. Before leaving the vehicle, al- 4) For rear left window
ways remove the key from the 5) For rear right window
ignition switch for safety and
never allow an unattended child All door windows can be controlled by the
to remain in the vehicle. Failure power window switch cluster at the driver
to follow this procedure could side door.
result in injury to a child operat-
ing the power window.
The power windows operate only when

the ignition switch is in the “ON” position.

Black plate (109,1)
Keys and doors 2-19
! Operating the driver’s window window will close as long as the switch is ! Locking the passengers’ windows
held.
! Operating the passengers’ windows 2
1) Open 1) Lock
2) Automatically open 2) Unlock
3) Close
To open the passengers’ windows, push To lock the passengers’ windows, push
To open: the appropriate switch down and hold it the lock switch. When the lock switch is in
Push the switch down lightly and hold it. until the window reaches the desired the “LOCK” position, the passengers’
The window will open as long as the position. windows cannot be opened or closed.
switch is held. To close the window, pull the switch up Press the switch again to cancel the
This switch also has a one-touch auto and hold it until it reaches the desired passengers’ window locking.
down feature that allows the window to be position. ! Passengers’ side switches
opened fully without holding the switch.
To open the window, push the switch
Push the switch down until it clicks and down and hold it until the window reaches
release it, and the window will fully open. the desired position.
To stop the window halfway, pull the
To close the window, pull the switch up
switch up lightly.
and hold it until the window reaches the
To close: desired position.
Pull the switch up lightly and hold it. The When the lock switch on the power
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (110,1)
2-20 Keys and doors
window switch cluster, located on the Rear gate go.

driver’s side door, is in the “LOCK”
position, the passengers’ windows cannot The rear gate can be locked and unlocked
be operated with the passengers’ WARNING using either the keyless entry system or
switches. the power door locking switches.
. Do not attempt to shut the rear Refer to the “Power door locking switches”
gate while holding the inside and “Remote keyless entry system” sec-
handle. Also avoid closing the tions in this chapter.
rear gate by pulling on the inside
handle from inside the cargo
space. There is a danger of your
hand being caught and injured.
. To prevent dangerous exhaust
gas from entering the vehicle,
always keep the rear gate closed
while driving.
CAUTION
. Do not jam a plastic bag in or
place cellophane tape on the rear
gate stays or scratch the stays To open the rear gate, first unlock the rear
while loading or unloading cargo. gate lock then pull the outside handle up.
That could cause leakage of gas Then, hold the rear gate and raise it as
from the stays, which may result high as it will go.
in their inability to hold the rear
gate open.
. Be careful not to hit your head or
face on the rear gate when open-
ing or closing the rear gate and
when loading or unloading car-

Black plate (111,1)
Keys and doors 2-21
Moonroof (if equipped) . Never try to check the anti-en-

trapment function by deliberately
placing part of your body in the
WARNING moonroof. 2
. Never let anyone’s hands, arms,
head or any objects protrude CAUTION
from the moonroof. A person
could be seriously injured if the . Do not sit on the edge of the open
vehicle stops suddenly or turns moonroof.
sharply or if the vehicle is in- . Do not operate the moonroof if
volved in an accident. falling snow or extremely cold
To avoid serious personal injury conditions have caused it to
To close the rear gate, lower it slowly and caused by entrapment, you must freeze shut.
push down firmly until the latch engages. do the following.
The rear gate can be lowered easily if you . Before closing the moonroof,
pull down holding the recessed grip. make sure that no one’s hands,
arms, head or other objects will
NOTE be accidentally caught in the
If the rear gate cannot be unlocked due moonroof.
to a discharged battery, a fault in the
. Before leaving the vehicle, al-
door locking/unlocking system or other
ways remove the key from the
causes, you can unlock it by manually
ignition switch for safety and
operating the rear gate lock release
never allow an unattended child
lever.
to remain in the vehicle. Failure
For the procedure, refer to “Rear gate – to follow this procedure could
if the rear gate cannot be unlocked” in result in injury to a child operat-
chapter 9 “In case of emergency”. ing the moonroof. 1) Open/close switch
2) Open
3) Close
The moonroof operates only when the
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (112,1)
2-22 Keys and doors
ignition switch is in the “ON” position. & Anti-entrapment function & Sun shade
When the moonroof senses an object
& To open the moonroof trapped between its glass and the vehi-
Push and quickly release the rear part of cle’s roof during closure, it automatically
the switch to open the moonroof. The sun moves back by 6 in (15 cm) from that point
shade will also be opened together with and then stops. The anti-entrapment
the moonroof. The moonroof will stop at a function may also be activated by a strong
position 20 in (50 cm) away from the fully shock on the moonroof even when there is
closed position. Push the switch again to nothing trapped.
open the moonroof completely.
To stop the moonroof at a desired position, NOTE
simply push the opposite side of the . For the sake of safety, it is recom-
switch. mended that you avoid driving with the
moonroof fully opened.
After washing the vehicle or after it rains, . Driving with the moonroof fully open
wipe away water on the roof prior to The sun shade can be slid forward or
can cause an annoying sound to gen- backward by hand while the moonroof is
opening the moonroof to prevent drops erate at high speeds. If such a condi-
of water from falling into the passenger closed.
tion has been encountered, use the If the moonroof is opened, the sun shade
compartment. moonroof at the initial stop position of also moves back.
20 in (50 cm).
& To close the moonroof . If the moonroof cannot be closed
Push and quickly release the front part of through switch operation because of
the switch to close the moonroof. The system failure, it can be closed manu-
moonroof will stop at a position 8 in (20 ally using a hex-head wrench. For the
cm) away from the fully closed position. procedure, refer to “Moonroof – if the
Push the switch again to close the moon- moonroof cannot be closed” in chapter
roof completely. 9 “In case of emergency”.
To stop the moonroof at a desired position,
simply push the opposite side of the
switch.

Black plate (5,1)
Instruments and controls
Ignition switch ..................................................... 3-3 Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light (if
LOCK.................................................................. 3-3 equipped)/Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF
Acc..................................................................... 3-4 indicator light (if equipped) .............................. 3-14
ON...................................................................... 3-4 Brake system warning light................................ 3-15
START ................................................................ 3-4 Door open warning light .................................... 3-16 3
Key reminder chime ............................................ 3-5 Low fuel warning light ....................................... 3-16
Ignition switch light (if equipped) ......................... 3-5 All-Wheel Drive warning light (AT vehicles)......... 3-16
Key interlock release (AT vehicles only) ............... 3-5 Vehicle Dynamics Control operation indicator
light (if equipped)............................................. 3-16
Hazard warning flasher....................................... 3-6 Shift position indicator (AT vehicles) .................. 3-17
Meters and gauges.............................................. 3-6 Turn signal indicator lights................................. 3-17
Speedometer....................................................... 3-6 High beam indicator light ................................... 3-17
Odometer/Trip meter............................................ 3-6 Low tire pressure warning light (if equipped) ...... 3-17
Tachometer ......................................................... 3-7 Cruise control indicator light.............................. 3-19
Fuel gauge.......................................................... 3-7 Cruise control set indicator light ........................ 3-19
Temperature gauge ............................................. 3-8 Clock .................................................................. 3-19
Outside temperature indicator ............................. 3-9
Light control switch........................................... 3-20
Warning and indicator lights .............................. 3-9 Headlights ......................................................... 3-20
Seatbelt warning light and chime ........................ 3-10 High/low beam change (dimmer) ........................ 3-21
SRS airbag system warning light ........................ 3-10 Headlight flasher ............................................... 3-21
Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON and OFF Daytime running light system............................. 3-21
indicators......................................................... 3-11
CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunction Turn signal lever ................................................ 3-22
indicator lamp .................................................. 3-12 Illumination brightness control......................... 3-23
Charge warning light .......................................... 3-12 Headlight beam leveler (Vehicle with HID
Oil pressure warning light .................................. 3-12 headlights) ...................................................... 3-23
AT OIL TEMPerature warning light Parking light switch........................................... 3-23
(AT vehicles) .................................................... 3-13 Front fog light button ........................................ 3-24
ABS warning light .............................................. 3-13

Black plate (6,1)
Instruments and controls
Wiper and washer .............................................. 3-24 Mirrors ................................................................ 3-29

Windshield wiper and washer switches ............... 3-25 Inside mirror...................................................... 3-29
Rear window wiper and washer switch................ 3-26 Outside mirrors ................................................. 3-30
Windshield wiper deicer (if equipped) .............. 3-27 Tilt steering wheel ............................................. 3-32
Rear window defogger button........................... 3-28 Horn .................................................................... 3-32

Black plate (117,1)
Instruments and controls 3-3
Ignition switch your knees or hands may accidentally

touch it in a way that turns the ignition
switch.
WARNING
& LOCK
. Never turn the ignition switch to
The key can only be inserted or removed
3
“LOCK” while the vehicle is
being driven or towed because in this position. The ignition switch will lock
that will lock the steering wheel, the steering wheel when you remove the
preventing steering control. And key.
when the engine is turned off, it If turning the key is difficult, turn the
takes a much greater effort than steering wheel slightly to the right and left
usual to steer. as you turn the key.
. Before leaving the vehicle, al- NOTE ! Automatic transmission vehicles
ways remove the key from the . Keep the ignition switch in the
ignition switch for safety and “LOCK” position when the engine is
never allow an unattended child not running.
to remain in the vehicle. Failure . Using electrical accessories for a
to follow this procedure could long time with the ignition switch in the
result in injury to a child or “ON” or “Acc” position can cause the
others. Children could operate battery to go dead.
the power windows, the sunroof
If the ignition switch will not move from
or other controls or even make
the “LOCK” position to the “Acc”
the vehicle move.
position, turn the steering wheel
slightly to the left and right as you turn
The ignition switch has four positions:
the ignition switch.
LOCK, Acc, ON and START.
. If the key is attached to a keyholder
or to a large bunch of other keys,
centrifugal force may act on it as the
vehicle moves, resulting in unwanted
turning of the ignition switch. Also, if a
large keyholder is attached to the key,
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (118,1)
3-4 Instruments and controls
while turning it. NOTE

The engine may not start in the follow-
& Acc ing cases:
In this position the electrical accessories
(radio, accessory power outlet, etc.) can
be used.
& ON
This is the normal operating position after
the engine is started.
& START
The key can be turned from “Acc” to
“LOCK” only when the selector lever is in CAUTION
the “P” position.
Do not turn the ignition switch to the
! Manual transmission vehicles . The key grip is touching another key
“START” position while the engine
or a metallic key holder.
is running.
The engine is started in this position. The

starter cranks the engine to start it. When
the key is released (after the engine has
started), the key automatically returns to
the “ON” position.
! For models with immobilizer
If you fail to start your engine with your
registered key, once pull out the key (at
this time, the security indicator light
blinks), and then insert the key in the
The key can be turned from “Acc” to ignition switch and turn it to the “START”
“LOCK” only when the key is pushed in position and again try to start your engine. . The key is near another key that

Black plate (119,1)
contains an immobilizer transponder. the “P” position: Take your vehicle to the nearest SUBARU
. The key is near or touching another 1. Take out the screwdriver. dealer immediately to have the key inter-
transmitter. lock system repaired.
& Key reminder chime

3
The reminder chime sounds when the
driver’s door opens and the key is in the
“LOCK” or “Acc” positions. The chime
stops when the key is removed from the
ignition switch.
NOTE
The ignition switch light flashes when
the reminder chime sounds.
2. Remove the cover under the steering

& Ignition switch light (if column using a Phillips screwdriver.
equipped)
For easy access to the ignition switch in
the dark, the ignition switch light comes on
when the driver’s door is opened. After
closing the door, the light remains lit for 5
seconds and then dims before it goes out.
The light flashes if you insert the key into
the ignition switch with the driver’s door
open.
& Key interlock release (AT ve-

hicles only)
If the key can not be turned to the “LOCK”
position even when the selector lever is in 3. Turn the ignition key while pressing the
key interlock release lever.

Black plate (120,1)
Hazard warning flasher Meters and gauges knob.

! Odometer
& Speedometer
The odometer shows the total distance
The speedometer shows the vehicle
that the vehicle has been driven.
speed.
! Double trip meter
& Odometer/Trip meter
The hazard warning flasher is used to

warn other drivers when you have to park
your vehicle under emergency conditions.
The hazard warning flasher works with the
ignition switch in any position. 1) A trip meter
To turn on the hazard warning flasher, 1) Trip meter 2) B trip meter
push the hazard warning button on the 2) Odometer The trip meter shows the distance that the
instrument panel. To turn off the flasher, vehicle has been driven since you last set
This meter displays the odometer and two
push the button again. it to zero.
trip meters when the ignition switch is in
NOTE the “ON” position. To change the mode indication, briefly
push the knob.
When the hazard warning flasher is on, NOTE Each press of the knob changes the
the turn signals do not work.
Even with the ignition switch in the function alternately.
“Acc” or “LOCK” position, the od-
ometer and trip meters are displayed
for 10 seconds when you press the To set the trip meter to zero, select the A

Black plate (121,1)
trip or B trip meter by pushing the knob & Tachometer & Fuel gauge
and keep the knob pushed for more than 2 The tachometer shows the engine speed
seconds. in thousands of revolutions per minute.
CAUTION CAUTION
3
To ensure safety, do not attempt to Do not operate the engine with the
change the function of the indicator pointer of the tachometer in the red
during driving, as an accident could zone. In this range, fuel injection will
result. be cut by the engine control module
to protect the engine from overrev-
NOTE ving. The engine will resume run-
ning normally after the engine speed
If the connection between the combina-
is reduced below the red zone.
tion meter and battery is broken for any
reason such as vehicle maintenance or 1) Low fuel warning light
fuse replacement, the data recorded on NOTE (non-turbo models only) The fuel gauge shows the approximate
the trip meter will be lost. To protect the engine while the “P” or amount of fuel remaining in the tank.
“N” position is selected (for AT models) The gauge does not return to “E” even
or while the shift lever is in neutral (for though the ignition switch is in the “Acc” or
MT models), the engine is controlled so “LOCK” position.
that the engine speed does not become
too high even if the accelerator pedal is The gauge may move slightly during
fully depressed. braking, turning or acceleration due to fuel
level movement in the tank.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (122,1)
NOTE fuel quantity of approximately 4.0 US The coolant temperature will vary in
gal (15 liters, 3.3 Imp gal). accordance with the outside temperature
and driving conditions.
CAUTION We recommend that you drive moderately
Immediately put fuel in the tank until the pointer of the temperature gauge
whenever the low fuel warning light reaches near the middle of the range.
comes on. Engine misfires as a Engine operation is optimum with the
result of an empty tank could cause engine coolant at this temperature range
damage to the engine. and high revving operation when the
engine is not warmed up enough should
be avoided.
& Temperature gauge CAUTION
If the pointer exceeds the normal
operating range, safely stop the
You will see the “ ” sign near the
vehicle as soon as possible.
fuel gauge.
This indicates that the fuel filler door See “In case of emergency” in
(lid) is located on the right side of the chapter 9.
vehicle.
! Low fuel warning light
The low fuel warning light comes on when
the tank is nearly empty [approximately
2.3 US gal (9.0 liters, 1.9 Imp gal)]. It only
operates when the ignition switch is in the
“ON” position. When this light illuminates, 1) Normal operating range
fill the fuel tank immediately. The temperature gauge shows engine
coolant temperature when the ignition
NOTE switch is in the “ON” position.
This light does not go out unless the
tank is replenished up to an internal

Black plate (123,1)
& Outside temperature indica- Warning and indicator lights

tor
Several of the warning and indicator lights
come on momentarily and then go out
when the ignition switch is initially turned
to the “ON” position. This permits check- 3
ing the operation of the bulbs.
Apply the parking brake and turn the
ignition switch to the “ON” position. The
following lights come on:
: Seatbelt warning light
AT vehicles
: SRS airbag system warning light
1) U.S.-spec. models / : Front passenger’s frontal airbag
2) Canada-spec. models ON indicator light
MT vehicles
1) U.S.-spec. models The outside temperature indicator is lo- / : Front passenger’s frontal airbag
2) Canada-spec. models cated below the odometer/trip meter. The OFF indicator light
indicator can indicate an outside tempera-
ture ranging from −22 to 1228F (−30 to : CHECK ENGINE warning light/Mal-
508C). function indicator lamp
The indicator can give a false reading : Charge warning light
under any of the following conditions:
: Oil pressure warning light
. When there is too much sun.
. During idling; while running at low : AT OIL temperature warning light (AT
speeds in a traffic jam; when the engine vehicles)
is restarted immediately following a shut- / : ABS warning light
down.
. When the actual outside temperature / : Brake system warning light
falls outside the specified indicator range. : All-Wheel Drive warning light (AT
vehicles)
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (124,1)
: Vehicle Dynamics Control operation If the driver’s seatbelt is still not fastened 6 . It is possible to cancel the warning
indicator light (if equipped) seconds later, the warning light will remain operation that follows the 6-second
lit for 15 seconds. If the driver’s seatbelt is warning after turning ON the ignition
: Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light still not fastened even 15 seconds later switch. When the ignition switch is
(if equipped)/Vehicle Dynamics Control (21 seconds after turning ON the ignition turned ON next time, however, the
OFF indicator light (if equipped) switch), the warning lights will alternate complete sequence of warning opera-
: Low tire pressure warning light (if between flashing and steady illumination tion resumes. For further details about
equipped) at 15-second intervals, and the chime will canceling the warning operation,
sound while the warning light is flashing. please contact your SUBARU dealer.
: Cruise control indicator light Alternate flashing and steady illumination
: Cruise control set indicator light of the warning lights and sounding of the & SRS airbag system
chime will continue until the driver fastens warning light
If any lights fail to come on, it indicates a the seatbelt.
burned-out bulb or a malfunction of the When the ignition switch is turned to the
corresponding system. NOTE “ON” position, the SRS airbag system
Consult your authorized SUBARU dealer . If the driver unfastens the seatbelt warning light will come on for approxi-
for repair. after fastening, the seatbelt warning mately 6 seconds and go out. This shows
device operates as follows according the SRS frontal airbag and SRS side
& Seatbelt warning light to the vehicle speed. airbag and seatbelt pretensioners are in
and chime . At speeds lower than approxi- normal operation.
Your vehicle is equipped with a seatbelt mately 9 mph (15 km/h)
warning device at the driver’s seat, as The warning light will alternate WARNING
required by current safety standards. between flashing and steady illumi- If the warning light exhibits any of
There is a seatbelt warning light in the nation at 15-second intervals. The the following conditions, there may
combination meter. chime will not sound. be a malfunction in the seatbelt
If the driver has not yet fastened the . At speeds higher than approxi- pretensioners and/or SRS airbag
seatbelt when the ignition switch is turned mately 9 mph (15 km/h) system. Immediately take your vehi-
to the “ON” position, the seatbelt warning The warning light will alternate cle to your nearest SUBARU dealer
light will flash for 6 seconds, to warn that between flashing and steady illumi- to have the system checked. Unless
the seatbelt is unfastened. If the driver’s nation at 15-second intervals and checked and properly repaired, the
seatbelt is not fastened, a chime will also the chime will sound while the seatbelt pretensioners and/or SRS
sound simultaneously. warning light is flashing. airbags will operate improperly (e.g.

Black plate (125,1)
SRS airbags may inflate in a very & Front passenger’s frontal indicators illuminate for 6 seconds during
minor collision or not inflate in a airbag ON and OFF indica- which time the system is checked. Follow-
severe collision), which may in- tors ing the system check, both indicators
crease the risk of injury. extinguish for 2 seconds. After this, one
. Flashing or flickering of the warn- of the indicators illuminates depending on
ing light the status of the front passenger’s SRS 3
frontal airbag reached by the Subaru
. No illumination of the warning advanced frontal airbag system monitor-
light when the ignition switch is ing.
first turned to the “ON” position
If the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
. Continuous illumination of the is activated, the passenger’s frontal airbag
warning light ON indicator will illuminate while the OFF
. Illumination of the warning light indicator will remain extinguished.
while driving If the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
is deactivated, the passenger’s frontal
airbag ON indicator will remain extin-
guished while the OFF indicator will
1) U.S.-spec. models
2) Canada-spec. models
illuminate.
With the ignition switch turned to the “ON”
or : Front passenger’s frontal airbag position, if both the ON and OFF indica-
ON indicator tors remain lit or extinguished simulta-
or : Front passenger’s frontal airbag neously even after the system check
OFF indicator period, the system is faulty. Contact your
SUBARU dealer immediately for an in-
The front passenger’s frontal airbag ON
spection.
and OFF indicators show you the status of
the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag.
The indicators are located next to the
clock in the central portion of the instru-
ment panel.
When the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position, both the ON and OFF
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (126,1)
& CHECK ENGINE warn- NOTE The CHECK ENGINE warning light may
ing light/Malfunction in- This light also comes on when the fuel stop blinking and come on steadily after
dicator lamp filler cap is not tightened until it clicks. several driving trips. You should have your
vehicle checked by an authorized
If you have recently refueled your vehicle,
CAUTION SUBARU dealer immediately.
the cause of the CHECK ENGINE warning
light/malfunction indicator lamp coming on
If the CHECK ENGINE light comes could be a loose or missing fuel filler cap.
& Charge warning light
on while you are driving, have your Remove the cap and retighten it until it If this light comes on when the engine is
vehicle checked/repaired by your clicks. Make sure nothing is interfering running, it may indicate that the charging
SUBARU dealer as soon as possi- with the sealing of the cap. Tightening the system is not working properly.
ble. Continued vehicle operation cap will not make the CHECK ENGINE
without having the emission control warning light turn off immediately. It may If the light comes on while driving or does
system checked and repaired as take several driving trips. If the light does not go out after the engine starts, stop the
necessary could cause serious da- not go out, take your vehicle to your engine at the first safe opportunity and
mage, which may not be covered by authorized SUBARU dealer immediately. check the alternator belt. If the belt is
your vehicle’s warranty. loose, broken or if the belt is in good
! If the light is blinking: condition but the light remains on, contact
If this light comes on steadily or blinks If the light is blinking while driving, an your nearest SUBARU dealer immedi-
while the engine is running, it may indicate engine misfire condition has been de- ately.
that there is a problem or potential tected which may damage the emission
problem somewhere in the emission con- control system. & Oil pressure warning
trol system. To prevent serious damage to the emis- light
! If the light comes on steadily: sion control system, you should do the
following. CAUTION
If the light comes on steadily while driving
. Reduce vehicle speed.
or does not go out after the engine starts, Do not operate the engine with the
an emission control system malfunction . Avoid hard acceleration. oil pressure warning light on. This
has been detected. . Avoid steep uphill grades. may cause serious engine damage.
. Reduce the amount of cargo, if possi-
You should have your vehicle checked by ble. If this light comes on when the engine is
an authorized SUBARU dealer immedi-
. Stop towing a trailer as soon as running, it may indicate that the engine oil
ately.
possible. pressure is low and the lubricating system
is not working properly.

Black plate (127,1)
If the light comes on while driving or does & ABS warning light the first available opportunity by
not go out after the engine starts, stop the your SUBARU dealer.
engine at the first safe opportunity and The ABS warning light comes on when the
check the engine oil level. If the oil level is ignition switch is turned to the “ON” The ABS warning light comes on together
low, add oil immediately. If the engine oil is position and goes out after approximately with the brake system warning light if the
at the proper level but the light remains on, 2 seconds. EBD system becomes faulty. For further 3
contact your nearest SUBARU dealer This is an indication that the ABS system details of the EBD system fault warning,
immediately. is working properly. refer to “Brake system warning light”.
& AT OIL TEMPerature CAUTION NOTE

warning light (AT vehi- If the warning light behaves as
If the warning light behavior is as
cles) described in the following, the ABS
follows, the ABS system may not system may be considered normal.
The AT oil temperature warning light work properly.
. The warning light comes on right
comes on when the ignition switch is When the warning light is on, the after the engine is started but goes out
turned to the “ON” position and goes out ABS function shuts down; however, immediately, remaining off.
after the engine has started. the conventional brake system con- . The warning light remains on after
If this light comes on when the engine is tinues to operate normally. the engine has been started, but it goes
running, it may indicate that the automatic . The warning light does not come out when the vehicle speed reaches
transmission fluid temperature is too hot. on when the ignition switch is approximately 8 mph (12 km/h).
If the light comes on while driving, turned to the “ON” position. . The warning light comes on during
immediately stop the vehicle in a safe . The warning light comes on when driving, but it goes out immediately and
place and let the engine idle until the the ignition switch is turned to remains off.
warning light goes off. the “ON” position, but it does not When driving with an insufficient battery
go out even when the vehicle voltage such as when the engine is jump
! Automatic transmission control
speed exceeds approximately 8 started, the ABS warning light may come
system warning
mph (12 km/h). on. This is due to the low battery voltage
If the light flashes after the engine starts, it and does not indicate a malfunction.
. The warning light comes on dur-
may indicate that the automatic transmis- When the battery becomes fully charged,
ing driving.
sion control system is not working prop- the light will go out.
erly. Contact your nearest SUBARU deal- If any of these conditions occur,
er for service immediately. have the ABS system repaired at
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (128,1)
& Vehicle Dynamics . The warning light comes on while the sidered normal.
Control warning light (if vehicle is running. . The warning light comes on right
equipped)/Vehicle Dy- . If the electrical circuit of the Vehicle after the engine is started but goes out
namics Control OFF in- Dynamics Control system itself becomes immediately, remaining off.
faulty, the warning light only comes on. At . The warning light comes on after
dicator light (if this time, the ABS (Anti-lock Brake Sys- engine startup and goes off while the
equipped) tem) remains fully operational. vehicle is subsequently being driven.
This warning light has the function of . The warning light comes on when the . The warning light comes on during
indicating faults in the Vehicle Dynamics electronic control system of the ABS/ driving, but it goes out immediately and
Control system and the function of indicat- Vehicle Dynamics Control system be- remains off.
ing that the Vehicle Dynamics Control comes faulty.
system has been deactivated. ! Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF in-
The Vehicle Dynamics Control system dicator light
It comes on in the event of a fault in the
system and is on when the system is not provides its ABS control through the . It comes on when the Vehicle Dy-
operating. electrical circuit of the ABS system. namics Control OFF switch is pressed.
Accordingly, if the ABS is inoperative, the . It also comes on when the Vehicle
This warning light comes on when the Vehicle Dynamics Control system be-
ignition switch is turned to the “ON” Dynamics Control system is deactivated.
comes unable to provide ABS control. As
position and goes out after the engine
has started. It indicates that the Vehicle
a result, the Vehicle Dynamics Control NOTE
system also becomes inoperative, caus- . The light may stay on for a while
Dynamics Control system is in normal ing the warning light to come on. Though
operation. after the engine has been started,
both the Vehicle Dynamics Control and especially in cold weather. This does
! Vehicle Dynamics Control warning ABS systems are inoperative in this case, not indicate the existence of a problem.
light the ordinary functions of the brake system The light should go out as soon as the
The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is are still available. You will be safe while engine has warmed up.
probably inoperative under any of the driving with this condition, but have your . The indicator light comes on when
following conditions. Have your vehicle vehicle checked at a SUBARU dealer as the engine has developed a problem
checked at a SUBARU dealer immedi- soon as possible. and the Malfunction indicator light is
ately. on.
NOTE
. The warning light does not come on If the warning light behavior is as The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is
when the ignition switch is turned to the shown in the following, the Vehicle probably faulty under the following condi-
“ON” position. Dynamics Control system may be con- tion. Have your vehicle checked at a

Black plate (129,1)
SUBARU dealer as soon as possible. ! Brake fluid level warning prone to locking when the brakes are
. The light does not go out even after the This light comes on when the brake fluid applied harder than usual and the vehi-
lapse of several minutes (the engine has level has dropped to near the “MIN” level cle’s motion may therefore become some-
warmed up) after the engine has started. of the brake fluid reservoir with the ignition what harder to control.
switch in the “ON” position and with the If the brake system warning light and ABS
& Brake system warning parking brake fully released. warning light illuminate simultaneously, 3
light take the following steps:
If the brake system warning light should 1. Stop the vehicle in the nearest safe,
WARNING come on while driving (with the parking flat place.
brake fully released and with the ignition
2. Shut down the engine, then restart it.
. Driving with the brake system switch positioned in “ON”), it could be an
warning light on is dangerous. indication of leaking of brake fluid or worn 3. Release the parking brake. If both
This indicates your brake system brake pads. If this occurs, immediately warning lights go out, the EBD system
may not be working properly. If stop the vehicle at the nearest safe place may be faulty.
the light remains on, have the and check the brake fluid level. If the fluid Drive carefully to the nearest SUBARU
brakes inspected by a SUBARU level is below the “MIN” mark in the dealer and have the system inspected.
dealer immediately. reservoir, do not drive the vehicle. Have 4. If both warning lights come on again
. If at all in doubt about whether the vehicle towed to the nearest SUBARU and stay illuminated after the engine has
the brakes are operating prop- dealer for repair. been restarted, shut down the engine
again, apply the parking brake, and check
erly, do not drive the vehicle. ! Electronic Brake Force Distribution
Have your vehicle towed to the the brake fluid level.
(EBD) system warning
nearest SUBARU dealer for re- 5. If the brake fluid level is not below the
The brake system warning light also “MIN” mark, the EBD system may be
pair. illuminates if a malfunction occurs in the faulty. Drive carefully to the nearest
EBD system. In that event, it comes on SUBARU dealer and have the system
This light has the following three functions: together with the ABS warning light. inspected.
! Parking brake warning The EBD system may be malfunctioning if 6. If the brake fluid level is below the
The light comes on with the parking brake the brake system warning light and ABS “MIN” mark, DO NOT drive the vehicle.
applied while the ignition switch is in the warning light illuminate simultaneously Instead, have the vehicle towed to the
“ON” position. It goes out when the during driving. nearest SUBARU dealer for repair.
parking brake is fully released. Even if the EBD system fails, the conven-
tional braking system will still function.
However, the rear wheels will be more
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (130,1)
& Door open warning warning light flashes, promptly park & Vehicle Dynamics
light in a safe place then check whether Control operation indi-
all four tires are the same diameter cator light (if equipped)
The door open warning light illuminates if and whether any of the tires has a
any door or the rear gate is not fully puncture or has lost air pressure for This light comes on when the ignition
closed. some other reason. switch is ON and goes out approximately
2 seconds later.
Always make sure this light is out before
you start to drive. The All-Wheel Drive warning light comes It blinks when the skid suppression func-
on when the ignition switch is turned to the tion is activated. It illuminates when only
& Low fuel warning light “ON” position and goes out after engine the traction control function is operating.
has started.
The low fuel warning light illuminates The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is
when the tank is nearly empty [approxi- ! For vehicles with Vehicle Dynamics probably faulty under any of the following
mately 2.3 US gal (9.0 liters, 1.9 Imp gal)]. Control system conditions. Have your vehicle checked at
It only operates when the ignition switch is This light flashes if the vehicle is driven a SUBARU dealer immediately.
in the “ON” position. When this light with tires of different diameters or with the . The light does not come on when the
illuminates, fill the fuel tank immediately. air pressure excessively low in any of its ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
tires. position.
NOTE ! For vehicles without Vehicle Dy- . The light does not go out even after a
This light does not go out unless the namics Control system period of approximately 2 seconds after
tank is replenished up to an internal the ignition switch has been turned to the
fuel quantity of approximately 4.0 US This light comes on when All-Wheel Drive “ON” position.
gal (15 liters, 3.3 Imp gal). is disengaged and the drive mechanism is
switched to Front Wheel Drive for main-
tenance or similar purposes.
& All-Wheel Drive warn- This light flashes if the vehicle is driven
ing light (AT vehicles) with tires of different diameters or with the
air pressure excessively low in any of its
WARNING tires.
Continued driving with the AWD
warning light flashing can lead to
powertrain damage. If the AWD

Black plate (131,1)
& Shift position indicator (AT & High beam indicator a low tire pressure telltale when one or
vehicles) light more of your tires is significantly under-
inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire
This light shows that the headlights are in pressure telltale illuminates, you should
the high beam mode. stop and check your tires as soon as
This indicator light also comes on when possible, and inflate them to the proper 3
the headlight flasher is operated. pressure. Driving on a significantly under-
inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and
& Low tire pressure can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
warning light (if reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,
equipped) and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
When the ignition switch is turned to the Please note that the TPMS is not a
“ON” position, the low tire pressure warn- substitute for proper tire maintenance,
ing light will come on for approximately 2 and it is the driver’s responsibility to
seconds to check that the tire pressure maintain correct tire pressure, even if
This indicator shows the position of the monitoring system (TPMS) is functioning under-inflation has not reached the level
shift lever. properly. If there is no problem and all tires to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire
are properly inflated, the light will go out. pressure telltale.
& Turn signal indicator Each tire, including the spare (if provided), Your vehicle has also been equipped with
lights should be checked monthly when cold a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate
and inflated to the inflation pressure when the system is not operating properly.
These lights show the operation of the turn recommended by the vehicle manufac-
signal or lane change signal. The TPMS malfunction indicator is com-
turer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation bined with the low tire pressure telltale.
If the indicator lights do not blink or blink pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of
rapidly, the turn signal bulb may be burned When the system detects a malfunction,
a different size than the size indicated on the telltale will flash for approximately one
out. Replace the bulb as soon as possible. the vehicle placard or tire inflation pres-
Refer to the “Replacing bulbs” section in minute and then remain continuously
sure label, you should determine the illuminated. This sequence will continue
chapter 11. proper inflation pressure for those tires.) upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long
As an added safety feature, your vehicle as the malfunction exists. When the
has been equipped with a tire pressure malfunction indicator is illuminated, the
monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates system may not be able to detect or signal
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (132,1)
low tire pressure as intended. TPMS WARNING the TPMS is unable to monitor all
malfunctions may occur for a variety of four road wheels. Contact your
reasons, including the installation of re- If this light does not come on briefly SUBARU dealer as soon as possible
placement or alternate tires or wheels on after the ignition switch is turned ON for tire and sensor replacement and/
the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from or the light illuminates steadily after or system resetting. If the light
functioning properly. Always check the blinking for approximately one min- illuminates steadily after blinking
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing ute, you should have your Tire for approximately one minute,
one or more tires or wheels on your Pressure Monitoring System promptly contact a SUBARU dealer
vehicle to ensure that the replacement or checked at a SUBARU dealer as to have the system inspected.
alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS soon as possible.
to continue to function properly. If this light comes on while driving,
Should the warning light illuminate stea- never brake suddenly and keep
CAUTION
dily after blinking for approximately one driving straight ahead while gradu-
minute, have the system inspected by The tire pressure monitoring system
ally reducing speed. Then slowly is NOT a substitute for manually
your nearest SUBARU dealer as soon as pull off the road to a safe place.
possible. checking tire pressure. The tire
Otherwise an accident involving pressure should be checked peri-
serious vehicle damage and serious odically (at least monthly) using a
personal injury could occur. tire gauge. After any change to tire
If this light still comes on while pressure(s), the tire pressure mon-
driving after adjusting the tire pres- itoring system will not re-check tire
sure, a tire may have significant inflation pressures until the vehicle
damage and a fast leak that causes is first driven more than 20 mph (32
the tire to lose air rapidly. If you have km/h). After adjusting the tire pres-
a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire sures, increase the vehicle speed to
as soon as possible. at least 20 mph (32 km/h) to start the
When a spare tire is mounted or a TPMS re-checking of the tire infla-
wheel rim is replaced without the tion pressures. If the tire pressures
original pressure sensor/transmitter are now above the severe low
being transferred, the Low tire pres- pressure threshold, the low tire
sure warning light will illuminates pressure warning light should go
steadily after blinking for approxi- off a few minutes later. Therefore, be
mately one minute. This indicates sure to install the specified size for

Black plate (133,1)
the front and rear tires. & Cruise control set in- Clock
dicator light
& Cruise control indica- The cruise control set indicator light
tor light comes on when the ignition switch is
turned to the “ON” position and goes out 3
The cruise control indicator light comes on after approximately 3 seconds.
when the ignition switch is turned to the This light comes on when vehicle speed
“ON” position and goes out after approxi- has been set.
mately 3 seconds.
This light comes on when the “CRUISE”
main switch is pressed.
NOTE
. If you move the cruise control lever
or press the main switch button while
turning the ignition switch “ON”, the To adjust the clock, open the small article
cruise control function is deactivated storage compartment in the dashboard
and the “CRUISE” indicator light with the vehicle parked in a safe place.
flashes. To reactivate the cruise control
function, turn the ignition switch back
to the “Acc” or “LOCK” position, and
then turn it again to the “ON” position.
. If this indicator light and the “ ”
indicator light flash simultaneously
during driving, have the vehicle
checked by your nearest SUBARU
dealer.
To set the hour, press the “H” button. To

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (134,1)
set the minutes, press the “M” button. To Light control switch & Headlights
reset the minutes to “00” with a radio time
signal, push the “Reset” button. The light switch operates only when the
ignition switch is in the “ON” position.
CAUTION
WARNING
To ensure safety, do not attempt to
set the time while driving, as an To prevent battery discharge result-
accident from inadequate attention ing from accidentally leaving your
to the road could result. lights on when your vehicle is
parked, the light switch operates
only when the ignition switch is in
NOTE the “ON” position. In any other
The clock uses a liquid crystal display. position, the vehicle’s lights will be
You will find time indications hard to out.
see if you wear polarized glasses. To turn on the headlights, turn the knob on
If you park your vehicle on a road-
the end of the turn signal lever.
side at night, use the hazard warn-
ing flasher to alert the other drivers. first position:
Parking lights, instrument panel illumina-
tion, front side marker lights, tail lights and
license plate light are on.
second position:
Headlights, parking lights, instrument pa-
nel illumination, front side marker lights,
tail lights, and license plate light are on.

Black plate (135,1)
& High/low beam change (dim- & Headlight flasher & Daytime running light system
mer)
! Canada-spec. 2.5XT
WARNING
3
The parking lights, and side marker
lights are not turned on by the
daytime running light system. The
light switch must always be turned
to the “ ” position when it is dark
outside.
The low beam headlights and tail lights will

automatically come on when the engine
To flash the headlights, pull the lever has started, under the following condi-
To change from low beam to high beam, toward you and then release it. The high tions:
push the turn signal lever forward. When beam will stay on for as long as you hold . The parking brake is fully released.
the headlights are on high beam, the high the lever. The headlight flasher works . The light switch is in the “OFF” or “ ”
beam indicator light “ ” on the instru- even though the lighting switch is in the position.
ment panel is also on. “OFF” position. . The automatic transmission selector
To switch back to low beam, pull the lever When the headlights are on high beam, lever is set at other than the “P” position.
back to the detent position. the high beam indicator light “ ” on the ! All models except Canada-spec.
instrument panel also comes on. 2.5XT
CAUTION WARNING
Do not hold the lever in the flashing The tail lights, parking lights, and
position for more than just a few side marker lights are not turned on
seconds. by the daytime running light system.
The light switch must always be
turned to the “ ” position when it
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (136,1)
is dark outside. Turn signal lever return automatically to the neutral position
when you release it.
The low beam headlights will automati-
cally come on at reduced brightness when
the engine has started, under the following
conditions:
. The parking brake is fully released.
. The light switch is in the “OFF” or “ ”
position.
. The automatic transmission selector
lever is set at other than the “P” position.
1) Right turn
2) Left turn
3) Lane change for right
4) Lane change for left
To activate the right turn signal, push the
turn signal lever up. To activate the left
turn signal, push the turn signal lever
down. When the turn is finished, the lever
will return automatically. If the lever does
not return after cornering, return the lever
to the neutral position by hand.
To signal a lane change, push the turn
signal lever up or down slightly and hold it
during the lane change. The turn signal
indicator lights will flash in the direction of
the turn or lane change. The lever will

Black plate (137,1)
Illumination brightness con- Headlight beam leveler (Ve- Parking light switch
trol hicle with HID headlights)
The parking light switch operates regard-

When the headlight switch is in the “ ” The HID headlights generate more light less of the ignition switch position.
or “ ” position, you can adjust bright- than conventional halogen headlights. By pushing the front end of this switch,
ness of the instrument panel illumination Therefore a driver of an oncoming vehicle following lights will come on.
for better visibility. may experience too much glare when your
– Parking lights
To brighten, turn the control dial upward. headlight beam height adjustment is high
due to the vehicle carrying a heavy load. – Front side marker lights
To darken, turn the control dial downward.
The headlight beam leveler can be used – Tail lights
to adjust beam height to avoid such a – License plate lights
condition.
To turn off, push the rear end of the
The higher the number the switch is parking light switch.
turned to, the lower the beam height Avoid leaving these lights on for a long
becomes. time because that will run down the
battery.

Black plate (138,1)
Front fog light button Wiper and washer . In freezing weather, be sure that
the wiper blades are not frozen to
the windshield or rear window
WARNING before switching on the wipers.
Attempting to operate the wiper
In freezing weather, do not use the with the blades frozen to the
windshield washer until the wind- window glass could cause not
shield is sufficiently warmed by the only the wiper blades to be
defroster. damaged but also the wiper mo-
Otherwise the washer fluid can tor to burn out. If the wiper
freeze on the windshield, blocking blades are frozen to the window
your view. glass, be sure to operate the
defroster, windshield wiper dei-
cer (if equipped) or rear window
CAUTION defogger before turning on the
The front fog lights operate only when the wiper.
. Do not operate the washer con-
headlights are on low beam. Push the tinuously for more than 10 sec- . If the wipers stop during opera-
front fog light button to turn the front fog onds, or when the washer fluid tion because of ice or some other
lights on. tank is empty. This may cause obstruction on the window, the
However, the front fog lights turn off when overheating of the washer motor. wiper motor could burn out even
the headlights are switched to high beam. Check the washer fluid level if the wiper switch is turned off. If
Press the button again to turn them off. frequently, such as at fuel stops. this occurs, promptly stop the
vehicle in a safe place, turn the
The indicator light located on the button . Do not operate the wipers when ignition switch to the “LOCK”
will illuminate when the front fog lights are the windshield or rear window is position and clean the window
on. dry. This may scratch the glass, glass to allow proper wiper op-
damage the wiper blades and eration.
cause the wiper motor to burn
out. Before operating the wiper . Use clean water if windshield
on a dry windshield or rear washer fluid is unavailable. In
window, always use the wind- areas where water freezes in
shield washer. winter, use SUBARU Windshield
Washer Fluid or the equivalent.

Black plate (139,1)
(See the “Windshield washer face of the windshield or rear window & Windshield wiper and washer
fluid” section in chapter 11.) and the wiper blades using a sponge or switches
Also, when driving the vehicle soft cloth with a neutral detergent or
mild abrasive cleaner. After cleaning, ! Windshield wipers
when there are freezing tempera-
tures, use non-freezing type wi- rinse the window glass and wiper
per blades. blades with clean water. The glass is 3
clean if no beads form on the glass
. Do not clean the wiper blades when you rinse with water.
with gasoline or a solvent, such . If you cannot eliminate the streaking
as paint thinner or benzene. This even after following this procedure,
will cause deterioration of the replace the wiper blades with new
wiper blades. ones. Refer to the “Replacement of
wiper blades” section (chapter 11) for
NOTE replacement instructions.
. The wiper operates only when the
ignition switch is in the “ON” or “Acc”
position.
. Clean your wiper blades and win- OFF: Park
dow glass periodically with a washer : Intermittent
LO: Low speed
solution to prevent streaking, and to
HI: High speed
remove accumulations of road salt or
road film. Keep the washer button To turn the wipers on, push the wiper
depressed at least for 1 second so that control lever down.
washer solution will be sprinkled all To turn the wipers off, return the lever to
over the windshield or rear window. the “OFF” position.
. Grease, wax, insects or other mate-
rial on the windshield or the wiper
blade results in jerky wiper operation
and streaking on the glass. If you
cannot remove those streaks after
operating the washer or if the wiper
operation is jerky, clean the outer sur-
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (140,1)
! Wiper intermittent time control (if ! Mist (for a single wipe) To wash the windshield, push the washer
equipped) button at the end of the wiper control lever.
The washer fluid sprays until you release
the washer button. The wipers operate
while you push the button.
& Rear window wiper and

washer switch
For a single wipe of the wipers, pull the

When the wiper switch is in the “ ” lever toward you. The wipers operate until
position, turn the dial to adjust the operat- you release the lever.
ing interval of the wiper. ! Washer
The operating interval can be adjusted
continuously from the shortest interval to
the longest. : Washer (accompanied by wiper operation)
Two click stop positions of the dial may ON: Normal
help you to aim at your desired interval. INT: Intermittent
OFF: Park
: Washer
! Rear wiper
To turn the rear wiper on, turn the knob on
the end of the wiper control lever upward.
INT: Intermittent

Black plate (141,1)
ON: Normal Windshield wiper deicer (if windshield wiper deicer is operating.
To turn the wiper off, return the knob on equipped) The windshield wiper deicer will automa-
the end of the lever to the “OFF” position. tically shut off after approximately 15
minutes. If the wiper blades have been
! Washer CAUTION deiced completely before that time, push
To wash the rear window while the rear the button to turn it off. It also turns off 3
wiper is operating, turn the knob on the To prevent the battery from being when the ignition switch is turned to the
end of the wiper control lever counter- discharged, do not operate the “Acc” or “LOCK” position. If deicing is not
clockwise to the “ ” position. The washer windshield wiper deicer continu- complete, you have to push the button to
fluid sprays until you release the knob. ously for any longer than necessary. turn the deicer on again.
To wash the rear window when the rear
wiper is not in use, turn the knob on the
NOTE
end of the wiper control lever clockwise to If your vehicle is equipped with the
the “ ” position. The washer fluid sprays outside mirror defogger, the outside
and the wiper operates until you release mirror defogger operates while the
the knob. windshield wiper deicer is operating.
The windshield wiper deicer operates only

when the ignition switch is in the “ON”
position.
Before turning on the windshield wiper
deicer, remove any snow from the wind-
shield. To turn on the windshield wiper
deicer, push the button. The indicator light
located on the button lights up while the

Black plate (142,1)
Rear window defogger but- The rear window defogger operates only discharged, do not operate the
when the ignition switch is in the “ON” defogger continuously for any
ton position. longer than necessary.
The rear window defogger button is
located on the climate control panel.
To turn on the defogger, push the button.
To turn it off, push the button again.
The indicator light located on the button
lights up while the rear window defogger is
operating.
The defogger will automatically shut off
after approximately 15 minutes. If the
window clears before that time, push the
button to turn it off. It also turns off when
the ignition switch is turned to the “Acc” or
Manual climate control system “LOCK” position. If defrosting or defogging
is desired when you restart your vehicle,
you have to push the button to turn it on
again.
Turn on the rear window defogger if the
wiper is frozen to the glass.
CAUTION
. Do not use sharp instruments or
window cleaner containing abra-
sives to clean the inner surface
of the rear window. They may
damage the conductors printed
on the window.
Automatic climate control system . To prevent the battery from being

Black plate (143,1)
Mirrors ! Auto-dimming mirror/compass (if button, the compass display is toggled on

equipped) or off. When the compass is on, an
Always check that the inside and outside illuminated compass reading will appear
mirrors are properly adjusted before you in the lower part of the mirror.
start driving.
Even with the mirror in anti-glare mode, 3
the mirror surface turns bright if the
& Inside mirror transmission is shifted into reverse. This
is to ensure good rearward visibility during
reversing.
! Photosensors
1) Left button
2) Auto dimming indicator
3) Photosensor
4) Right button
The auto-dimming mirror/compass has an
The inside mirror has a day and night anti-glare feature which automatically re-
position. Pull the tab at the bottom of the duces glare coming from headlights of
mirror toward you for the night position. vehicles behind you. It also contains a
Push it away for the day position. The built-in compass.
night position reduces glare from head- . By pressing and releasing the left The mirror has a photosensor attached on
lights. button, the automatic dimming function is both the front and back sides. If the glare
toggled on or off. When the automatic from the headlights of vehicles behind you
dimming function is on, the auto dimming strikes the mirror, these sensors detect it
indicator light (green) located to the right and make the reflection surface of the
of the button will illuminate. mirror dimmer to help prevent you from
. By pressing and releasing the right being blinded. For this reason, use care
not to cover the sensors with stickers, or
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (144,1)
other similar items. Periodically wipe the ! Compass zone adjustment exit the zone setting mode.
sensors clean using a piece of dry soft
cotton cloth or an applicator. & Outside mirrors
! Compass calibration
1. For optimum calibration, switch off all
nonessential electrical accessories (rear
window defogger, heater/air conditioning
system, spotlight, etc.) and ensure all
doors are shut.
2. Drive to an open, level area away from
large metallic objects or structures and
make certain the ignition switch is in the
“ON” position.
3. Press and hold the left button for 3 Compass calibration zones
seconds then release, and the compass
will enter the calibration mode. “CAL” and 1. The zone setting is factory preset to
direction will be displayed. Zone 8. Refer to the “Compass calibration ! Convex mirror (passenger side)
zone” map shown above or one attached
4. Drive slowly in a circle until “CAL”
to the end of this manual to verify that the WARNING
disappears from the display (approxi-
compass zone setting is correct for your
mately two or three circles).
geographical location. Objects look smaller in a convex
5. The compass is now calibrated. mirror and farther away than when
2. Press and hold the right button for 3
Further calibration is not required. The viewed in a flat mirror. Do not use
seconds then release, and the word
compass will automatically calibrate from
“ZONE” will briefly appear and then the the convex mirror to judge the
this point forward. distance of vehicles behind you
zone number will be displayed.
3. Press the right-hand button repeatedly when changing lanes. Use the inside
to cycle the display through all possible mirror (or glance backwards) to
zone settings. Stop cycling when the determine the actual size and dis-
correct zone setting for your location is tance of objects that you view in
displayed. convex mirror.
4. Releasing the button for 3 seconds will

Black plate (145,1)

! Remote control mirror switch
! Outside mirror defogger (if button again. The indicator light located on
equipped) the button lights up while the outside
mirror defogger is operating.
CAUTION The defogger will automatically shut off
To prevent the battery from being after approximately 15 minutes. If the
mirror clears before that time, push the
3
discharged, do not operate the de-
fogger continuously for any longer button to turn it off. It also turns off when
than necessary. the ignition switch is turned to the “Acc” or
“LOCK” position. If defrosting or defogging
is desired when you restart your vehicle,
you have to push the button to turn it on
again.
NOTE
1) Selection switch
2) Direction control switch
On vehicles equipped with a wind-
shield wiper deicer, the windshield
The remote control mirrors operate only wiper deicer switch is also used to
when the ignition switch is in the “ON” or operate the outside mirror defogger.
“Acc” position.
1. Press either end of the selection
switch, “L” for the left, “R” for the right.
2. Move the direction control switch in the
direction you want to move the mirror. 1) Outside mirror defogger button (if
3. Return the selection switch to the equipped)
neutral position to prevent unintentional 2) Outside mirror defogger and windshield
operation. wiper deicer button (if equipped)
The mirrors can also be adjusted manu- The outside mirror defogger operates only
ally. when the ignition switch is in the “ON”
position.
To turn on the outside mirror defogger,
push the button. To turn it off, push the

Black plate (146,1)
Tilt steering wheel 5. Make sure that the steering wheel is Horn
securely locked by moving it up and down.
To sound the horn, push the horn pad.

WARNING
Do not adjust the steering wheel tilt
position while driving. This may
cause loss of vehicle control and
result in personal injury.
1. Adjust the seat position. Refer to the

“Front seats” section (chapter 1).
2. Push the tilt lock lever down.
3. Move the steering wheel to the desired
level.
4. Pull the lever up to lock the steering
wheel in place.

Black plate (7,1)
Climate control
Ventilator.............................................................. 4-2 Air conditioner button ........................................ 4-10

Air flow selection ................................................ 4-2 Temperature sensors ......................................... 4-11
Center and side ventilators .................................. 4-3 Operating tips for heater and air
Manual climate control system conditioner ...................................................... 4-11
(if equipped) ..................................................... 4-3 Cleaning ventilation grille................................... 4-11
Control panel ...................................................... 4-3 Efficient cooling after parking in direct
Heater operation ................................................. 4-5 sunlight ........................................................... 4-11 4
Air conditioner operation..................................... 4-7 Lubrication oil circulation in the refrigerant
circuit.............................................................. 4-12
Automatic climate control system
(if equipped) ..................................................... 4-8 Checking air conditioning system before summer
season ............................................................ 4-12
Control panel ...................................................... 4-8 Cooling and dehumidifying in high humidity and
To use as full-automatic climate control low temperature weather conditions ................. 4-12
system.............................................................. 4-8 Air conditioner compressor shut-off when engine
To use as semi-automatic climate control is heavily loaded.............................................. 4-12
system.............................................................. 4-8 Refrigerant for your climate control system ........ 4-12
Fan speed control dial......................................... 4-9
Air filtration system (if equipped)..................... 4-12
Temperature control dial...................................... 4-9
Replacing an air filter......................................... 4-13
Air flow control dial............................................. 4-9
Air inlet selection button .................................... 4-10

Black plate (150,1)
4-2 Climate control
Ventilator
& Air flow selection

Black plate (151,1)
Climate control 4-3
& Center and side ventilators ! Side ventilators Manual climate control sys-
! Center ventilators tem (if equipped)
& Control panel
1) Open
2) Close
Move the tab up and down or right and left 3) Thumbwheel
to adjust the flow direction.
Move the tab up and down or right and left 1) Temperature control dial
to adjust the flow direction. 2) Fan speed control dial
To open or close the ventilator, turn the 3) Air flow control dial
thumbwheel up or down. 4) Rear window defogger button (Refer to
the “Rear window defogger button” in
chapter 3.)
5) Air conditioner button
6) Air inlet selection button
! Temperature control dial
This dial regulates the temperature of air
flow from the air outlets over a range from
the blue side (cool) to red side (warm).
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (152,1)
4-4 Climate control
! Fan speed control dial mode. ! Air inlet selection button

The fan operates only when the ignition In this state, you cannot select “recir-
switch is turned to the “ON” position. The culation” mode by manually pressing
fan speed control dial is used to select the air inlet selection button.
four fan speeds. Also, you cannot stop the air condi-
! Air flow control dial tioner compressor by pressing the air
conditioner button.
This dial has the following five positions:
! Air conditioner button
: Air flows through the instrument panel
outlets.
: Air flows through the instrument panel
outlets and the foot outlets.
: Air flows through the foot outlets and
some through the windshield defroster ON position (Recirculation): Interior air
outlets. is recirculated inside the vehicle. Push the
air inlet selection button to the ON posi-
: Air flows through the windshield tion. The indicator light will come on.
defroster outlets and foot outlets. Place the air inlet selection button to the
: Air flows through the windshield ON position for fast cooling with the air
defroster outlets. conditioner or when driving on a dusty
road.
NOTE The air conditioner operates only when
the engine is running. OFF position (Outside air): Outside air is
When the dial is placed in the “ ” or
drawn into the passenger compartment.
“ ” position, the air conditioner com- Push the air conditioner button while the Push the air inlet selection button again to
pressor operates automatically regard- fan is in operation to turn on the air the OFF position. The indicator light will go
less of the position of the air condi- conditioner. The indicator light will come off.
tioner button to defog the windshield on.
quickly. However the indicator on the Place the air inlet selection button to the
air conditioner button will not come on. Push it again to turn off the air conditioner. OFF position when the interior has cooled
At the same time, the air inlet selection to a comfortable temperature and the road
is automatically set to “outside air” is no longer dusty.

Black plate (153,1)
Climate control 4-5
WARNING the way to the right. ! Heating and defrosting

3. Set the fan speed control dial to the
Continued operation with the air highest speed.
inlet selection button in the ON
position may fog up the windows. If your vehicle is equipped with an air
Switch to the OFF position as soon conditioner, when the “ ” or “ ” position
as the outside dusty condition is selected, the air conditioner compressor
automatically operates regardless of the
clears.
position of the air conditioner button to 4
defog the windshield quickly.
& Heater operation However, the air conditioner indicator light
does not come on at this time.
! Defrosting or defogging the wind-
shield NOTE
Warm air also comes out from the right
and left air outlets. To stop warm air To direct warm air toward the floor and the
flow from these outlets, turn the corre- windshield:
sponding thumbwheel down. 1. Set the air flow control dial to the “ ”
position.
2. Set the temperature control dial to the
most comfortable level.
desired speed.
If your vehicle is equipped with an air
conditioner, when the “ ” or “ ” position
is selected, the air conditioner compressor
automatically operates regardless of the
To direct warm air to the windshield and position of the air conditioner button to
front door windows: defog the windshield quickly.
1. Set the air flow control dial to the “ ” However, the air conditioner indicator light
position. does not come on at this time.
2. Turn the temperature control dial all
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (154,1)
4-6 Climate control
NOTE NOTE desired speed.

Warm air also comes out from the right Warm air also comes out from the right
Setting the temperature control dial fully
and left air outlets. To stop warm air and left air outlets. To stop warm air
turned to the red area or blue area
flow from these outlets, turn the corre- flow from these outlets, turn the corre-
decreases the temperature difference
sponding thumbwheel down. sponding thumbwheel down.
between the air from the instrument panel
! Heating ! Bi-level heating outlets and the air from the foot outlets.
! Ventilation
To direct warm air toward the floor: This setting allows you to direct air of
1. Set the air inlet selection button to the different temperatures from the instrument To force outside air through the instrument
OFF position. panel and foot outlets. The air from the panel outlets:
2. Set the air flow control dial to the “ ” foot outlets is slightly warmer than from 1. Set the air inlet selection button to the
position. the instrument panel outlets. OFF position.
3. Set the temperature control dial to the 1. Set the air inlet selection button to the 2. Set the air flow control dial to the “ ”
most comfortable level. OFF position. position.
4. Set the fan speed control dial to the 2. Set the air flow control dial to the “ ” 3. Set the temperature control dial all the
desired speed. position. way left.
3. Set the temperature control dial to the 4. Set the fan speed control dial to the
desired temperature level. desired speed.

Black plate (155,1)
Climate control 4-7
When driving on a dusty road, set the air through the instrument panel outlets: red side.
inlet selection button to the “ON” position. 1. Set the air inlet selection button to the 3. Set the fan speed control dial at the
OFF position. highest speed.
WARNING 2. Set the air flow control dial to the “ ”
The air conditioner compressor automati-
Continued operation with the air position.
cally operates when the air flow control
inlet selection button in the ON 3. Set the air conditioner button to the dial set in the “ ” or “ ” position to
position may fog up the windows. “ON” position. provide better defogging performance.
Switch to the OFF position as soon 4. Set the temperature control dial to the However, the air conditioner indicator light
4
as the outside dusty condition blue side. does not come on at this time.
clears. 5. Set the fan speed control dial at the
highest speed.
& Air conditioner operation ! Defrosting or defogging
! Cooling or dehumidifying
To direct warm air to the windshield and

1) ON position front door windows:
For cooling and dehumidification of the 1. Set the air flow control dial to the “ ”
passenger compartment, performing the position.
following steps will allow air to flow 2. Set the temperature control dial to the

Black plate (156,1)
4-8 Climate control
Automatic climate control sor automatically and the “A/C” indi- set the other dials and buttons as de-
cator light on the control panel comes scribed in the following. The system’s
system (if equipped) on. functions will then switch to AUTO mode
Although this climate control system can and be controlled automatically.
be used as a full-automatic climate control & Control panel . Air flow control dial: AUTO position
system, it can also, if desired, be used as . Fan speed control dial: AUTO position
a semi-automatic climate control system. . Air inlet selection button: Press for at
When it is used as a full-automatic climate least 1 second. (Indicator will flash twice.)
control system, the outlet air temperature, . Air conditioner button: Press for at least
fan speed, air flow distribution, air inlet 1 second. (Indicator will flash twice.)
control, and air conditioner compressor
operation are all automatically controlled & To use as semi-automatic
to maintain a constant, comfortable tem- climate control system
perature inside the vehicle.
Each function can be individually set to
NOTE AUTO mode independently of the others.
. Operate the automatic climate con- Any function set to AUTO mode is con-
trol system when the engine is running. trolled automatically. Any function not set
. When the engine coolant is cold, the to AUTO mode can be manually adjusted
blower does not run. 1) Temperature control dial as desired.
2) Fan speed control dial The temperature can be set within a range
. In the “AUTO” mode, when the air
3) Air flow control dial of 65 to 858F (20 to 308C).
temperature in the passenger compart- 4) Rear window defogger button (Refer to
ment is sufficiently cool, the air condi- the “Rear window defogger button” in
tioner compressor does not operate. chapter 3.)
For efficient defogging or dehumidify- 5) Air inlet selection button
ing in cold weather, press the “A/C” 6) Air conditioner button
button to operate the air conditioner
compressor. & To use as full-automatic cli-
. Even when cooling is not necessary, mate control system
setting the temperature much lower
than the current outlet air temperature Place the temperature control dial in the
turns on the air conditioner compres- position for your desired temperature, then

Black plate (157,1)
Climate control 4-9
& Fan speed control dial NOTE formance. If the dial is turned fully clock-
With the fan speed control dial in the wise, the system gives maximum heating
AUTO position and the air flow control performance.
dial in the “ ”, “ ”, or “ ” position,
the fan does not operate during engine & Air flow control dial
warm-up until the engine coolant tem-
perature exceeds approx. 1228F (508C).
4
& Temperature control dial
The fan operates only with the ignition

switch in the “ON” position. The fan speed
control dial is used to select the AUTO
(automatic control) mode or to select the
desired fan speed. The dial’s positions This dial has the following six positions.
and their functions are as follows: The outlets from which air is supplied in
OFF: The fan does not operate. each position are as follows:
AUTO: The fan speed is adjusted auto- AUTO: The air flow control is adjusted
matically in accordance with the air This dial is used to set the desired interior automatically in accordance with the air
temperature inside and outside the pas- temperature. With the dial set to your temperature inside and outside the pas-
senger compartment, the intensity of sun- desired temperature, the system automa- senger compartment, the intensity of sun-
light, and other factors. SUBARU recom- tically adjusts the temperature of air light, and other factors. SUBARU recom-
mends using the AUTO position. supplied from the outlets such that the mends using the AUTO position.
Other positions: The fan speed can be desired temperature is achieved and : Instrument panel outlets
adjusted in seven steps. maintained. : Instrument panel outlets and foot
If the dial is turned fully counterclockwise, outlets
the system gives maximum cooling per- : Foot outlets and windshield defroster
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (158,1)
4-10 Climate control
outlets (relatively little air from windshield for fast cooling with the air conditioner or & Air conditioner button
defroster outlets) when driving on a dusty road. The
: Windshield defroster outlets and foot indicator light will come on.
outlets OFF position (Outside Air): Outside air
: Windshield defroster outlets is drawn into the passenger compartment.
Push the air inlet selection button to the
NOTE OFF position when the interior has cooled
When the dial is placed in the “ ” or to a comfortable temperature and the road
“ ” position, the air conditioner com- is no longer dusty. The indicator light will
pressor operates automatically to de- go off.
fog the windshield quickly. At the same AUTO: When the air inlet selection button
time, the air inlet selection is automa- is pressed for at least 1 second, the
tically set to “outside air” mode. indicator flashes twice. The air inlet control
is then adjusted automatically in accor-
& Air inlet selection button dance with the air temperature inside and The button’s positions and their functions
outside the passenger compartment, the are as follows:
intensity of sunlight, and other factors.
ON: The air conditioner operates while the
Pressing the air inlet selection button
fan is running.
cancels the AUTO mode. SUBARU re-
commends using the AUTO position. Push the button to select this position. The
indicator light will come on.
WARNING OFF: The air conditioner does not oper-
ate.
Continued operation in the ON posi- Push the button again to select this
tion may fog up the windows. Switch position. The indicator light will go off.
to the OFF position as soon as the AUTO: When the button is pressed for at
outside dusty condition clears. least 1 second, the indicator flashes twice.
The air conditioner compressor operation
is then adjusted automatically in accor-
ON position (Recirculation): Interior air dance with the air temperature inside and
is recirculated inside the vehicle. Push the outside the passenger compartment, the
air inlet selection button to the ON position intensity of sunlight, and other factors.

Black plate (159,1)
Climate control 4-11
Pressing the button cancels the AUTO the sensors, observe the following pre- Operating tips for heater and
mode. SUBARU recommends using the cautions:
air conditioner
AUTO position. – Do not subject the sensors to impact.
NOTE – Keep water away from the sensors. & Cleaning ventilation grille
– Do not cover the sensors.
The air conditioner’s compressor does
not operate with an outside tempera- The sensors are located as follows:
ture of 328F (08C) or lower. – Solar sensor: beside the windshield 4
defroster grille.
& Temperature sensors – Interior air temperature sensor: near
the ignition switch.
– Outside temperature sensor: behind
the front grille.
Always keep the front ventilation inlet grille

free of snow, leaves, or other obstructions
to ensure efficient heating and defrosting.
Since the condenser is located in front of
the radiator, this area should be kept clean
because cooling performance is impaired
1) Interior air temperature sensor by any accumulation of insects and leaves
2) Solar sensor on the condenser.
The automatic climate control system
employs several sensors. These sensors & Efficient cooling after parking
are delicate. If they are not treated in direct sunlight
properly and become damaged, the sys- After parking in direct sunlight, drive with
tem may not be able to control the interior the windows open for a few minutes to
temperature correctly. To avoid damaging allow outside air to circulate into the
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (160,1)
heated interior. This results in quicker & Air conditioner compressor Air filtration system (if
cooling by the air conditioner. Keep the shut-off when engine is
windows closed during the operation of
equipped)
heavily loaded
the air conditioner for maximum cooling If your vehicle’s air conditioning system is
efficiency. To improve acceleration and gas mileage,
the air conditioner compressor is designed equipped with an air filtration system,
to temporarily shut off during air condi- replace the filter element according to
& Lubrication oil circulation in the replacement schedule shown in the
tioner operation whenever the accelerator
the refrigerant circuit is fully depressed such as during rapid following. This schedule should be fol-
Operate the air conditioner compressor at acceleration or when driving on a steep lowed to maintain the filter’s dust collec-
a low engine speed (at idle or low driving upgrade. tion ability. Under extremely dusty condi-
speeds) a few minutes each month during tions, the filter should be replaced more
the off-season to circulate its oil. & Refrigerant for your climate frequently. It is recommended that you
have your filter checked or replaced by
control system
& Checking air conditioning your SUBARU dealer. For replacement,
Your air conditioner uses ozone friendly use only a genuine SUBARU air filter kit.
system before summer sea- refrigerant HFC134a. Therefore, the meth-
son od of adding, changing or checking the Replacement schedule:
Check the air conditioner unit for refriger- refrigerant is different from the method for Every 12 months or 7,500 miles (12,000
ant leaks, hose conditions, and proper CFC12 (freon). Consult your SUBARU km) whichever comes first
operation each spring. Have your dealer for service. Repairs needed as a
SUBARU dealer perform this check. result of using the wrong refrigerant are
not covered under warranty.
CAUTION
& Cooling and dehumidifying in
high humidity and low tem- Contact your SUBARU dealer if the
perature weather conditions following occurs, even if it is not yet
Under certain weather conditions (high time to change the filter:
relative humidity, low temperatures, etc.) a – Reduction of the air flow through
small amount of water vapor emission the vents.
from the air outlets may be noticed. This – Windshield gets easily fogged or
condition is normal and does not indicate misted.
any problem with the air conditioning
system.

Black plate (161,1)
Climate control 4-13

NOTE one.
The filter can influence the air condi-
tioning, heating and defroster perfor- CAUTION
mance if not properly maintained.
The arrow mark on the filter must
point UP.
& Replacing an air filter
4
1) Air filter cover
2. Remove the air filter cover.
1. Remove the glove box. 1) Air filter cover

(1) Open the glove box. 4. Reinstall the air filter cover.
(2) Remove the nine screws securing
the glove box.
1) Air filter element

2) Arrow mark
3. Replace the air filter element with new
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (162,1)
(1) Fill out the information on the

service label (small).
(2) Attach the service label to the
driver side door pillar and the caution
label to the driver side end of the
instrument panel.
5. Reinstall the glove box.

6. Close the glove box.
1) Service label
2) Caution label
7. LABEL installation

Black plate (9,1)
Audio
Antenna system .................................................. 5-2 CD changer control (if optional in-dash CD

FM reception ....................................................... 5-2 changer is connected) ....................................... 5-9
Installation of accessories.................................. 5-2 Type B audio set (if equipped).......................... 5-11
Audio set ............................................................. 5-3 Radio operation ................................................. 5-11
Type A audio set ................................................. 5-3 Built-in CD changer control ................................ 5-15
Type B audio set ................................................. 5-3 Auxiliary unit and satellite radio operation.......... 5-20
In-dash 6 CD auto changer (Optional audio unit – In-dash 6 CD auto changer (if equipped)......... 5-23
if equipped)....................................................... 5-3 Loading and unloading compact discs ............... 5-23
Type A audio set (if equipped) ........................... 5-4 Precautions to observe when handling a 5
Radio operation................................................... 5-4 compact disc................................................... 5-25
Compact disc player operation ............................ 5-7

Black plate (166,1)
5-2 Audio
Antenna system ing area, atmospheric conditions, station Installation of accessories

strength and transmitter distance. Build-
ings or other obstructions may cause Always consult your SUBARU dealer
momentary static, flutter or station inter- before installing a citizen band radio or
ference. If reception continues to be other transmitting device in your vehicle.
unsatisfactory, switch to a stronger station. Such devices may cause the electronic
control system to malfunction if they are
incorrectly installed or if they are not
suited for the vehicle.
The antenna is printed on the inner

surface of the left side rear quarter window
glass.
CAUTION
Do not use sharp instruments or
window cleaner containing abra-
sives to clean the inner surface of
the window on which the antenna is
printed. Doing so may damage the
antenna printed on the window.
& FM reception
Although FM is normally static free,
reception can be affected by the surround-

Black plate (167,1)
Audio 5-3
Audio set & Type B audio set & In-dash 6 CD auto changer
(Optional audio unit – if
Your SUBARU may be equipped with one equipped)
of the following audio sets. See the pages
indicated in this section for operating
details.
& Type A audio set
. Radio operation: refer to page 5-11

. Built-in CD changer operation: refer to
page 5-15 . Inserting and removing a disc or all
. Auxiliary unit operation: refer to page 5- discs: refer to page 5-23
20
. Radio operation: refer to page 5-4

. Compact disc player operation: refer to
page 5-7
. CD changer control: refer to page 5-9

Black plate (168,1)
5-4 Audio
(1) Power switch, Volume control, Tone/

Type A audio set (if equipped) Fader/Balance control dial
(2) BAND button
The radio will operate only when the ignition switch is in the “Acc” or “ON” position. (3) Tuning buttons
(4) Preset buttons
& Radio operation (5) AUDIO button
(6) SCAN button
! Power switch and volume/bass/tre-

ble/fader/balance control (PWR/
VOL)
The dial (1) is used for both power (ON/
OFF) and volume control. The radio is
turned ON and OFF by pushing the dial
and the volume is controlled by turning the
dial.
! Tone and balance control
The “VOLUME” control knob normally
function as volume control. This knob
become a control for Treble, Bass, Fader
or Balance when you select the appro-
priate audio mode.
Choose desired volume level for each
mode by turning the “VOLUME” control
knob. The control function returns to
volume control mode after approximately
5 seconds.
To change control modes: Each brief
press of the “AUDIO” button changes
control modes in the following sequence
starting from volume control mode. (When
the radio is first turned on, the control

Black plate (169,1)
Audio 5-5
mode is in the volume control.)
Display Control mode
Turn counterclockwise Turn clockwise

VOL Volume control For less volume For more volume
BAS Bass control For less bass sound For more bass sound
TRE Treble control For less treble sound For more treble sound
BAL Balance control To increase left speaker volume and de- To increase right speaker volume and
crease right speaker volume decrease left speaker volume
FAD Fader control To increase rear speaker volume and To increase front speaker volume and
decrease front speaker volume decrease rear speaker volume
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (170,1)
5-6 Audio
! How to preset stations

! FM/AM band selection button ble frequencies and will stop at the first
(BAND) one found. This function may not be 1. Press the “BAND” selection button to
Push the “BAND” button when the radio is available, however, when radio signals select AM, FM1 or FM2 reception.
on to select FM1, FM2 or AM band are weak. In such a situation, perform 2. Press the “SCAN” button (6) or tune
reception. Each time this button is manual tuning to select the desired the radio manually until the desired station
pressed, the band will change in the station. frequency is displayed.
following order: ! Automatic tuning (SCAN) 3. Press one of the preset buttons (4) for
Press the “SCAN” button (6) to change the at least 2 seconds to store the frequency.
radio to the SCAN mode. In this mode, the At this time, there will momentarily be no
radio scans through the radio band until a sound from the radio. If the button is
station is found. The radio will stop at the pressed for less than 2 seconds, the
The display indicates which one is cur- preceding selection will remain in memory.
rently selected. station for 5 seconds while displaying the
frequency, after which scanning will con-
! Stereo indicator tinue until the entire band has been NOTE
The stereo indicator “ST” will come on scanned from the low end to the high end. . If the connection between the radio
when an FM stereo broadcast is received. Press the “SCAN” button again to cancel and battery is broken for any reason
! Tuning (TUNE) the SCAN mode and to stop on any such as vehicle maintenance or radio
displayed frequency. removal, all stations stored in the
! Manual tuning (TUNE) When the “SCAN” button is pressed for preset buttons are cleared. If this
Push the “ ” side of the tuning button (3) automatic tuning, stations are scanned in occurs, it is necessary to reset the
to increase the tuning frequency and the direction of low frequencies to high preset buttons.
press the “ ” side of the button to frequencies only. . If a cell phone is placed near the
decrease it. Automatic tuning may not function prop- radio, it may cause the radio to emit
Each time the button is pressed, the erly if the station reception is weakened by noise when it receives calls. This noise
frequency changes 10 kHz in the AM distance from the station or proximity to does not indicate a radio fault.
waveband and 0.2 MHz in the FM wave- tall buildings and hills.
band. ! Selecting preset stations
! Seek tuning Presetting a station with a preset button
If the tuning button (3) is pressed for (4) allows you to select that station in a
longer than half of a second, the radio will single operation. Up to six AM, FM1 and
begin to automatically search for receiva- FM2 stations each may be preset.

Black plate (171,1)
Audio 5-7
& Compact disc player operation (7) Disc slot

(8) CD button
(9) Eject button
(10) Fast-forwarding and track up button
(11) Fast-reversing and track down button
(12) Random button
(13) Repeat button
(14) Scan button
(15) PWR (power) switch
! To play back a compact disc 5

! When CD is not in the player
Hold a disc with a finger in the center hole
while gripping the edge of the disc, then
insert it in to the slot (with the label side
up) and the player will automatically pull
the disc into position.
A single CD (8 cm/3 inch CD) may also be
used without any adapter.
NOTE
. Make sure to always insert a disc
with the label side up. If a disc is
inserted with the label side down, it
might be ejected or the player might
shut off.
. After the last song finishes, the
player will automatically return to track
1 (the first song on the disc).
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (172,1)
5-8 Audio
! When CD is in the player ! Fast-forwarding and fast-reversing ! Scan

Press the “CD” button (8). The display will ! Fast-forwarding Briefly press the “SCAN” button (14), and
show “CD-IN” and the player will start you can hear the first 10 seconds of each
playback. Press the “ ” side of the button (10) track to search for the desired program. To
continuously to fast-forward the disc. continue listening to the program, press
NOTE Release the button to stop fast-forwarding. the “SCAN” button again. After all tracks
After the last song finishes, playback ! Fast-reversing on the disc has been scanned, normal
will automatically return to track 1 (the playback mode is restored.
first song on the disc). Press the “ ” side of the button (11)
continuously to fast-reverse the disc. ! To eject a disc from the player
! To stop playback of a CD Release the button to stop fast-reversing. When a disc is being played back or when
When the “PWR” button (15) is pressed a disc is in the player, press the eject
! Repeat playback button “ ” (9). The disc will be ejected.
during playback of a CD, the CD stops
Briefly press the “RPT” button (13) while a The disc may be removed even when the
playing temporarily. To let the CD resume
song is playing to play the song repeat- ignition switch is in the “LOCK” position.
playing, press the button again.
edly. The “RPT” indicator will come on and
! To select a song from its beginning the song will be played continuously. To NOTE
cancel the repeat mode, press the button Avoid driving the vehicle with a CD
! Forward direction again. Then the “RPT” indicator goes out, sticking out, because vibration might
Briefly press the “ ” side of the button and normal playback mode is restored. make it fall out.
(10) to skip to the beginning of the next
! Random playback
track. Each time this side of the button is
pressed, the indicated track number will Briefly press the “RAND” button (12) while
increase. a disc is being played back to play all
songs on the disc in a random order. The
! Backward direction “RAND” indicator will come on and all
Briefly press the “ ” side of the button songs on the disc will be played in a
(11) to skip to the beginning of the current random order.
track. Each time this side of the button is To cancel the random mode, press the
pressed, the indicated track number will button again. Then the “RAND” indicator
decrease. goes out, and normal playback mode is
restored.

Black plate (173,1)
Audio 5-9
& CD changer control (if optional in-dash CD changer is con- (16) CD button
(17) Track selection buttons
nected) (18) RAND (Random) button
An optional CD changer can be connected to this audio unit. Consult the instructions that (19) RPT (Repeat) button
accompany the CD changer for operating the CD changer itself (e.g., how to load or (20) SCAN button
unload CDs). See your SUBARU dealer for more information.
! To start playback
When the “CD” button (16) is pressed, the
CD changer will start playback. The dis-
play shows the current disc number, track
number and the elapsed time during 5
playback.
NOTE
. If a disc is in the player, the “DISC”
button is used to change from CD
player operation to DISC changer op-
eration. Each time the “DISC” button is
pressed, the operating mode will
change alternately.
. At the end of the disc, the player
automatically continues with the next
disc.
. After playback on the last disc
finishes, playback will automatically
return to the first disc.
. If you have loaded fewer than 6
discs, any missing disc is automati-
cally skipped.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (174,1)
5-10 Audio
! Selection of a desired disc track. Each time this side of the button is normal playback mode is restored.
You can select a desired disc from among pressed, the indicated track number will ! Random playback
the discs contained in the CD changer decrease.
Press the “RAND” button (18) while a disc
only by pressing the corresponding num- ! Fast-forwarding and fast-reversing is being played back to play all songs on
ber on one of the disc select buttons. If the disc in a random order. The “RAND”
you are to listen to the 5th disc in the CD ! Fast-forwarding
indicator will come on and all songs on the
changer, press the “5” button of the disc Press the “ ” side of the button (17) disc will be played in a random order.
select buttons. All other discs in the CD continuously to fast-forward the disc. To cancel the random mode, press the
changer can also be selected in a similar Release the button to stop fast-forwarding. button again. Then the “RAND” indicator
way. If you continue fast-forwarding to the end goes out, and normal playback mode is
of the disc, the CD changer will auto- restored.
NOTE matically stop fast-forwarding and start
. No disc change takes place if the ! Scan (a convenient way to become
playback beginning with the first track on
button corresponding to the storage familiar with a disc)
the current disc.
tray in which no disc is loaded is 1. Press the “SCAN” button (20).
pressed. ! Fast-reversing
– The display shows “SCAN” and the track
. If the disc select button correspond- Press the “ ” side of the button (17) number being scanned.
ing to the disc now in playback is continuously to fast-reverse the disc. – You hear the first 10 seconds of each
pressed again, the disc will be replayed Release the button to stop fast-reversing. track.
from its beginning.
If you continue fast-reversing to the – The operation is automatically cleared
! To select a song from its beginning beginning of the disc, the CD changer will after playing all programs. Then, normal
automatically stop fast-reversing and start playback starts.
! Forward direction playback beginning with the first track on 2. Press the “SCAN” button again when
Briefly press the “ ” side of the button the current disc. you hear a track you like.
(17) to skip to the beginning of the next ! Repeat playback – Normal playback resumes.
track. Each time this side of the button is Press the “RPT” button (19) while a song
pressed, the indicated track number will is playing to play the song repeatedly. The ! To stop playback
increase. “RPT” indicator will come on and the song To stop playback and switch over to the
! Backward direction will be played continuously. To cancel the radio mode, press the “BAND” button.
repeat mode, press the button again.
Briefly press the “ ” side of the button
Then the “RPT” indicator goes out, and
(17) to skip to the beginning of the current

Black plate (175,1)
Audio 5-11
(1) Power switch, Volume, Brightness con-
Type B audio set (if equipped) trol dial
(2) FM/AM selection button
The audio set will operate only when the ignition switch is in the “Acc” or “ON” position. (3) Seek button
(4) Scan button
& Radio operation (5) Sound/Tune control dial
(6) Preset buttons
! Power switch and volume/bright-

ness control (POWER/VOL/
BRIGHT) 5
The dial (1) is used for both power (ON/
OFF) and volume control. The radio is
turned ON and OFF by pushing the dial,
and the volume is controlled by turning the
dial.
! Sound control and tune/folder se-
lect/channel control (SOUND/TUNE/
FOLDER/CH)
The dial (5) is used for selecting the sound
control mode with each brief press of the
dial, and for adjusting each level by
turning it. It is also used for tuning the
radio/folder selection (only when playing
MP3 or WMA)/channel selection (satellite
radio*) when the “FM/AM”, “CD/AUX” and
“SAT” are selected.
(*: Use of satellite radio (Sirius) requires a
tuner, antenna and a service contract. For
details, please contact your SUBARU
dealer.)
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (176,1)
5-12 Audio
Display Control mode
Turn counterclockwise Turn clockwise

BASS Bass control For less bass sound For more bass sound
MIDDLE Midrange control For less midrange sound For more midrange sound
TREBLE Treble control For less treble sound For more treble sound
FADER Fader control To increase rear speaker volume and To increase front speaker volume and
decrease front speaker volume decrease rear speaker volume
BALANCE Balance control To increase left speaker volume and de- To increase right speaker volume and
crease right speaker volume decrease left speaker volume
VOLUME Volume control For less volume For more volume
! Sound control returns to last mode after approximately

5 seconds.
The dial (5) controls the Bass, Midrange, To change control modes: Each brief
Treble, Balance and Fader when you press of the “SOUND” button (5) changes
select the appropriate sound control control modes in the following sequence
mode. Choose the desired setting for starting from bass control mode.
each mode by depressing the “SOUND”
control dial (5). The control function

Black plate (177,1)
Audio 5-13
! Display illumination dimness can- the dial counterclockwise to decrease it. not function properly if the station recep-
cellation (BRIGHT) Each click the dial is turned, the frequency tion is weakened by distance from the
changes 10 kHz in the AM waveband and station or proximity to tall buildings and
The brightness of the radio display dims
0.2 MHz in the FM waveband. hills.
when the light switch is in the “ ” or
“ ” position. If this makes the display ! Seek tuning ! Selecting preset stations
difficult to read, press the volume dial for When the “ ” side of the “SEEK/TRACK/ Presetting a station with a preset button
more than 2 seconds to return the display CAT” button (3) is depressed, the radio will (6) allows you to select that station in a
to original brightness. Subsequently begin to automatically seek up for recei- single operation. Up to six AM, FM1 and
pressing the volume dial again for more vable frequencies and will stop at the first FM2 stations each may be preset.
than 2 seconds or if you can safely do so, one found. For the “ ” side, the radio will ! How to preset stations 5
turning the light switch to the OFF position begin to automatically seek down. This
and back to the “ ” or “ ” position function may not be available, however, 1. Press the “FM/AM” button (2) to select
makes the radio display dim again. when radio signals are weak. In such a AM, FM1 or FM2 reception.
! FM/AM selection button (FM/AM) situation, perform manual tuning to select 2. Press the “SCAN” button (4) or tune
the desired station. the radio manually until the desired station
Push the “FM/AM” button (2) when the frequency is displayed.
radio is on to select FM1, FM2 or AM ! Automatic tuning (SCAN)
3. Press one of the preset buttons (6) for
reception. Each time this button is Press the “SCAN” button (4) to change the at least 2 seconds to store the frequency.
pressed, the band will change in the radio to the SCAN mode. In this mode, the
following order: The frequency of the station will flash once
radio scans through the radio band until a on the display at this time.
station is found. The radio will stop at a
receivable station for 5 seconds while
displaying the frequency by blinking, after NOTE
The display indicates which one is cur-
which scanning will continue until the . If the connection between the radio
entire band has been scanned from the and battery is broken for any reason
rently selected.
low end to the high end. Press the “SCAN” such as vehicle maintenance or radio
! Stereo indicator button again to cancel the SCAN mode removal, all stations stored in the
The stereo indicator “ST” will come on and to stop on any displayed frequency. preset buttons are cleared. If this
when an FM stereo broadcast is received. When the “SCAN” button is pressed for occurs, it is necessary to reset the
! Manual tuning (TUNE) automatic tuning, stations are scanned in preset buttons.
the direction of low frequencies to high . If a cell phone is placed near the
Turn the tuning dial (5) clockwise to frequencies only. Automatic tuning may radio, it may cause the radio to emit
increase the tuning frequency and turn
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (178,1)
5-14 Audio
noise when the phone receives calls.

This noise does not indicate a problem
with the radio.

Black plate (179,1)
Audio 5-15
& Built-in CD changer control (7) CD button

(8) Eject button
(9) Disc slot
(10) Track selection buttons
(11) Repeat/Random button
(12) Disc number indicator
(13) Load button
(14) Folder selection dial
(15) Disc selection buttons
(16) Display button
5
NOTE
. Make sure to always insert a disc
with the label side up. If a disc is
inserted with the label side down, it
might be ejected or the player might
shut off.
. If a disc is inserted during a radio
broadcast, the disc will interrupt the
broadcast.
. The player is designed to be able to
play music CD-Rs and music CD-RWs,
but it may not be able to play certain
ones.
. 8 cm/3 inch CDs are not supported,
and if inserted, they will be immediately
ejected.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (180,1)
5-16 Audio
! How to insert a CD(s) ! Inserting a disc in a desired position ascending order of position number.
3. When the loading of a disc is com-
! Inserting a CD 1. Briefly press the “LOAD” button (13). If
plete, the next disc number indicator (12)
the magazine in the player has an idle
1. Briefly press the “LOAD” button (13). If position where you can insert a disc, the
will blink. Then repeat Step 2.
the magazine in the player has an idle disc number indicator (12) associated with 4. When the magazine is filled with discs
position where you can insert a disc, the the idle position will blink. by repeating Steps 2 and 3, the player will
disc number indicator associated with the start playback of the discs, beginning with
2. Press the disc selection button (15) at
idle position will blink. If no indicator the one inserted first. If you fail to insert
the position where you want to insert a
blinks, it means that there is no idle any disc during each 15-second interval,
disc. The associated disc number indica-
position in the magazine. the full disc loading mode will be can-
tor will blink.
2. When “IN” is displayed, insert the disc. celed, and the player will start playback of
3. If you insert a disc during the 15- the disc inserted first.
Once you have inserted the disc, the disc
second period while “IN” is displayed, the
number indicator will stop blinking. The
disc will be automatically drawn in, and the ! How to play back a CD or make a
disc will be then automatically drawn in,
player will start playback of the disc, pause
and the player will begin to play back the
beginning with the first track.
first track of the disc.
! When there is no CD inserted:
. To insert more discs in succession,
. To insert more discs in succession, Insert a CD by referring to “How to insert a
repeat Steps 1 and 3.
repeat Steps 1 and 2. The magazine will CD(s)”.
be loaded with discs in the ascending . While the player is in the loading mode,
if you press the “FM/AM” button (2), the When a CD is loaded, the player will start
order of position number. If you do not playback of the CD, beginning with the
insert any disc within 15 seconds after you player will enter standby mode. Press the
“CD/AUX” button (7) to start playback. first track.
have pressed the “LOAD” button and “IN”
is displayed, the player will begin to play ! When there are CDs loaded:
back the first track of the last disc you ! Loading all the magazine (Full disc
Depress the “CD/AUX” button to turn on
have inserted. loading mode)
the CD (when the last mode of the player
. While the player is in the loading mode, 1. If you continue to press the “LOAD” is CD) and press a desired one of the disc
if you press the “FM/AM” button (2), the button (13) for more than 2 seconds, the select buttons (15). The player will then
player will enter the standby mode. Press player will enter the full disc loading mode. start playback of the selected CD, begin-
the “CD/AUX” button (7) to start playback. 2. The disc number indicator (12) asso- ning with the first track.
ciated with the idle position will blink. The
magazine will be loaded with discs in the

Black plate (181,1)
Audio 5-17
! To select a track from its beginning repeatedly. Each time this button is
pressed, the repeat play mode will change
! Forward direction in the following order: The “RDM” indicator will come on and all
Briefly press the “ ” side of the button songs on the disc will be played in a
(10) to skip to the beginning of the next random order. When the random OFF is
track. Each time the button is pressed, the selected, the “RDM” indicator goes out
indicated track number will increase. and normal playback mode is restored.
The “RPT” indicator will come on and the . The random play mode will be
! Backward direction song will be played continuously. When cancelled if you perform any of the
Briefly press the “ ” side of the button the repeat OFF is selected, the “RPT” following steps:
(10) to skip to the beginning of the current indicator goes out and normal playback – Press the “RPT/RDM” button to 5
track. Each time the button is pressed, the mode is restored. select the random OFF.
indicated track number will decrease. . The repeat play mode will be can- – Press the eject button.
! To select a folder (for MP3/WMA celled if you perform any of the follow- – Press the “LOAD” button.
audio) ing steps: – Select the radio mode.
Turn the “TUNE/FOLDER/CH” dial (14) to – Press the “RPT/RDM” button to – Turn the “TUNE/FOLDER/CH”
select the folder. select the repeat OFF. dial (for MP3/WMA audio).
– Press the eject button. – Turn off the power of the audio
! Fast-forwarding and fast-reversing
– Press the “LOAD” button. equipment.
! Fast-forwarding – Select the radio mode. – Turn the ignition switch to the
– Turn the “TUNE/FOLDER/CH” “LOCK” position.
Press the “ ” side of the button (10)
continuously to fast-forward the disc. dial (for MP3/WMA audio). ! How to unload CDs from the player
Release the button to stop fast-forwarding. – Turn off the power of the audio
equipment. ! Ejecting a CD from the player
! Fast-reversing – Turn the ignition switch to the Of the discs loaded, you can select and
Press the “ ” side of the button (10) “LOCK” position. remove only one disc.
continuously to fast-reverse the disc. ! Random playback 1. Press the disc select button (15) of the
Release the button to stop fast-reversing. disc whose disc number indicator (12) is
Press the “RPT/RDM” button (11) for more
! Repeat playback ON.
than 2 seconds while a disc is being
Depress the “RPT/RDM” button (11) while played back to play all songs on the disc in 2. Press the eject button (8). Then the
a song is playing to play the song a random order. disc number indicator associated with the
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (182,1)
5-18 Audio
disc you have selected will blink, and the so can cause mechanical damage to – Press the disc selection button.
disc will be ejected. To remove more discs the CD changer. – Select the radio mode.
in succession, repeat Steps 1 and 2. If you – Press the “ ” or “ ” button.
press the eject button after turning OFF ! Title display selection – Turn off the power of the audio
the ignition switch, only one disc will be equipment.
ejected. If you briefly press the “DISP” button (16)
during playback, the indication will change – Turn the ignition switch to the
to the next one in the following sequence. “LOCK” position.
! Ejecting all discs from the player (All
disc ejection mode) . For MP3/WMA: NOTE
1. If you continue to press the eject When the disc has no title, the display
button (8) for more than 2 seconds, the indicates “NO TITLE”.
player will enter the all disc ejection mode.
. For Satellite radio: ! When the following messages are
2. Remove the disc that has been displayed
ejected, the display indicates “CD ALL
EJECT” (when the ignition switch is in the If one of the following messages is
“Acc” position) and disc indicator will blink. displayed while operating the CD player,
The other discs loaded will then be determine the cause based on the follow-
ejected one after another. If you do not The display mode that you selected will ing information. If you cannot clear those
remove the ejected disc within 15 sec- not be changed until you select the display messages, please contact your SUBARU
onds, the “All disc ejection mode” will be mode again. dealer.
canceled. When you depress the “DISP” button for ! When “PUSH EJECT” is displayed
more than 2 seconds, the title will be
scrolled so you can see all of it. You will This message means that there is a
NOTE see 12 characters at a time. mechanical error. Depress the eject button
Avoid driving the vehicle with a CD . The page scroll mode will be can- to unload the disc. Check the disc for
sticking out, because vibration might celled if you perform any of the follow- damage or deformation, and also check
make it fall out. ing steps: that the correct disc is inserted. Do not try
to unload the disc forcibly. 8 cm/3 inch
– When you do not operate any
CAUTION CDs are not supported, and if inserted,
button within 10 seconds.
they will be immediately ejected and this
– Press any button to select an- message will be displayed. If the disc
Do not attempt to insert two or more
other play mode. cannot be unloaded or the message
discs into the slot at a time. Doing
– Press the eject button.

Black plate (183,1)
Audio 5-19
remains displayed, please contact your

SUBARU dealer.
! When “CHECK DISC” is displayed
Press the eject button to unload the discs.
Check that the disc is not damaged or
scratched, and also check that the disc is
inserted correctly. Some CD-RW discs
may be causing this message to appear.
Check that the disc type (i.e., 8 cm/3 inch
CDs are not supported) and data format 5
are correct. This player can only play MP3
and WMA data formats. If the disc cannot
be unloaded or the message remains
displayed, please contact your SUBARU
dealer.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (184,1)
5-20 Audio
& Auxiliary unit and satellite radio operation (17) AUX button
(18) Category button
(19) Scan button
(20) Satellite radio* button
(21) Category selection button
(22 Preset buttons
(23) Channel selection dial
(*: Use of satellite radio requires a tuner,
antenna and a service contract. For de-
tails, please contact your SUBARU deal-
er.)
NOTE
. For use of the In-dash CD changer,
refer to the section of “In-dash 6 CD
auto changer” in this chapter.
. Use of satellite radio requires a
tuner, antenna and a service contract.
For details, please contact your
SUBARU dealer.
. The “AUX mode” can be used when
the appropriate device is connected to
the AUX jack.
. The output sound of the portable
audio player is not loud, and the sound
via the vehicle’s speakers that are
connected to the vehicle audio set is
very quiet. If you turn up the volume of
the audio set, the volume becomes
louder. However, when you change
the audio to the radio mode or to a
CD player, the sound becomes a lot
louder. Remember to turn down the

Black plate (185,1)
Audio 5-21
volume when you change between ! Satellite Radio mode (if equipped) To help reduce this condition, satellite
them. Press the “SAT” button (20) to select the radio providers have installed ground-
“Satellite radio mode” (when the SR-BB is based repeaters in heavily populated
! AUX audio jack (if equipped) connected). areas. However, you may still experience
The AUX (auxiliary) audio jack is located reception problems in some areas.
! Sirius satellite radio
behind the lid under the climate controls.
Push gently on the lid to open it. Sirius satellite radio is a recent innovation ! Displaying satellite radio ID of tuner
that allows the listener to experience When you activate satellite radio, you
digital sound quality and to have a greater should have your satellite radio tuner ID
variety of channels to choose from (more ready because each tuner is identified by
than 160 channels with the relevant its unique satellite radio tuner ID. 5
subscription). The satellite radio ID will be needed when
Use of satellite radio (Sirius) requires a you activate satellite radio and receive
tuner, antenna and a service contract. For satellite radio customer support.
details, please contact your SUBARU The satellite radio ID can be found on the
dealer or visit Sirius Satellite Radio at audio display by tuning the channel to “0”.
www.sirius.com or call 1-888-539-SIRIUS Turn the “TUNE/FOLDER/CH” dial (23) to
(7474) for more information. Sirius, the select the satellite radio channel.
Sirius dog logo, channel names and logos
are trademarks of SIRIUS Satellite Radio ! Channel selection
Inc. Turn the “TUNE/FOLDER/CH” dial (23) to
! Satellite radio reception select the radio channel. Turn the tuning
dial clockwise to change the channel
Satellite radio signals are best received in upward and turn the dial counterclockwise
areas with a clear view of the open sky. In to change the channel downward with
areas where there are tall buildings, trees, each click of the dial.
tunnels or other structures that may
obstruct the signal of the satellites, there ! Category selection
may be signal interruptions. Other circum- Press the “SEEK/TRACK/CAT” button
stances that may result in signal loss (18) to select the category of radio
include driving near a wall, steep cliff or channel. Press the “ ” side of the button
hill, or driving on the lower level of a multi- (18) to change the category upward and
tiered road or inside a parking garage. the “ ” side of the button to downward
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (186,1)
5-22 Audio
with each press of the button. selection, channel scan) are performed
only in the selected category. To cancel
! Channel preset the category mode, press the “CAT” button
Presetting a channel with a preset button (21) for at least 2 seconds again.
(22) allows you to select that station in a
single operation. Up to six SR1, SR2 and ! Band selection
SR3 channels each may be preset. Push the “SAT” button (20) when the radio
Press one of the preset buttons for at is on to select SR1, SR2 or SR3 reception.
least 2 seconds to store the channel. The Each time this button is pressed, the band
number of the channel will flash once on will change in the following order:
the display, and the unit produces a beep
sound at this time.
! Channel scan
Press the “SCAN” button (19) to change ! AUX mode
the radio to the SCAN mode. In this mode, Press the “CD/AUX” button (17) to select
the radio scans through the channel until a the “AUX mode” (when the AUX unit is
station is found. The radio will stop at the connected to the AUX jack).
station for 5 seconds while displaying the
channel number, after which scanning will
continue until the entire channel has been
scanned from the low end to the high end.
Press the “SCAN” button (19) again to
cancel the SCAN mode and to stop on any
displayed station.
When the “SCAN” button is pressed for
automatic tuning, stations are only
scanned in an upward direction.
! Category mode
Press the “CAT” button (21) for at least 2
seconds to turn the category mode on. In
this mode, the radio operations (channel

Black plate (187,1)
Audio 5-23
(1) Disc slot
In-dash 6 CD auto changer (if equipped) (2) Disc indicators (disc No.1 to 6)
(3) Disc select buttons (disc No.1 to 6)
& Loading and unloading compact discs (4) Eject button
(5) Disc slot indicator
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (188,1)
5-24 Audio
! To remove a disc
CAUTION ! To insert a disc
1. Press the desired one of the disc
1. Press one of the disc select buttons (3)
. Do not attempt to insert two or (numbered from 1 to 6) for which the disc
select buttons (3) (numbered from 1 to 6)
more discs into the slot at a time. for which the disc indicator light is on.
indicator light (2) is “OFF”.
Doing so can cause mechanical 2. Press the eject button (4). The se-
The disc indicator lights are located
damage to the CD changer. lected disc will be ejected and the
directly above the corresponding disc
. Use only music CDs identified by indicator light will begin blinking.
select buttons.
a mark. 3. To remove another disc, repeat Steps
2. The indicator will begin blinking. The
. Do not use CDs listed in the 1 and 2 choosing a different disc select
blinking will last for 15 seconds.
following which could cause da- button.
During this period, insert a desired disc,
mage to the CD player. (To remove discs when the ignition switch
and the disc will begin to play. (If any disc
is in the “Lock” position, press the eject
– 3 inch (8 cm) compact disc is not inserted during this period, the “Disc
button, and the first disc will be ejected.
– Any disc with a peel-off or seal slot” (1) door will close. Repeat Step 1.)
Press the eject button again, and the next
on it Be sure to hold a disc with the label side disc will be ejected and so on. At this time,
(the side where titles are printed) up.
– Bent disc the disc select buttons are disabled.)
3. To insert another disc, repeat Steps 1
– Cleaning disc and 2 choosing a different disc select ! To remove all discs at one time
– CD accessory (e.g., 3 inch (8 button.
cm) disc adapter) 1. Press and hold the eject button (4)
! To insert six discs at a time until all “Disc” indicators begin blinking
. Do not insert or remove any disc (approximately 1.5 seconds), and the first
when the automatic transmission 1. Press and hold the disc select button disc will be ejected.
selector lever is in the park number 1 until all disc indicators begin
position; the selector lever in that 2. When the disc is removed, the next
blinking (approximately 1.5 seconds). one will be ejected, and so on.
position can interfere with disc 2. The indicators will blink for 15 sec-
insertion or removal, causing onds. During this period, insert desired six
scratches on the disc surface ! To replace a playing disc with
discs. another
(for AT vehicles).
3. When all discs are loaded, the first Simply press the desired one of disc
disc will begin to play. (If no disc is select buttons (3) (numbered from 1 to 6)
inserted within this 15 seconds, the entire or press the disc select button on the radio
disc load sequence will be canceled.) unit to select the desired disc, and the disc

Black plate (189,1)
Audio 5-25
will begin to play. Precautions to observe when

! Disc indicators handling a compact disc
Lit: when the corresponding storage tray is
occupied by a disc. Use only compact discs (CDs) that have
Blinking: Disc player is either in loading, the mark shown in the following illustra-
eject or changing mode. tion.
OFF: No disc is loaded or the ignition
switch is in the “LOCK” position.
! Open/Closed disc slot indicator 5
When the disc slot is open, the disc
indicators on both sides of the slot
illuminate.
! Function control
Refer to CD changer control operating
instructions described in the “Type A audio
set” section.
You may also use compact discs (CD-Rs

and CD-RWs) that have the following
marks, but you may not use some discs
if they were produced using writing meth-
ods not compatible with your vehicle’s
audio system.
. You cannot use a DualDisc in the CD
player. If you insert a DualDisc into the
player, the disc may not come out again,
possibly causing the player to malfunction.
. In cold and/or rainy weather, dew can
form inside the CD player, preventing
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (190,1)
5-26 Audio
normal operation. If this happens, eject

the CD and wait for the player to dry out.
. Skipping may occur when the CD
player is subjected to severe vibration
(for example, when the vehicle is driven
on a rough surface).
. To remove a disc from the case, press
the center of the case and hold both
edges of the disc. If the disc surface is
touched directly, contamination could
cause poor tone quality. Do not touch the
disc surface.
. Use a clean disc whenever possible. If
there are deposits, wipe the disc surface
from the center outward with a dry, soft
cloth. Be sure not to use a hard cloth,
thinner, benzene, alcohol, etc.
. Do not use any disc that is scratched,
deformed, or cracked. Also, do not use
any disc that has a non-standard shape
(for example, a heart shape). Malfunctions
or problems might result.
. A disc is vulnerable to heat. Never
keep it either in places exposed to direct
sunlight, near heaters or in vehicles
parked in the sun or on hot days.

Black plate (11,1)
Interior equipment
Interior lights ....................................................... 6-2 Accessory power outlets .................................... 6-8

Dome light .......................................................... 6-2 Use with a cigarette lighter
Cargo area light .................................................. 6-2 (Canada only, if equipped)................................ 6-10
Map lights ............................................................ 6-3 Ashtray (Canada only, if equipped) .................. 6-11
Sun visors ........................................................... 6-3 Floor mat ............................................................ 6-12
Vanity mirror ....................................................... 6-3 Coat hook........................................................... 6-12
Storage compartments ....................................... 6-4 Cargo area cover (if equipped) ......................... 6-13
Glove box ........................................................... 6-4 Using the cover ................................................. 6-13
Center console.................................................... 6-4 To remove the cover housing ............................. 6-13
Overhead console ............................................... 6-6 Stowage of the cover ......................................... 6-13
Dashboard storage compartment ......................... 6-6 To install the cover housing ............................... 6-13 6
Convenience net ................................................. 6-6 Shopping bag hook ........................................... 6-14
Pocket (if equipped) ............................................ 6-7 Cargo tie-down hooks ....................................... 6-14
Cup holders ......................................................... 6-7 Cargo area bars ................................................. 6-14
Front passenger’s cup holder .............................. 6-7 Under-floor storage compartment .................... 6-15
Rear passenger’s cup holder ............................... 6-8 Front, left and right side storage
compartment ................................................... 6-16
Center storage compartment
(Storage bucket) .............................................. 6-16

Black plate (192,1)
6-2 Interior equipment
Interior lights about 30 minutes later and then the NOTE

light is turned off automatically. If a door or the rear gate is left open,
When leaving your vehicle, make sure the The light also can be turned on by use of the light flashes and a chime sounds
light goes out to avoid battery discharge. the keyless entry transmitter. See the about 30 minutes later and then the
“Remote keyless entry system” section in light is turned off automatically.
& Dome light chapter 2 for detailed information. The light also can be turned on by use of
OFF: The light stays off. the keyless entry transmitter. See the
“Remote keyless entry system” section in
& Cargo area light chapter 2 for detailed information.
The dome light switch has three positions:

ON: The light stays on continuously.
DOOR (middle position): The dome light
comes on when any of the doors or the The cargo area light switch has three
rear gate is opened. The light remains on positions:
for several seconds and gradually goes ON: The light stays on continuously.
out after all doors and the rear gate are OFF: The light stays off.
closed.
DOOR: The light comes on only when the
NOTE rear gate is opened.
If a door or the rear gate is left open,
the light flashes and a chime sounds

Black plate (193,1)
Interior equipment 6-3
Map lights Sun visors & Vanity mirror
To use the vanity mirror, swing down the

To turn on the map light, push the switch. To block out glare, swing down the visors. sun visor and open the vanity mirror cover.
To turn it off, push the switch again. To use the sun visor at a side window,
swing it down and move it sideways.
When leaving the vehicle, make sure the
light is turned off to avoid battery dis-
charge.

Black plate (194,1)
Storage compartments & Glove box To use as armrest:
CAUTION
. Always keep the storage com-
partment closed while driving to
reduce the risk of injury in the
event of sudden stops or an
accident.
. Do not store spray cans, contain-
ers with flammable or corrosive
liquids or any other dangerous
items in the storage compart-
ment. 1) Lock 1. Tip the console top forward from its
2) Unlock vertical position.
To open the glove box, pull the handle. To
close it, push the lid firmly upward.
To lock the glove box, insert the key and
turn it clockwise.
& Center console

The center console box provides a sto-
rage space. In addition, the top of the
console can be used as an armrest and as
a rear passenger’s cup holder.
2. Push the armrest part of the console

top forward to the desired position while
pulling up the knob at the front end of the

Black plate (195,1)
armrest and lock it in position by releasing fall from the table and cause a
the knob. Adjust the position of the burn or other injury.
armrest to suit your driving position. Make
sure the armrest is securely retained. To use as storage space:
When you slide the armrest back to its
original position, pull the knob upward as
you do so.
To return the console top to the vertical
position, pull upward the knob at the front
end of the armrest while raising the
console top until it emits a click.
6
CAUTION With the console top tipped toward the
Do not step or sit on the armrest, rear seat, it can be used as a cup holder.
and do not place heavy objects on it.
CAUTION
The armrest could break, and you
could get hurt. Raise the console top to the vertical
. To switch from using the console
position or tip it toward the rear seat.
top as an armrest to using it as a
To use as rear passenger’s cup holder: Then, pull up the lock button of the
rear passenger’s cup holder,
console box and open the lid.
raise the console top to the
vertical position before tipping it When closed, the lid can be used as a tray
toward the rear seat. Otherwise for placing small items in it.
the console top may break.
CAUTION
. Do not place any object weighing
more than 4.4 lbs (2 kg) on the . Before opening the lid of the
table. console box, raise the console
. Do not have hot drinks or other top completely to the vertical
objects on the table while driv- position or tip it toward the rear
ing. During hard braking or ne- seat. Otherwise, the lid may be
gotiation of a curve, they could damaged and an injury may oc-
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (196,1)
cur. CAUTION CAUTION

. Be careful not to trap your hands
between the console top and When your vehicle is in the sun or When your vehicle is in the sun or
console box when raising and on a warm day, the inside of the on a warm day, the inside of the
tipping the console top. overhead console heats up. Avoid overhead console heats up. Avoid
storing plastic or other heat-vulner- storing plastic or other heat-vulner-
. When there is an object on the
able or flammable articles such as a able or flammable articles such as a
console box lid, do not tip the
lighter in the overhead console. lighter in the overhead console.
console top forward. Otherwise,
the console top or lid could be
damaged, and an injury could
occur. & Dashboard storage compart- & Convenience net
ment
& Overhead console
A net for storing small articles is provided

To open the dashboard compartment, at the front passenger’s foot-well.
push the button on the lid and the lid will
To open the console, push on the console automatically open. Be sure to close the
lid lightly and the lid will automatically compartment fully before driving.
open.

Black plate (197,1)
& Pocket (if equipped) Cup holders & Front passenger’s cup holder
! In front door trim
CAUTION
. When not in use, always keep the
cup holder stored while driving
to reduce the risk of injury in the
event of a sudden stop or an
accident.
. Do not pick up a cup from the cup
holder or put a cup in the holder
while you are driving, as this may 6
distract you and lead to an
accident.
CAUTION . Take care to avoid spills. Bev-
erages, if hot, might burn you or The door pockets can be used to hold
Do not use the pocket as an ashtray your passengers. Spilled bev- beverage bottles and other items.
or leave a lighted cigarette in the erages may also damage uphols-
pocket. This could cause a fire. tery or carpets. CAUTION
To use the pocket, push lightly on the lid When placing a beverage in a door
below the climate controls. pocket, make sure it is capped.
Otherwise, the beverage could spill
when opening/closing the door or
while driving and, if the beverage is
hot, it could scald you.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (198,1)
! In center console Accessory power outlets
To use the rear passenger’s cup holder

located on the reverse side of the console
A dual cup holder is built in the center
top, refer to “Center console” in the Power outlet beside front pocket
console, beside the parking brake lever.
“Storage compartments” part of this chap-
ter for details.
& Rear passenger’s cup holder
There are rear passenger’s cup holders at
the back of the center console as well as
on the reverse side of the console top.
To use the rear passenger’s cup holder
located at the back of the center console,
open the lid by pulling its upper edge.
Power outlet in center console

Black plate (199,1)
or more outlets simultaneously, the total simultaneously, the total power

power consumed by them must not consumed by them must not
exceed 120W. exceed 120W. Overloading the
accessory power outlet can
CAUTION cause a short circuit. Do not use
double adapters or more than
. Do not attempt to use a cigarette one electrical appliance.
lighter in the center console and
cargo area power outlets. . If the plug on your electric appli-
ance is either too loose or too
. Do not place any foreign objects, tight for the accessory power
especially metal ones such as outlet, this can result in a poor
coins or aluminum foil, into the
accessory power outlet. That
contact or cause the plug to get
stuck. Only use plugs that fit
6
Power outlet in cargo area could cause a short circuit. Al- properly.
Accessory power outlets are provided ways put the cap on the acces-
sory power outlet when it is not . Use of an electric appliance in the
beside the front pocket, in the center accessory power outlet for a long
console and in the cargo area. Electrical in use.
period of time while the engine is
power (12V DC) from the battery is . Use only electrical appliances not running can cause battery
available at any of the outlets when the which are designed for 12V DC. discharge.
ignition switch is in either the “Acc” or “ON” The maximum power rating of an
position. . Before driving your vehicle, make
appliance that can be connected sure that the plug and the cord
You can use an in-vehicle electrical varies among outlets as shown in
appliance by connecting it to an outlet. on your electrical appliance will
the following. Do not use an not interfere with your shifting
The maximum power rating of an appli- appliance which exceeds the in- gears and operating the accel-
ance that can be connected varies among dicated wattage for each outlet. erator and brake pedals. If they
outlets as shown in the following. Do not Outlet beside front pocket: 80W do, do not use the electrical
use an appliance which exceeds the or less appliance while driving.
indicated wattage for each outlet.
Outlets in center console and
Outlet beside front pocket: 80W or less cargo area: 120W or less
Outlets in center console and cargo area:
120W or less When using appliances con-
nected to two or more outlets
When using appliances connected to two
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (200,1)
& Use with a cigarette lighter WARNING

(Canada only, if equipped)
To avoid being burned, never grasp
the lighter by the end with the
heating element. Doing so could
result in injury and could also
damage the heating element.
CAUTION
. Do not hold the lighter pushed in,
because it will overheat.
NOTE . The electrical power socket lo-
When the lid of the center console is cated on the lower part of the
closed, an opening remains between instrument panel is originally de-
To use the accessory power outlet beside signed to use a genuine SUBARU
the center console and the lid to allow the front pocket as a cigarette lighter
the power outlet in the center console cigarette lighter plug. Do not use
socket, purchase the cigarette lighter plug, non-genuine cigarette lighter
to be used. Pass the electrical appli- which is an optional accessory.
ance’s cord through this opening. plugs in the socket. Doing so
A cigarette lighter plug is available from may cause a short-circuit and
your SUBARU dealer. overheating, resulting in a fire.
The cigarette lighter operates only when . If the socket is ever used for a
the ignition switch is in the “ON” and “Acc” plug-in accessory such as a cell
positions. phone, that may damage the
To use the cigarette lighter, push in the portion of the socket’s internal
knob and wait a few moments. It will mechanism that causes a cigar-
automatically spring up when ready for ette lighter plug to “pop out”
use. after its lighter element is heated.
Therefore, do not place a cigar-
ette lighter plug in a socket that
has been used, even once, to

Black plate (201,1)
power a plug-in accessory. Doing Ashtray (Canada only, if To remove the ashtray for cleaning, hold
so may cause the plug to stick the right and left sides of the ashtray and
equipped) pull it out.
and overheat, creating a potential
fire hazard.
NOTE
CAUTION
Do not use ashtrays as waste re-
ceptacles or leave a lighted cigarette
in an ashtray. This could cause a
fire.
Particles of ash and tobacco will accu-

mulate around the hinges of the ash-
tray’s inner lid. Clean them off using a
toothbrush or other narrow-ended im-
plement.
It is possible to install on ashtray, which is
an optional accessory, in the front pocket.
The ashtray is available from your
SUBARU dealer.
To open the ashtray, push lightly on the lid
below the climate controls.
Fully close the lid after using it to help
reduce residual smoke.

Black plate (202,1)
Floor mat Coat hook
CAUTION
A retaining pin is located on the driver’s Make sure the driver’s floor mat is The coat hook is attached to the rear left
side of the vehicle next to the fuel filler placed back in its proper location passenger’s hand grip.
door release. and correctly secured on its retain-
The floor mat is secured using the built-in ing pin. Also, do not use more than CAUTION
grommet, by placing the grommet over the one floor mat. If the floor mat slips Never hang anything on the coat
pin and pushing downward. forward and interferes with the hook that might obstruct the driver’s
movement of the pedals during view or that could cause injury in
driving, it could cause an accident. sudden stops or in a collision. And
do not hang items on the coat hook
that weigh 2.2 lbs (1 kg) or more.

Black plate (203,1)
Cargo area cover (if WARNING & Stowage of the cover

equipped)
Do not place anything on the ex-
The cargo area cover is provided for tended cover. Putting excessive
covering the cargo area and to protect its weight on the extended cover can
contents from direct sunlight. This cover is break it and an object on the cover
detachable to make room for additional could tumble forward in the event of
cargo. a sudden stop or collision. This
could cause serious injury.
& Using the cover
& To remove the cover housing
6
On models having a temporary spare tire,

the cargo area cover can be stowed under
the cargo floor.
& To install the cover housing

To install the cover, insert both ends of the
cover housing into the retainers.
To extend the cover, pull the end of the

cover out of the housing, then insert its
hooks into the catches as shown. To 1. Rewind the cover.
rewind it, unhook it from the catches and 2. To take the cover housing off the
it will rewind automatically. You should retainer, lift it out.
hold on to the cover and guide it back into 3. Store the cover housing in the cargo
the cover housing while it is rewinding. area.

Black plate (204,1)
Shopping bag hook Cargo tie-down hooks Cargo area bars
CAUTION CAUTION CAUTION

Do not hang items on the shopping The cargo tie-down hooks are de- Do not place objects with a total
bag hook that weigh 6.6 lbs (3 kg) or signed only for securing light cargo. weight exceeding 6.6 lbs (3 kg) on a
more. Never try to secure cargo that net attached to the cargo area bars.
exceeds the capacity of the hooks.
In the cargo area, there are two retract- The maximum load capacity is 44
able shopping bag hooks (one on each lbs (20 kg) per a hook.
side) and four non-retractable shopping
bag hooks (two on each side).
1) Cargo area bar

In the cargo area, there are two bars (one
on each side) to which a net can be
The cargo area is equipped with four tie- attached.
To use either of the retractable hooks, pull down hooks so that cargo can be secured
the lower portion out. with a cargo net or ropes.
When using the hooks, raise them. When
not in use, lower the hooks.

Black plate (205,1)
Under-floor storage compart- small items.

ment
CAUTION
. Always keep the lids closed while
driving to reduce the risk of
injury in the event of sudden stop
or an accident.
. Do not store spray cans, contain-
ers with flammable or corrosive
liquids or any other dangerous
6
items in the storage compart-
ment.
There are five trays in the storage

compartment underneath the floor of the
cargo area. They can be used to store
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (206,1)
& Front, left and right side storage compartment & Center storage compartment
(Storage bucket)
To open the lid, pull the handle up.

Canada-spec. non-turbo models:
The storage bucket is put on the spare
tire.
Except Canada-spec. non-turbo mod-
els:
Storage tray is placed on the spare tire.
To open the lid, raise the cargo tie-down hooks and pull the tab up. The jack and jack
handle are stored in the left side storage compartment.

Black plate (207,1)
6
NOTE
When storing a flat tire, put the storage
tray in the luggage compartment (ex-
cept Canada-spec. non-turbo models).

Black plate (2,1)
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
Left Page
Black plate (13,1)
Starting and operating
Fuel ...................................................................... 7-2 ABS (Anti-lock Brake System).......................... 7-17

Fuel requirements ............................................... 7-2 ABS system self-check ...................................... 7-17
Fuel filler lid and cap........................................... 7-3 ABS warning light.............................................. 7-17
State emission testing (U.S. only)...................... 7-6 Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
Preparing to drive ............................................... 7-7 system ............................................................. 7-18
Starting the engine.............................................. 7-7 Steps to take if EBD system fails ....................... 7-19
Manual transmission vehicle................................ 7-7 Vehicle Dynamics Control system
Automatic transmission vehicle ........................... 7-8 (if equipped) .................................................... 7-20
Stopping the engine............................................ 7-9 Vehicle Dynamics Control system monitor.......... 7-21
Manual transmission........................................... 7-9 Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch ................ 7-23
Shifting speeds .................................................. 7-10 Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
Driving tips ........................................................ 7-10 (if equipped) .................................................... 7-24
Automatic transmission..................................... 7-11 Parking your vehicle ......................................... 7-25 7
Selector lever for automatic transmission ........... 7-12 Parking brake .................................................... 7-26
Shift lock release ............................................... 7-14 Parking tips ....................................................... 7-26
Rear viscous limited slip differential (LSD) Hill holder
(if equipped) .................................................... 7-15 (Manual transmission – if equipped)............. 7-27
Power steering ................................................... 7-15 Cruise control .................................................... 7-28
Braking................................................................ 7-16 To set cruise control .......................................... 7-28
Braking tips ....................................................... 7-16 To temporarily cancel the cruise control ............. 7-29
Brake system ..................................................... 7-16 To turn off the cruise control.............................. 7-29
Disc brake pad wear warning indicators.............. 7-16 To change the cruising speed ............................ 7-29
Self-leveling rear suspension (if equipped) ..... 7-31

Black plate (210,1)
7-2 Starting and operating
Fuel AKI) is used, knocking, reduced output it is designed to optimize engine and
and poor accelerator response will emission performance with gasoline that
result. meets the clean burning low-sulfur Cali-
CAUTION fornia gasoline specifications. If you live in
! Fuel octane rating any other state than California, your
Use of a fuel which is low in quality This octane rating is the average of the vehicle will operate on gasoline meeting
or use of an inappropriate fuel Research Octane and Motor Octane Federal specifications. Gasoline sold out-
additive may cause engine damage. numbers and is commonly referred to as side California is permitted to have higher
the Anti Knock Index (AKI). sulfur levels, which may affect the perfor-
Using a gasoline with a lower octane mance of your vehicle’s catalytic converter
& Fuel requirements rating can cause persistent and heavy and may produce a sulfur exhaust odor or
knocking, which can damage the engine. smell. SUBARU recommends that you try
! Non-turbo models
Do not be concerned if your vehicle a different brand of unleaded gasoline
The 2.5-liter non-turbo engine is designed sometimes knocks lightly when you drive having lower sulfur to determine if the
to operate using unleaded gasoline with up a hill or when you accelerate. See your problem is fuel related before returning
an octane rating of 87 AKI or higher. dealer or a qualified service technician if your vehicle to an authorized dealer for
! Turbo models you use a fuel with the specified octane service.
The 2.5-liter turbo engine is designed to rating and your vehicle knocks heavily or ! MMT
operate using premium unleaded gasoline persistently.
Some gasoline contains an octane-en-
with an octane rating of 91 AKI or higher. If ! Unleaded gasoline hancing additive called MMT (Methylcy-
premium unleaded gasoline is not avail- The neck of the fuel filler pipe is designed clopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl). If
able, regular unleaded gasoline with an to accept only an unleaded gasoline filler you use such fuels, your emission control
octane rating of 87 AKI or higher may be nozzle. Under no circumstances should system performance may deteriorate and
temporarily used. For optimum engine leaded gasoline be used because it will the CHECK ENGINE warning light/Mal-
performance and driveability, it is required damage the emission control system and function indicator lamp may turn on. If this
that you use premium grade unleaded may impair driveability and fuel economy. happens, return to your authorized
gasoline. SUBARU Dealer for service. If it is
! Gasoline for California-certified
determined that the condition is caused
NOTE LEV
by the type of fuel used, repairs may not
Be sure to use premium unleaded Your vehicle was certified to California’s be covered by your warranty.
gasoline of 91 AKI or higher for turbo low emission vehicle (LEV) standards as
models. If other gasoline (lower than 91 indicated on the underhood tune-up label,

Black plate (211,1)
Starting and operating 7-3
! Gasoline for cleaner air now producing reformulated gasolines, . Fuel system damage or driveability
which are designed to reduce vehicle problems which result from the use of
CAUTION emissions. SUBARU approves the use of improper fuel are not covered under the
reformulated gasoline. SUBARU Limited Warranty.
Do not let fuel spill on the exterior
If you are not sure what the fuel contains,
surfaces of the vehicle. Fuels con-
you should ask your service station
& Fuel filler lid and cap
taining alcohol may cause paint
damage, which is not covered under operators if their gasolines contain deter- ! Refueling
the SUBARU Limited Warranty. gents and oxygenates and if they have Only one person should be involved in
been reformulated to reduce vehicle emis- refueling. Do not allow others to approach
Your use of gasoline with detergent sions. the area of the vehicle near the fuel filler
additives will help prevent deposits from As additional guidance, only use fuels pipe while refueling is in progress.
forming in your engine and fuel system. suited for your vehicle as explained in the Be sure to observe any other precautions
This helps keep your engine in tune and following. that are posted at the service station.
your emission control system working . Fuel should be unleaded and have an 7
properly, and is a way of doing your part octane rating no lower than that specified
for cleaner air. If you continuously use a in this manual.
high quality fuel with the proper detergent
. Methanol (methyl or wood alcohol) is
and other additives, you should never
sometimes mixed with unleaded gasoline.
need to add any fuel system cleaning
Methanol can be used in your vehicle
agents to your fuel tank.
ONLY if it does not exceed 5% of the fuel
Many gasolines are now blended with mixture AND if it is accompanied by
materials called oxygenates. Use of these sufficient quantities of the proper cosol-
fuels can also help keep the air cleaner. vents and corrosion inhibitors required to
Oxygenated blend fuels, such as MTBE prevent damage to the fuel system. Do not
(Methyl Tertiary Butyl ether) or ethanol use fuel containing methanol EXCEPT
(ethyl or grain alcohol) may be used in under these conditions.
your vehicle, but should contain no more . If undesirable driveability problems are
than 15% MTBE or 10% ethanol for the experienced and you suspect they may be
proper operation of your SUBARU. fuel related, try a different brand of gaso-
line before seeking service at your
In addition, some gasoline suppliers are SUBARU dealer.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (212,1)
left. Do not remove the cap

quickly. Fuel may be under pres-
sure and spray out of the fuel
filler neck, especially in hot
weather. If you hear a hissing
sound while you are removing
the cap, wait for the sound to
stop and then slowly open the
cap to prevent fuel from spraying
out and creating a fire hazard.
. When refueling, insert the fuel
nozzle securely into the fuel filler
pipe. If the nozzle is lifted or not
1. To open the fuel filler lid, pull the lid 1) Open fully inserted, its automatic stop-
release lever. The lever is on the floor at 2) Close
ping mechanism may not func-
the left of the driver’s seat. 2. Remove the fuel filler cap by turning it tion, causing fuel to overflow the
slowly counterclockwise. tank and creating a fire hazard.
WARNING . Stop refueling when the auto-
Before opening the fuel filler cap, WARNING matic stop mechanism on the
first touch the vehicle body or a fuel nozzle activates. If you con-
. Gasoline vapor is highly flam- tinue to add fuel, temperature
metal portion of the fuel pump or mable. Before refueling, always
similar object to discharge any changes or other conditions
first stop the engine and close all may cause fuel to overflow from
static electricity that may be present vehicle doors and windows.
on your body. If your body is carry- the tank and create a fire hazard.
Make sure that there are no
ing an electrostatic charge, there is lighted cigarettes, open flames
a possibility that an electric spark 3. Stop filling the tank after the fuel filler
or electrical sparks in the adja-
could ignite the fuel, which could pump automatically stops. Do not add any
cent area. Refueling must be
burn you. To avoid acquiring a new more fuel.
performed outside. Quickly wipe
static electric charge, do not get up any spilled fuel.
back into the vehicle while refueling
is in progress. . When opening the cap, grasp it
firmly and turn it slowly to the

Black plate (213,1)
CAUTION fuel gauge. This indicates that the fuel fuel may damage the paint, be
filler door (lid) is located on the right sure to wipe off any spilled fuel
Make sure that the cap is tightened side of the vehicle. quickly. Paint damage caused by
until it clicks to prevent fuel spillage . If the fuel filler cap is not tightened spilled fuel is not covered under
in the event of an accident. until it clicks or if the tether is caught the SUBARU Limited Warranty.
under the cap, the CHECK ENGINE . Always use a genuine SUBARU
4. Put the cap back on, turn it clockwise warning light may come on. Refer to fuel filler cap. If you use the
until you hear a clicking noise. Be certain the “Warning and indicator lights” wrong cap, it may not fit, and
not to catch the tether under the cap while section located in chapter 3. your fuel tank and emission con-
tightening. Immediately refuel in the tank when- trol system may be damaged. It
5. Close the fuel filler lid completely. ever the low fuel warning light comes could also lead to fuel spillage
If you spill any fuel on the painted surface, on. Engine misfires as a result of an and a fire.
rinse it off immediately. Otherwise, the empty tank could cause damage to the . Immediately put fuel in the tank
painted surface could be damaged. engine. whenever the low fuel warning
light illuminates. Engine misfires
7
NOTE CAUTION as a result of an empty tank
could cause damage to the en-
. Never add any cleaning agents to gine.
the fuel tank. The addition of a
cleaning agent may cause da-
mage to the fuel system.
. After refueling, turn the cap to the
right until it clicks to ensure that
it is fully tightened. If the cap is
not securely tightened, fuel may
leak out while the vehicle is being
driven or fuel spillage could
occur in the event of an accident,
creating a fire hazard.
. Do not let fuel spill on the exterior
surfaces of the vehicle. Because
. You will see the “ ” sign in the

Black plate (214,1)
State emission testing (U.S. in order to meet their obligation under When properly used, that equipment will
federal law to implement stricter vehicle not damage an AWD SUBARU vehicle.
only) emission standards to reduce air pollution
from cars. A dynamometer is a treadmill or Under no circumstances should the rear
roller-like testing device that allows your wheels be jacked off the ground, nor
WARNING should the driveshaft be disconnected for
vehicle’s wheels to turn while the vehicle
remains in one place. Depending on the state emission testing.
Testing of an All-Wheel Drive vehicle
must NEVER be performed on a severity of a state’s air pollution problems, The EPA has issued regulations for
single two-wheel dynamometer. At- the states must adopt either a “basic” or inspecting the On-Board Diagnostic
tempting to do so will result in “enhanced” vehicle emission inspection (OBD) system as part of the state emis-
uncontrolled vehicle movement and test. Normally, a portion of the basic sions inspection. The OBD system is
may cause an accident or injuries to emission test consists of an emission designed to detect engine and transmis-
persons nearby. inspector inserting an analyzer probe into sion problems that might cause vehicle
the exhaust pipe of an idling vehicle for a emissions to exceed allowable limits.
short period of time. States with more These inspections apply to all 1996 model
CAUTION severe air pollution problems are required year and newer passenger cars and light
to adopt an enhanced vehicle emission trucks. Over 30 states plus the District of
Resultant vehicle damage due to test. This test simulates actual driving Columbia have implemented the OBD
improper testing is not covered conditions on a dynamometer and permits system inspection.
under the SUBARU Limited War- more accurate measurement of tailpipe
ranty and is the responsibility of emitted pollution than the basic emission . The inspection of the OBD system
the state inspection program or its test. consists of a visual operational check of
contractors or licensees. the “CHECK ENGINE” warning light/
The U.S. Environmental Protection malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) and an
At state inspection time, remember to Agency (EPA) and states using two-wheel examination of the OBD system with an
tell your inspection or service station in dynamometers in their emission testing electronic scan tool while the engine is
advance not to place your SUBARU programs have EXEMPTED SUBARU running
AWD vehicle on a two-wheel dynam- AWD vehicles from the portion of the . A vehicle passes the OBD system
ometer. Otherwise, serious transmis- testing program that involves a two-wheel inspection if proper the “CHECK EN-
sion damage will result. dynamometer. GINE” warning light/MIL illumination is
Some states have started using dynam- There are some states that use four-wheel observed, there is no stored diagnostic
ometers in their state inspection programs dynamometers in their testing programs. trouble codes, and the OBD system
readiness monitors are complete.

Black plate (215,1)
. A vehicle fails the OBD inspection if the Preparing to drive Starting the engine
“CHECK ENGINE” warning light/MIL is
not properly operating or there is one or You should perform the following checks
more diagnostic trouble codes stored in and adjustments every day before you CAUTION
vehicle’s computer with the “CHECK start driving.
ENGINE” warning light/MIL illuminated. Do not operate the starter motor
. A state emission inspection may reject 1. Check that all windows, mirrors, and continuously for more than 10 sec-
(not pass or fail) a vehicle if the number of lights are clean and unobstructed. onds. If the engine fails to start after
OBD system readiness monitors “Not 2. Check the appearance and condition operating the starter for 5 to 10
Ready” is greater than one. Under this of the tires. Also check tires for proper seconds, wait for 10 seconds or
condition, the vehicle operator should be inflation. more before trying again.
instructed to drive his/her vehicle for a few 3. Look under the vehicle for any sign of
days to set the monitors and return for an leaks.
emission re-inspection. 4. Check that the hood and rear gate are & Manual transmission vehicle
. Owners of rejected or failing vehicles fully closed. 1. Apply the parking brake. 7
should contact their SUBARU Dealer for 5. Check the adjustment of the seat. 2. Turn off unnecessary lights and ac-
service. 6. Check the adjustment of the inside cessories.
and outside mirrors. 3. Press the clutch pedal to the floor and
7. Fasten your seatbelt. Check that your shift the shift lever into neutral. Hold the
passengers have fastened their seatbelts. clutch pedal to the floor while starting the
8. Check the operation of the warning engine.
and indicator lights when the ignition The starter motor will only operate when
switch is turned to the “ON” position. the clutch pedal is pressed fully to the
9. Check the gauges, indicator and warn- floor.
ing lights after starting the engine. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position and check the operation of the
warning and indicator lights. Refer to the
NOTE “Warning and indicator lights” section
Engine oil, engine coolant, brake fluid, (chapter 3).
washer fluid and other fluid levels
5. Turn the ignition switch to the “START”
should be checked daily, weekly or at
position without depressing the accelera-
fuel stops.
tor pedal. Release the key immediately
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (216,1)
after the engine has started. matically lowers the idle speed as the tor pedal. Release the key immediately
If the engine does not start, try the engine warms up. after the engine has started.
following. If the engine does not start, try the
(1) Turn the ignition switch to the NOTE following.
“LOCK” position and wait for at least The engine may be difficult to start (1) Turn the ignition switch to the
10 seconds. After checking that the when the battery has been discon- “LOCK” position and wait for at least
parking brake is firmly set, turn the nected and reconnected (for mainte- 10 seconds. After checking that the
ignition switch to the “START” position nance or other purposes). This diffi- parking brake is firmly set, turn the
while depressing the accelerator pedal culty is caused by the electronically ignition switch to the “START” position
slightly (about a quarter of the full controlled throttle’s self-diagnosis while depressing the accelerator pedal
stroke). Release the accelerator pedal function. To overcome it, keep the slightly (about a quarter of the full
as soon as the engine starts. ignition switch in the “ON” position stroke). Release the accelerator pedal
(2) If this fails to start the engine, turn for approximately 10 seconds before as soon as the engine starts.
the ignition switch back to the “LOCK” starting the engine. (2) If this fails to start the engine, turn
position and wait for at least 10 the ignition switch back to the “LOCK”
seconds. Then fully depress the accel- & Automatic transmission ve- position and wait for at least 10
erator pedal and turn the ignition hicle seconds. Then fully depress the accel-
switch to the “START” position. If the erator pedal and turn the ignition
engine starts, quickly release the 1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Turn off unnecessary lights and ac- switch to the “START” position. If the
accelerator pedal. engine starts, quickly release the
(3) If this fails to start the engine, turn cessories.
accelerator pedal.
the ignition switch again to the “LOCK” 3. Shift the selector lever to the “P” or “N”
position (preferably “P” position). (3) If this fails to start the engine, turn
position. After waiting for 10 seconds the ignition switch again to the “LOCK”
or longer, turn the ignition switch to the The starter motor will only operate when position. After waiting for 10 seconds
“START” position without depressing the select lever is at the “P” or “N” position. or longer, turn the ignition switch to the
the accelerator pedal. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” “START” position without depressing
(4) If the engine still refuses to start, position and check the operation of the the accelerator pedal.
contact your nearest SUBARU dealer warning and indicator lights. Refer to the (4) If the engine still refuses to start,
for assistance. “Warning and indicator lights” section contact your nearest SUBARU dealer
6. Confirm that all warning and indicator (chapter 3). for assistance.
lights have gone off after the engine has 5. Turn the ignition switch to the “START” 6. Confirm that all warning and indicator
started. The fuel injection system auto- position without depressing the accelera-

Black plate (217,1)
lights have gone out after the engine has Stopping the engine Manual transmission
started. The fuel injection system auto-
matically lowers the idle speed as the
engine warms up. WARNING WARNING
While the engine is warming up, make Do not stop the engine when the Do not drive the vehicle with the
sure that the selector lever is at the “P” or vehicle is moving. This will cause clutch disengaged (i.e., when the
“N” position and that the parking brake is loss of power to the power steering clutch pedal is depressed) or with
applied. and the brake booster, making steer- the shift lever in the neutral position.
ing and braking more difficult. It Engine braking has no effect in
CAUTION could also result in accidental acti- either of these conditions and the
vation of the “LOCK” position on the risk of an accident is consequently
If you restart the engine while the ignition switch, causing the steering increased.
vehicle is moving, shift the selector wheel to lock.
lever into the “N” position. Do not 7
attempt to place the selector lever of The ignition switch should be turned off CAUTION
a moving vehicle into the “P” posi- only when the vehicle is stopped and the
tion. engine is idling. Shift into reverse ONLY when the
vehicle has completely stopped. It
may cause damage to the transmis-
NOTE sion to try shifting into reverse when
The engine may be difficult to start the vehicle is moving.
when the battery has been discon-
nected and reconnected (for mainte- The manual transmission is a fully syn-
nance or other purposes). This diffi- chromeshed, 5-forward-speed and 1-re-
culty is caused by the electronically verse-speed transmission.
controlled throttle’s self-diagnosis
function. To overcome it, keep the
ignition switch in the “ON” position
for approximately 10 seconds before
starting the engine.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (218,1)
& Shifting speeds be lost and the risk of an accident

increased.
! Recommended shifting speeds
The best compromise between fuel econ- The following table shows the maximum
omy and vehicle performance during speeds that are possible with each differ-
normal driving is ensured by shifting up ent gear.
at the speeds listed in the following table. Never exceed the speed limit below for
each gear position except for brief accel-
Shift up mph (km/h) eration in an emergency. The tach-
1st to 2nd 15 (24) ometer’s needle will enter the red area if
2nd to 3rd 25 (40) these speeds are exceeded. Failure to
observe this precaution can lead to
3rd to 4th 35 (57) excessive engine wear and poor fuel
The shift pattern is shown on the shift 4th to 5th 45 (73) economy.
lever knob. When shifting from 5th gear to mph (km/h)
reverse gear, first return the shift lever to ! Maximum allowable speeds Non-turbo Turbo models
the neutral position then shift into reverse models
gear. WARNING 1st 30 (49) 28 (46)
To change gears, fully depress the clutch 2nd 51 (82) 52 (83)
pedal, move the shift lever, and gradually When shifting down a gear, ensure
that the vehicle is not traveling at a 3rd 73 (117) 73 (118)
let up on the clutch pedal.
speed exceeding the Maximum Al-
If it is difficult to shift into gear, put the lowable Speed for the gear which is
transmission in neutral, release the clutch about to be selected. Failure to & Driving tips
pedal momentarily, and then try again. observe this precaution can lead to Do not drive with your foot resting on the
NOTE (non-turbo models only) engine over-revving and this in turn clutch pedal and do not use the clutch to
can result in engine damage. hold your vehicle at a standstill on an
To protect the engine while the shift
lever is in neutral, the engine is con- In addition, sudden application of upgrade. Either of those actions may
engine brakes when the vehicle is cause clutch damage.
trolled so that the engine speed does
not become too high even if the accel- travelling on a slippery surface can Do not drive with your hand resting on the
erator pedal is fully depressed. lead to wheel locking; as a conse- shift lever. This may cause wear on the
quence, control of the vehicle may transmission components.

Black plate (219,1)
When it is necessary to reduce vehicle Automatic transmission “R” position or vice versa until
speed due to slow traffic, turning corners, the vehicle has completely
or driving up steep hills, downshift to a The automatic transmission is electroni- stopped. Such shifting may
lower gear before the engine starts to cally controlled and provides 4 forward cause damage to the transmis-
labor. speeds and 1 reverse speed. sion.
On steep downgrades, downshift the . When parking the vehicle, first
transmission to 4th, 3rd or 2nd gear as
WARNING securely apply the parking brake
necessary; this helps to maintain a safe and then place the selector lever
Do not shift from the “P” or “N”
speed and to extend brake pad life. in the “P” position.
position into the “D”, “3”, “2”, “1” or
In this way, the engine provides a braking “R” position while depressing the
effect. Remember, if you “ride” (over use) accelerator pedal. This may cause NOTE
the brakes while descending a hill, they the vehicle to jump forward or back-
may overheat and not work properly. . When the engine coolant tempera-
ward. ture is still low, your vehicle’s auto-
matic transmission will up-shift at high- 7
CAUTION er engine speeds than when the cool-
ant temperature is sufficiently high in
. Shift into the “P” or “R” position order to shorten the warm-up time and
only after the vehicle is comple- improve driveability. The gearshift tim-
tely stopped. Shifting while the ing will automatically shift to the nor-
vehicle is moving may cause mal timing after the engine has warmed
damage to the transmission. up.
. Immediately after ATF (automatic
. Do not race the engine for more
transmission fluid) is replaced, you
than 5 seconds in any position
may feel that the automatic transmis-
except the “N” or “P” position
sion operation is somewhat unusual.
when the brake is set or when
chocks are used in the wheels. This results from invalidation of data
This may cause the automatic the on-board computer has collected
transmission fluid to overheat. and stored in memory to allow the
transmission to shift at the most appro-
. Avoid shifting from one of the priate times for the current condition of
forward driving positions into the your vehicle. Optimized shifting will be
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (220,1)
restored as the vehicle continues to be To shift the selector lever from the “P” to
driven for a while. the any other position, you have to
depress the brake pedal fully when the
NOTE (non-turbo models only) ignition switch is in the “ON” position. This
To protect the engine while the “P” or prevents the vehicle from lurching when it
“N” position is selected, the engine is is started.
controlled so that the engine speed If the shift lever does not move from the
does not become too high even if the “P” position with the brake pedal de-
accelerator pedal is fully depressed. pressed, refer to the “Shift lock release”
section in this chapter.
& Selector lever for automatic ! R (Reverse)
transmission This position is for backing the vehicle.
: With the brake pedal depressed, move
the lever along the gate. To shift from the “N” to “R” position, first
: Move the lever along the gate. stop the vehicle completely then move the
lever to the “R” position.
The selector lever has seven positions.
! N (Neutral)
! P (Park)
This position is for restarting a stalled
This position is for parking the vehicle and engine.
starting the engine.
In this position the wheels and transmis-
In this position, the transmission is me- sion are not locked. In this position, the
chanically locked to prevent the vehicle transmission is neutral; the vehicle will roll
from rolling freely. freely, even on the slightest incline unless
the parking brake or foot brake is on.
When you park the vehicle, first set the
Avoid coasting with the transmission
parking brake fully, then shift into the “P”
neutral.
position. Do not hold the vehicle with only
the transmission. During coasting, there is no engine brak-
ing effect.
A shift interlock function is employed in the
automatic transmission system to ensure
safe starting of the vehicle.

Black plate (221,1)

NOTE to 3rd, 2nd or 1st gear. When you release matic transmission fluid temperature is
If you stop the engine with the selector the pedal, the transmission will return to very low, for example, during driving
lever in the “N” position, move the the original gear position. shortly after the vehicle has been
selector lever to the “P” position ! While climbing a grade
parked for an extended period of time.
immediately. Otherwise, you may find When the ATF temperature has risen to
that the selector lever soon cannot be When driving up hill, undesired upshift to a certain level, automatic downshift
moved to the “P” position. If you find 4th gear is prevented from taking place normally takes place. In the meantime,
that the selector lever cannot be moved when the accelerator pedal is released. downshift manually for engine braking
from the “N” position to the “P” posi- This minimizes the chances of subse- as required.
tion, turn the ignition switch to the quent downshifting to a lower gear when Also, downshifting when braking
“ON” position and try again. accelerating again. This prevents re- downhill will not occur at speeds above
peated upshifting and downshifting result- approximately 48 mph (78 km/h).
ing in a smoother operation of the vehicle.
WARNING ! 3 (Third)
NOTE This position is for using engine braking 7
Do not drive the vehicle with the
selector lever in the “N” (neutral) The transmission may downshift to 2nd when going down a hill or for climbing a
position. Engine braking has no or 1st gear, depending on the way the grade.
effect in this condition and the risk accelerator pedal is pressed to accel-
The transmission automatically shifts into
of an accident is consequently in- erate the vehicle again.
a suitable gear from 1st to 3rd according
creased. ! While going down a hill to the vehicle speed and the acceleration
you require.
When descending a steep hill, depressing
! D (Drive) the brake pedal will cause the transmis- When more acceleration is required in this
This position is for normal driving. sion to downshift to 3rd gear, thus apply- position, press the accelerator pedal fully
The transmission automatically shifts into ing engine braking. Reacceleration for a to the floor and hold that position. The
a suitable gear from 1st to 4th according to short time will cause the transmission to transmission will automatically downshift
the vehicle speed and the acceleration upshift normally. to 2nd or 1st gear. When you release the
you require. pedal, the transmission will return to the
NOTE original gear position.
When more acceleration is required in this In some cases, depressing the brake
position, press the accelerator pedal fully ! 2 (Second)
pedal on a downhill grade does not
to the floor and hold that position. The result in an automatic downshift to 3rd This position is for using engine braking
transmission will automatically downshift gear. This can happen when the auto- when going down a hill or for climbing a
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (222,1)
steep grade. increased. parking your vehicle. Do not hold the

In this position, the transmission holds in vehicle with only the transmission.
the 2nd gear. The following tables show the maximum . Do not keep the vehicle in a stationary
speeds that are possible with each differ- position on an uphill grade by using the
Use this position when starting off from a ent gear. “D”, “3”, “2”, or “1” position. Use the brake
standstill on slippery road surfaces such instead.
as mud or snow. It will ensure greater When shifting down a gear, it is important
traction. to confirm that the current vehicle speed is
not in excess of the Maximum Allowable & Shift lock release
! 1 (First) If the selector lever does not move from
Speed of the gear which is about to be
This position is for driving up or down very selected. the “P” position with the brake pedal
steep grades, or driving through mud or mph (km/h) depressed and the ignition switch in the
sand, or on slippery surfaces. In this Non-turbo Turbo models “ON” position, perform the following steps:
position, the transmission holds in the models
1st gear. To override the shift lock:
1st 28 (45) 23 (37) 1. Set the parking brake and stop the
! Maximum speeds
2nd 63 (100) 65 (104) engine.
WARNING 3rd 98 (156) 104 (167) 2. Take out the screwdriver.
3. Remove the cover by prying on the
When shifting down a gear, ensure NOTE edge with the screwdriver.
that the vehicle is not travelling at a In order to prevent over-revving during
speed exceeding the Maximum Al- deceleration of the vehicle, the trans-
lowable Speed for the gear which is mission will remain in the current gear
about to be selected. Failure to if the speed of the vehicle is in excess
observe this precaution can lead to of the Maximum Allowable Speed for
engine over-revving and this in turn the gear to which the selector lever has
can result in engine damage. been moved.
In addition, sudden application of ! Driving tips
engine brakes when the vehicle is
travelling on a slippery surface can . Always apply the foot or parking brake
lead to wheel locking; as a conse- when the vehicle is stopped in the “D”, “3”,
quence, control of the vehicle may “2”, “1” or “R” position.
be lost and the risk of an accident . Always set the parking brake when

Black plate (223,1)
Rear viscous limited slip dif- Power steering

ferential (LSD) (if equipped)
CAUTION
CAUTION
Do not hold the steering wheel at the
. Never start the engine while a tire fully locked position left or right for
on one side is jacked up, as the more than 5 seconds. This may
vehicle may move. damage the power steering pump.
. If one rear tire is spinning in mud,
The power steering system operates only
avoid continued spinning at high
when the engine is running.
speed as this could adversely
affect the LSD. If you lose power steering assist because
4. Insert the screwdriver into the hole. the engine stops or the system fails to
. If a different size rear tire is
5. Push down on the screwdriver and temporarily used (as in an emer-
function, you can steer but it will take 7
move the selector lever from the “P” to the much more effort.
gency), it will adversely affect the
“N” position. LSD. Always replace it with a NOTE
6. Remove the screwdriver from the hole. regular size tire as soon as Right after the engine has been started
Depress the brake pedal and start the possible. and before it has warmed up, you may
engine. hear a noise coming from areas adja-
The LSD provides optimum distribution of cent to the power steering pump which
Take your vehicle to the nearest SUBARU power according to the difference in
dealer immediately to have the system is located at the right-front area of the
revolutions between the right and left rear engine compartment. This noise is
repaired. wheels that may be caused by certain normal. It does not indicate power
driving conditions, thereby improving driv- steering system trouble.
ing stability on snow-covered, muddy or
other slippery roads.

Black plate (224,1)
Braking a loss of control of the vehicle. Keep & Disc brake pad wear warning
driving straight ahead while gradually indicators
& Braking tips reducing speed. Then slowly pull off the
road to a safe place.
WARNING
& Brake system
Never rest your foot on the brake
pedal while driving. This can cause ! Two separate circuits
dangerous overheating of the Your vehicle has two separate circuit
brakes and needless wear on the brake systems. Each circuit works diag-
brake pads and linings. onally across the vehicle. If one circuit of
the brake system should fail, the other half
! When the brakes get wet of the system still works. If one circuit fails,
the brake pedal will go down much closer
When driving in rain or after washing the to the floor than usual and you will need to
vehicle, the brakes may get wet. As a press it down much harder. And a much
result, brake stopping distance will be longer distance will be needed to stop the The disc brake pad wear warning indica-
longer. To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle vehicle. tors on the disc brakes give a warning
at a safe speed while lightly depressing noise when the brake pads are worn.
the brake pedal to heat up the brakes. ! Brake booster
If a squeaking or scraping noise is heard
! Use of engine braking The brake booster uses engine manifold from the disc brakes while braking, im-
vacuum to assist braking force. Do not mediately have your vehicle checked by
Remember to make use of engine braking turn off the engine while driving because
in addition to foot braking. When descend- your SUBARU dealer.
that will turn off the brake booster, result-
ing a grade, if only the foot brake is used, ing in poor braking power.
the brakes may start working improperly The brakes will continue to work even
because of brake fluid overheating, when the brake booster completely stops
caused by overheated brake pads. To functioning. If this happens, however, you
help prevent this, shift into a lower gear to will have to push the pedal much harder
get stronger engine braking. than normal and the braking distance will
! Braking when a tire is punctured increase.
Do not depress the brake pedal suddenly
when a tire is punctured. This could cause

Black plate (225,1)
ABS (Anti-lock Brake Sys- . When you feel the ABS system & ABS warning light
tem) operating, you should maintain
constant brake pedal pressure.
Do not pump the brake pedal
WARNING since doing so may defeat the
operation of the ABS system.
Always use the utmost care in
driving – overconfidence because The ABS system prevents the lock-up of
you are driving with an ABS wheels which may occur during sudden
equipped vehicle could easily lead braking or braking on slippery road sur-
to a serious accident. faces. This helps prevent the loss of
steering control and directional stability
caused by wheel lock-up.
CAUTION
When the ABS system is operating, you
7
. The ABS system does not always may hear a chattering noise or feel a slight 1) U.S.-spec. models
decrease stopping distance. You vibration in the brake pedal. This is normal 2) Canada-spec. models
should always maintain a safe when the ABS operates. The ABS warning light comes on when the
following distance from other ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
The ABS system will not operate when the
vehicles. position and goes out after approximately
vehicle speed is below approximately 6
. When driving on badly surfaced mph (10 km/h). 2 seconds.
roads, gravel roads, icy roads, or This is an indication that the ABS system
over deep newly fallen snow, & ABS system self-check is working properly.
stopping distances may be long- When driving with an insufficient battery
er for a vehicle with the ABS You may feel a slight shock in the brake
pedal and hear the operating sound of voltage such as when the engine is jump
system than one without. When started, the ABS warning light may come
driving under these conditions, ABS from the engine compartment just
after the vehicle is started. This is caused on. This is due to the low battery voltage
therefore, reduce your speed and and does not indicate a malfunction.
leave ample distance from other by an automatic functional test of the ABS
system being carried out and does not When the battery becomes fully charged,
vehicles. the light will go out.
indicate any abnormal condition.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (226,1)
CAUTION immediately, remaining off. Electronic Brake Force Dis-

. The warning light remains on after
the engine has been started, but it goes
tribution (EBD) system
If the warning light behaves as
follows, the ABS system may not out when the vehicle speed reaches The EBD system maximizes the effective-
be working properly. approximately 8 mph (12 km/h). ness of the brakes by allowing the rear
When the warning light is on, the . The warning light comes on during brakes to supply a greater proportion of
ABS function shuts down; however, driving, but it goes out immediately and the braking force. It functions by adjusting
the conventional brake system con- remains off. the distribution of braking force to the rear
tinues to operate normally. wheels in accordance with the vehicle’s
. The warning light does not come loading condition and speed.
on when the ignition switch is The EBD system is an integral part of the
turned to the “ON” position. ABS system and uses some of the ABS
system’s components to perform its func-
. The warning light comes on when
tion of optimizing the distribution of brak-
the ignition switch is turned to
ing force. If any of the ABS components
the “ON” position, but it does not
used by the EBD function fails, the EBD
go out even when the vehicle
system also stops working.
speed exceeds approximately 8
mph (12 km/h). When the EBD system is operating, you
. The warning light comes on dur- may hear a chattering noise or feel a slight
ing driving. vibration in the brake pedal. This is normal
and does not indicate a malfunction.
If these occur, have the ABS system
repaired at the first available oppor-
tunity by your SUBARU dealer.
NOTE
If the warning light behavior is as
described in the following, the ABS
system may be considered normal.
. The warning light comes on right
after the engine is started but goes out

Black plate (227,1)
& Steps to take if EBD system what harder to control. WARNING

fails If the brake system warning light and ABS
warning light illuminate simultaneously, . Driving with the brake system
take the following steps: warning light on is dangerous.
1. Stop the vehicle in the nearest safe, This indicates your brake system
flat place. may not be working properly. If
2. Shut down the engine, then restart it. the light remains on, have the
3. Release the parking brake. If both brakes inspected by a SUBARU
warning lights go out, the EBD system dealer immediately.
may be faulty. . If at all in doubt about whether
Drive carefully to the nearest SUBARU the brakes are operating prop-
dealer and have the system inspected. erly, do not drive the vehicle.
4. If both warning lights come on again Have your vehicle towed to the
nearest SUBARU dealer for re-
and stay illuminated after the engine has
pair. 7
been restarted, shut down the engine
1) U.S.-spec. models again, apply the parking brake, and check
2) Canada-spec. models the brake fluid level.
If a malfunction occurs in the EBD system, 5. If the brake fluid level is not below the
the system stops working and the brake “MIN” mark, the EBD system may be
system warning light and ABS warning faulty. Drive carefully to the nearest
light come on simultaneously. SUBARU dealer and have the system
inspected.
The EBD system may be faulty if the 6. If the brake fluid level is below the
brake system warning light and ABS
“MIN” mark, DO NOT drive the vehicle.
warning light illuminate simultaneously Instead, have the vehicle towed to the
during driving.
nearest SUBARU dealer for repair.
Even if the EBD system fails, the conven-
tional braking system will still function.
However, the rear wheels will be more
prone to locking when the brakes are
applied harder than usual and the vehi-
cle’s motion may therefore become some-

Black plate (228,1)
Vehicle Dynamics Control that full vehicle control will be tire, the effectiveness of the
system (if equipped) maintained at all times and under Vehicle Dynamics Control
all conditions, its activation system is reduced and this
should be seen as a sign that should be taken into account
WARNING the speed of the vehicle should when driving the vehicle in
be reduced considerably. such a condition.
Always use the utmost care in . Whenever suspension compo-
driving – overconfidence because nents, steering components, or In the event of wheelspin and/or skidding
you are driving with a Vehicle Dy- an axle are removed from a on a slippery road surface and/or during
namics Control system equipped vehicle equipped with Vehicle cornering and/or an evasive maneuver,
vehicle could easily lead to a ser- Dynamics Control, have an the Vehicle Dynamics Control system
ious accident. authorized SUBARU dealer per- adjusts the engine’s output and the
form an inspection of that sys- wheels’ respective braking forces to help
tem. maintain traction and directional control.
CAUTION . Traction Control Function
. The following precautions should
. Even if your vehicle is equipped be observed in order to ensure The traction control function is designed to
with Vehicle Dynamics Control, that the Vehicle Dynamics Con- prevent spinning of the driving wheels on
winter tires or snow chains trol system is operating properly: slippery road surfaces, thereby helping to
should be used when driving on maintain traction and directional control.
– All four wheels should be Activation of this function is shown by
snow-covered or icy roads; in fitted with tires of the same
addition, vehicle speed should steady illumination of the Vehicle Dy-
size, type, and brand. Further- namics Control operation indicator light.
be reduced considerably. Simply more, the amount of wear
having a Vehicle Dynamics Con- should be the same for all . Skid Suppression Function
trol system does not guarantee four tires. The skid suppression function is designed
that the vehicle will be able to to help maintain directional stability by
– Keep the tire pressure at the suppressing the wheels’ tendency to slide
avoid accidents in any situation.
proper level as shown on the sideways during steering operations. Acti-
. Activation of the Vehicle Dy- placard attached to the vehi-
namics Control system is an vation of this function is shown by flashing
cle’s door pillar. of the Vehicle Dynamics Control operation
indication that the road being
– Use only the special tempor- indicator light.
travelled on has a slippery sur-
ary spare tire to replace a flat
face; since having Vehicle Dy-
tire. With a temporary spare
namics Control is no guarantee

Black plate (229,1)

NOTE trailer quite possible that the Vehicle Dy-
. Slight twitching of the brake pedal . when the vehicle is fitted with namics Control system will be unable
may be felt when the Vehicle Dynamics snow tires or winter tires to operate correctly as intended.
Control system operates; a small de- . Activation of the Vehicle Dynamics . Always turn off the engine before
gree of vehicle or steering wheel shak- Control system will cause operation of replacing a tire as failure to do so may
ing may also be noticed in this situa- the steering wheel to feel slightly render the Vehicle Dynamics Control
tion. These are normal characteristics different compared to that for normal system unable to operate correctly.
of Vehicle Dynamics Control operation conditions.
and are no cause for alarm. . Even if the vehicle is equipped with & Vehicle Dynamics Control
. When driving off immediately after a Vehicle Dynamics Control system, it system monitor
starting the engine, a short-lived opera- is important that winter tires be used
tion noise may be noticed coming from when driving on snow-covered or icy ! Vehicle Dynamics Control opera-
the engine compartment. This noise is roads (all four wheels should be fitted tion indicator light
generated as a result of a check being with tires of the same size and brand).
performed on the Vehicle Dynamics Furthermore, if snow chains are to be 7
Control system and is normal. used, they should be fitted on the front
. Depending on the timing of activa- wheels. When a vehicle is fitted with
tion of the brakes, certain situations snow chains, however, the effective-
may occur just after driving off where ness of the Vehicle Dynamics Control
the brake pedal seems to exhibit a system is reduced and this should be
jolting motion. This too is a conse- taken into account when driving the
quence of the Vehicle Dynamics Con- vehicle in such a condition.
trol operational check and is normal. . It is always important to reduce
. In the circumstances listed in the speed when approaching a corner,
following, the vehicle may be more even if the vehicle is equipped with
unstable than it feels to the driver. Vehicle Dynamics Control.
The Vehicle Dynamics Control System . All four wheels should be fitted with
may therefore operate. Such operation The indicator light turns on when the
does not indicate a system fault.
tires of the same size, type, and brand; ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
furthermore, the amount of wear position; it turns off approximately 2
. on gravel-covered or rutted roads should be the same for all four tires. If seconds later. This indicator light flashes
. on unfinished roads these precautions are not observed during activation of the skid suppression
. when the vehicle is towing a and non-matching tires are used, it is function and is illuminated steadily during
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (230,1)
activation of the traction control function. indicating malfunctions in the Vehicle . The warning light will also turn on when
Dynamics Control system and the function a problem occurs with the ABS or Vehicle
The following two situations could indicate of indicating that the Vehicle Dynamics Dynamics Control electronic control sys-
a malfunction of the Vehicle Dynamics Control system is not operating. It comes tems.
Control system; if either should occur, on in the event of a malfunction in the
have an authorized SUBARU dealer carry system and is illuminated whenever the Because the Vehicle Dynamics Control
out an inspection of that system at the first system is not operating. system controls each brake through the
available opportunity. ABS, whenever the ABS stops operating
. The indicator light does not turn on ! Vehicle Dynamics Control warning due to a malfunction in that electrical
when the ignition switch is turned to the light system, the Vehicle Dynamics Control will
“ON” position. The warning light comes on when the also become unable to control all four
. The indicator light does not turn off ignition switch is turned to the “ON” brakes. Thus Vehicle Dynamics Control
approximately 2 seconds after the ignition position and goes off several seconds system operation halts and the warning
switch has been turned to the “ON” after engine startup. This lighting pattern light turns on. Although both the Vehicle
position. indicates that the Vehicle Dynamics Con- Dynamics Control system and the ABS
trol system is operating normally. will be inoperable in this situation, it will
! Vehicle Dynamics Control warning
The following situations could indicate a still be possible to stop the vehicle using
light/Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF
malfunction of the Vehicle Dynamics normal braking. The Vehicle Dynamics
indicator light
Control system; if any should occur, have Control system and the ABS do not
an authorized SUBARU dealer carry out adversely affect operation of the vehicle
an inspection of the system at the first in any way when they are inoperable;
available opportunity. however should such a situation occur,
. The warning light does not turn on drive with care and have an authorized
when the ignition switch is turned to the SUBARU dealer carry out an inspection of
“ON” position. those systems at the first available oppor-
tunity.
. The warning light turns on while the
vehicle is being driven. NOTE
. When a malfunction has occurred in When the warning light turns on and off
the Vehicle Dynamics Control electrical in the following way, it indicates that
system, only the warning light will turn on. the Vehicle Dynamics Control system
In such an event, the ABS will still be is operating normally.
This single light has the function of operating normally. . Although turning on after the engine

Black plate (231,1)
has been started, the warning light available opportunity. wheels are stuck in mud or deep snow
quickly turns off and stays off. . The indicator light does not turn on
. The warning light turns on when the when the ignition switch is turned to the When the switch is pressed during engine
vehicle is being driven; it then turns off “ON” position. operation, the “ ” indicator light illumi-
and stays off. nates. The Vehicle Dynamics Control
. The indicator light fails to turn off after system will be deactivated and the vehicle
the engine is started, even when several
! Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF in- will behave like a model not equipped with
minutes have passed to allow the engine the Vehicle Dynamics Control system.
dicator light
to heat up sufficiently. When the switch is pressed again to
This light comes on to indicate that the
reactivate the Vehicle Dynamics Control
Vehicle Dynamics Control system is in & Vehicle Dynamics Control system, the indicator light goes off.
non-operation mode. This does not con- OFF switch
stitute failure of the Vehicle Dynamics With the Vehicle Dynamics Control system
Control system. deactivated, traction and stability en-
hancement offered by Vehicle Dynamics
NOTE Control system is unavailable. Therefore 7
. The indicator light may stay on for a you should not deactivate the Vehicle
while after the engine has been started, Dynamics Control system except under
especially in cold weather. This occurs above-mentioned situations.
because the engine has not yet
warmed up and is completely normal. NOTE
The light will turn off when the engine . When the switch has been pressed
has reached a suitable operating tem- to deactivate the Vehicle Dynamics
perature. Control system, the Vehicle Dynamics
. When an engine problem occurs Control system automatically reacti-
and the malfunction indicator lamp vates itself the next time the ignition
turns on, the indicator light will also Pressing the switch to deactivate the switch is turned to the OFF position
come on. Vehicle Dynamics Control system can and the engine is restarted.
facilitate the following operations: . If the switch is held down for 10
The following two situations could indicate seconds or longer, the indicator light
malfunction of the Vehicle Dynamics . a standing start on a steeply sloping
road with a snowy, gravel-covered, or goes off, the Vehicle Dynamics Control
Control system; if either should occur, system is activated, and the system
have an authorized SUBARU dealer carry otherwise slippery surface
ignores any further pressing of the
out an inspection of that system at the first . extrication of the vehicle when its
switch. To make the switch usable
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (232,1)
again, turn the ignition switch to the Tire pressure monitoring comes on while driving, never brake
OFF position and restart the engine. suddenly and keep driving straight
. When the switch is pressed to
system (TPMS) (if equipped)
ahead while gradually reducing
deactivate the Vehicle Dynamics Con- speed. Then slowly pull off the road
trol system, the vehicle’s running per- to a safe place. Otherwise an acci-
formance is comparable with that of a dent involving serious vehicle da-
vehicle that does not have a Vehicle mage and serious personal injury
Dynamics Control system. Do not de- could occur.
activate the Vehicle Dynamics Control Check the pressure for all four tires
system except when absolutely neces- and adjust the pressure to the COLD
sary. tire pressure shown on the tire
placard on the door pillar on the
driver’s side.
Even when the vehicle is driven a
very short distance, the tires get
warm and their pressures increase
The tire pressure monitoring system pro- accordingly. Be sure to let the tires
vides the driver with a warning message cool thoroughly before adjusting
by sending a signal from a sensor that is their pressures to the standard
installed in each wheel when tire pressure values shown on the tire placard.
is severely low. (Refer to the “Tires and wheels”
The tire pressure monitoring system will section in chapter 11.) The tire
activate only when the vehicle is driven at pressure monitoring system does
speeds above 20 mph (32 km/h). Also, not function when the vehicle is
this system may not react immediately to a stationary. After adjusting the tire
sudden drop in tire pressure (for example, pressures, increase the vehicle
a blow-out caused by running over a speed to at least 20 mph (32 km/h)
sharp object). to start the TPMS re-checking of the
tire inflation pressures. If the tire
WARNING pressures are now above the severe
low pressure threshold, the low tire
If the low tire pressure warning light pressure warning light should go off

Black plate (233,1)
a few minutes later. CAUTION Parking your vehicle

If this light still comes on while
driving after adjusting the tire pres- Do not place metal film or any metal
sure, a tire may have significant parts under the driver’s seat. This WARNING
damage and a fast leak that causes may cause poor reception of the
signals from the tire pressure sen- . Never leave unattended children
the tire to lose air rapidly. If you have
sors, and the tire pressure monitor- or pets in the vehicle. They could
a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire
ing system will not function prop- accidentally injure themselves or
as soon as possible.
erly. others through inadvertent op-
When a spare tire is mounted or a eration of the vehicle. Also, on
wheel rim is replaced without the hot or sunny days, the tempera-
original pressure sensor/transmitter NOTE ture in a closed vehicle could
being transferred, the low tire pres- This device complies with Part 15 of quickly become high enough to
sure warning light will illuminate the FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of cause severe or possibly fatal
steadily after blinking for approxi-
mately one minute. This indicates
Industry Canada. Operation is subject injuries to people. 7
to the following two conditions: (1) This . Do not park the vehicle over
the TPMS is unable to monitor all device may not cause harmful inter- flammable materials such as dry
four road wheels. Contact your ference, and (2) this device must grass, waste paper or rags, as
SUBARU dealer as soon as possible accept any interference received, in- they may burn easily if they come
for tire and sensor replacement and/ cluding interference that may cause near hot engine or exhaust sys-
or system resetting. undesired operation. tem parts.
Do not inject any tire liquid or Changes or modifications not ex- . Be sure to stop the engine if you
aerosol tire sealant into the tires, pressly approved by the party respon- take a nap in the vehicle. If
as this may cause a malfunction of sible for compliance could void the engine exhaust gas enters the
the tire pressure sensors. If the light user’s authority to operate the equip- passenger compartment, occu-
illuminates steadily after blinking for ment. pants in the vehicle could die
approximately one minute, promptly
from carbon monoxide (CO) con-
contact a SUBARU dealer to have
tained in the exhaust gas.
the system inspected.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (234,1)
CAUTION engine is running, the parking brake headed up the hill, the front wheels should
warning light comes on. After starting the be turned away from the curb.
Never drive while the parking brake vehicle, be sure that the warning light has
is set because this will cause un- gone out before the vehicle is driven.
necessary wear on the brake lin- Refer to the “Warning and indicator lights”
ings. Before starting to drive, always section (chapter 3).
make sure that the parking brake
has been fully released. & Parking tips
When parking your vehicle, always set the
parking brake firmly and put the shift lever
& Parking brake in the “1” (1st) for an upgrade or “R”
To set the parking brake, press the brake (Reverse) for a downgrade for manual
pedal firmly and hold it down while fully transmission vehicles, or in the “P” (Park)
pulling up the parking brake lever. position for automatic transmission vehi-
cles. Always set the parking brake firmly
when parking your vehicle. Never rely on When facing downhill, the front wheels
the transmission alone to hold the vehicle. should be turned into the curb.
To release the parking brake, pull the lever

up slightly, press the release button, then
lower the lever while keeping the button
pressed. When parking on a hill, always turn the
When the parking brake is set while the steering wheel. When the vehicle is

Black plate (235,1)
Hill holder (Manual transmis- is depressed while the brake pedal is also If the braking power of the Hill holder is
sion – if equipped) depressed, braking power is maintained
temporarily by the Hill holder when the
insufficient after the brake pedal is re-
leased, apply more braking power by
brake pedal is released. The driver is pressing the brake pedal again.
CAUTION therefore able to start the vehicle the
same way as on a level grade, just using
The Hill Holder is a device only for the clutch and accelerator pedal.
helping the driver to START the
vehicle on an uphill grade. To pre-
vent accidents when the vehicle is
parked on a slope, be sure to firmly
set the parking brake. When setting
the parking brake, make sure that
the vehicle remains stationary when
the clutch pedal is released. 7
The Hill holder is a device to make starting
on an uphill grade easier.
The Hill holder does not operate when the

vehicle is facing downhill. And the Hill
holder may not operate on slight grades.
When starting in reverse and using the Hill
holder, a braking effect may be felt even
after the brake pedal has been released.
However, this braking effect should dis-
appear once the clutch pedal is released.
A slight jolt may be felt when the vehicle
begins to move forward after being re-
On an uphill grade, when the clutch pedal versed.

Black plate (236,1)
Cruise control & To set cruise control vehicle reaches the desired speed.
WARNING
Do not use the cruise control under
any of the following conditions. This
may cause loss of vehicle control:
. driving up or down a steep grade
. driving on slippery or winding
roads
. driving in heavy traffic
Cruise control enables you to maintain a

constant vehicle speed without holding 1. Push the main switch button. 3. Push the control lever downward in the
your foot on the accelerator pedal and it is “SET/COAST” direction and release it.
operative when the vehicle speed is 25 Then release the accelerator pedal.
mph (40 km/h) or more. Make sure the
main switch is turned “OFF” when the
cruise control is not in use to avoid
unintentionally setting the cruise control.
NOTE
If you move the cruise control lever or
press the main switch button while
turning the ignition switch “ON”, the
cruise control function is deactivated
and the “CRUISE” indicator light
flashes. To reactivate the cruise control The “ ” indicator light on the combina-
function, turn the ignition switch back tion meter will come on.
to the “Acc” or “LOCK” position, and
then turn it again to the “ON” position. 2. Depress the accelerator pedal until the At this time, the “ ” indicator light is

Black plate (237,1)
illuminated in the combination meter. . Depress the clutch pedal (manual & To change the cruising speed
The vehicle will maintain the desired transmission vehicles only).
speed. . Shift the selector lever into the “N” ! To increase the speed (by control
position (automatic transmission vehicles lever)
Vehicle speed can be temporarily in- only).
creased while driving with the cruise
control activated. Simply depress the . Shift the shift lever into neutral (manual
accelerator pedal to accelerate the vehi- transmission vehicles only).
cle. When the accelerator pedal is re- The “ ” indicator light in the combination
leased, the vehicle will return to and meter goes off when the cruise control is
maintain the previous cruising speed. cancelled.
& To temporarily cancel the To resume the cruise control after it has
cruise control been temporarily canceled and with vehi-
cle speed of approximately 20 mph (32
There are five ways to cancel the cruise
km/h) or more, push the control lever
7
control temporarily:
upward in the “RES/ACC” direction to
return to the original cruising speed auto-
matically. Push the control lever upward in the “RES/
The “ ” indicator light in the combination ACC” direction and hold it until the vehicle
meter will automatically come on at this reaches the desired speed. Then, release
time. the control lever. The vehicle speed at that
moment will be memorized and treated as
the new set speed.
& To turn off the cruise control
There are two ways to turn off the cruise When the difference between the actual
control: vehicle speed and the set speed is less
. Push the main switch again. than 4 mph (6.8 km/h), the set speed can
be increased 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each time
. Turn the ignition switch to the “Acc” or
by pressing the control lever upward in the
“LOCK” position (but only when the
. Pull the control lever in the “CANCEL” “RES/ACC” direction quickly.
vehicle is completely stopped).
direction.
. Depress the brake pedal.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (238,1)
! To increase the speed (by accel- ! To decrease the speed (by control ! To decrease the speed (by brake
erator pedal) lever) pedal)
1. Depress the accelerator pedal to 1. Depress the brake pedal to release
accelerate the vehicle to the desired cruise control temporarily.
speed. 2. When the speed decreases to the
2. Push the control lever downward in the desired speed, press the control lever
“SET/COAST” direction once. Now the downward in the “SET/COAST” direction
desired speed is set and the vehicle will once. Now the desired speed is set and
keep running at that speed without de- the vehicle will keep running at that speed
pressing the accelerator pedal. without depressing the accelerator pedal.
NOTE
If the difference between the actual
vehicle speed when the control lever
is pushed downward and the speed last Push the control lever downward in the
time you set is less than 4 mph (6.8 “SET/COAST” direction and hold it until
km/h), the vehicle speed will be low- the vehicle reaches the desired speed.
ered by 1 mph (1.6 km/h). This occurs Then, release the control lever. The
because the cruise control system unit vehicle speed at that moment will be
regards this lever operation as that memorized and treated as the new set
intended to decrease the vehicle speed.
speed.
When the difference between the actual
vehicle speed and the set speed is less
than 4 mph (6.8 km/h), the set speed can
be lowered 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each time by
pressing the control lever downward in the
“SET/COAST” direction quickly.

Black plate (239,1)
Self-leveling rear suspension

(if equipped)
The self-leveling suspension adjusts the
vehicle body position automatically to
keep it level at all times irrespective of
the number of occupants and the amount
of cargo.
Owing to the self-leveling suspension, the

vehicle body is adjusted to the proper 7
position after several drive trips, even if
the rear of the vehicle is lowered by
loaded cargos or a coupled trailer.
If cargos are unloaded all at once, the
vehicle height may become higher than
the normal level. This is because that the
The self-leveling system is incorporated in hydraulic pressure in the self-leveling
the rear suspension shock absorber and suspension was increased for leveling
operates only when the vehicle is in the body when the cargos were loaded.
motion. In such a case, the vehicle height will
return to the original level after several
driving trips.
NOTE
If the rear axle is loaded excessively,
the vehicle body may not be adjusted
to the proper position.

Black plate (2,1)
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
Left Page
Black plate (15,1)
Driving tips
New vehicle break-in driving – the first Loading your vehicle......................................... 8-11
1,000 miles (1,600 km) ..................................... 8-2 Vehicle capacity weight...................................... 8-12
Fuel economy hints ............................................ 8-2 GVWR and GAWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
Engine exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide) ........... 8-2 and Gross Axle Weight Rating) ........................ 8-12
Catalytic converter .............................................. 8-3 Roof rail and crossbar (if equipped) ................... 8-13
Periodic inspections ........................................... 8-4 Trailer hitch (if equipped) .................................. 8-16
Connecting a trailer ........................................... 8-16
Driving in foreign countries ............................... 8-4
When you do not tow a trailer ............................ 8-17
Driving tips for AWD vehicles ............................ 8-5
Trailer towing ..................................................... 8-18
Off road driving ................................................... 8-6 Warranties and maintenance .............................. 8-18
Winter driving ...................................................... 8-7 Maximum load limits .......................................... 8-18
Operation during cold weather............................. 8-7 Trailer hitches.................................................... 8-21
Driving on snowy and icy roads .......................... 8-9 Connecting a trailer ........................................... 8-22
Corrosion protection .......................................... 8-10 Trailer towing tips .............................................. 8-23
Snow tires ......................................................... 8-10 Forester Sports 2.5XT front lip spoiler
Tire chains ......................................................... 8-10 (U.S. only)........................................................ 8-25
8
Rocking the vehicle............................................ 8-11

Black plate (242,1)
8-2 Driving tips
New vehicle break-in driving Fuel economy hints Engine exhaust gas (Carbon
– the first 1,000 miles (1,600 monoxide)
The following suggestions will help to save
km) your fuel.
The performance and long life of your . Select the proper gear position for the
WARNING
vehicle are dependent on how you handle speed and road conditions. . Never inhale engine exhaust gas.
and care for your vehicle while it is new. . Avoid sudden acceleration or decelera- Engine exhaust gas contains
Follow these instructions during the first tion. Always accelerate gently until you carbon monoxide, a colorless
1,000 miles (1,600 km): reach the desired speed. Then try to and odorless gas which is dan-
. Do not race the engine. And do not maintain that speed for as long as gerous, or even lethal, if inhaled.
allow engine speed to exceed 4,000 rpm possible.
except in an emergency. . Always properly maintain the en-
. Do not pump the accelerator and avoid gine exhaust system to prevent
. Do not drive at one constant engine or racing the engine. engine exhaust gas from enter-
vehicle speed for a long time, either fast or . Avoid unnecessary engine idling. ing the vehicle.
slow. . Keep the engine properly tuned.
. Avoid starting suddenly and rapid . Never run the engine in a closed
. Keep the tires inflated to the correct space, such as a garage, except
acceleration, except in an emergency. pressure shown on the tire placard, which for the brief time needed to drive
. Avoid hard braking, except in an is located under the door latch on the the vehicle in or out of it.
emergency. driver’s side. Low pressure will increase
. Avoid remaining in a parked
The same break-in procedures should be tire wear and fuel consumption.
vehicle for a lengthy time while
applied to an overhauled engine, newly . Use the air conditioner only when the engine is running. If that is
mounted engine or when brake pads or necessary. unavoidable, then use the venti-
brake linings are replaced with new ones. . Keep the front and rear wheels in lation fan to force fresh air into
proper alignment. the vehicle.
. Avoid carrying unnecessary cargo. . Always keep the front ventilator
inlet grille free from snow, leaves
or other obstructions to ensure
that the ventilation system al-
ways works properly.
. If at any time you suspect that

Black plate (243,1)
Driving tips 8-3
exhaust fumes are entering the Catalytic converter

vehicle, have the probl em
checked and corrected as soon
as possible. If you must drive WARNING
under these conditions, drive
only with all windows fully open. . Avoid fire hazards. Do not drive
or park the vehicle anywhere
. Keep the rear gate closed while
near flammable materials (e.g.
driving to prevent exhaust gas
grass, paper, rags or leaves),
from entering the vehicle.
because the catalytic converter
operates at very high tempera-
NOTE tures.
Due to the expansion and contraction . Keep everyone and flammable
of the metals used in the manufacture materials away from the exhaust Non-turbo model
of the exhaust system, you may hear a pipe while the engine is running. The catalytic converter is installed in the
crackling sound coming from the ex- The exhaust gas is very hot. exhaust system. It serves as catalyst to
haust system for a short time after the reduce HC, CO and NOx in exhaust 8
engine has been shut off. This sound is gases, thus providing cleaner exhaust.
normal.
To avoid damage to the catalytic conver-
ter:
. Use only unleaded fuel. Even a small
amount of leaded fuel will damage the
catalytic converter.
. Never start the engine by pushing or
pulling the vehicle.
. Avoid racing the engine.
. Never turn off the ignition switch while
the vehicle is moving.
. Keep your engine tuned-up. If you feel
Turbo model
the engine running rough (misfiring, back-
firing or incomplete combustion), have
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (244,1)
8-4 Driving tips
your vehicle checked and repaired by an Periodic inspections Driving in foreign countries
authorized SUBARU dealer.
. Do not apply undercoating or rust To keep your vehicle in the best condition When planning to use your vehicle in
prevention treatment to the heat shield of at all times, always have the recom- another country:
catalytic converter and the exhaust sys- mended maintenance services listed in . Confirm the availability of the correct
tem. the maintenance schedule in the “War- fuel. (Refer to the “Fuel requirements”
. Do not drive with an extremely low fuel ranty and Maintenance Booklet” per- section in chapter 7.)
level. formed at the specified time or mileage . Comply with all regulations and re-
intervals. quirements of each country.

Black plate (245,1)
Driving tips 8-5
Driving tips for AWD vehicles power to all four wheels. AWD vehicles your vehicle and may affect ride, handling,
provide better traction when driving on braking, speedometer/odometer calibra-
slippery, wet or snow-covered roads and tion, and clearance between the body
WARNING when moving out of mud, dirt and sand. and tires. It also may be dangerous and
By shifting power between the front and lead to loss of vehicle control.
. Always maintain a safe driving rear wheels, SUBARU AWD can also . Always check the cold tire pressure
speed according to the road and provide added traction during acceleration before starting to drive. The recom-
weather conditions in order to and added engine braking force during mended tire pressure is provided on the
avoid having an accident on a deceleration. tire placard, which is located under the
sharp turn, during sudden brak- door latch on the driver’s side.
ing or under other similar condi- Therefore, your SUBARU AWD vehicle
may handle differently than an ordinary . Tire chains should always be placed on
tions. the front wheels only.
two wheel drive vehicle and it contains
. Always use the utmost care in some features unique to AWD. For safety . There are some precautions that you
driving – overconfidence be- purposes as well as to avoid damaging must observe when towing your vehicle.
cause you are driving an All- the AWD system, you should keep the For detail information, see the “Towing”
Wheel Drive vehicle could easily following tips in mind: section in chapter 9.
lead to a serious accident. 8
. An AWD vehicle is better able to climb
steeper roads under snowy or slippery
conditions than a two wheel drive vehicle.
There is little difference in handling,
however, during extremely sharp turns or
sudden braking. Therefore, when driving
down a slope or turning corners, be sure
to reduce your speed and maintain an
ample distance from other vehicles.
. When replacing a tire, make sure you
use only the same size, construction,
brand, and load range as the original tires
listed on the tire placard. Using other sizes
or construction may result in severe
All-Wheel Drive distributes the engine mechanical damage to the drive train of

Black plate (246,1)
8-6 Driving tips
Off road driving wheel blocks, first aid kit and cell phone or or the exhaust pipe or water splashing
citizens band radio. onto electrical parts may damage your
. Drive carefully. Do not take unneces- vehicle and may cause it to stall. Never
WARNING sary risks by driving in dangerous areas or attempt to drive through rushing water;
over rough terrain. regardless of its depth, it can wash away
. Always maintain a safe driving . Slow down and employ extra caution at the ground from under your tires, resulting
speed according to the road and all times. When driving off-road, you will in possible loss of traction and even
weather conditions in order to not have the benefit of marked traffic vehicle rollover.
avoid having an accident on a lanes, banked curves, traffic signs and . Always check your brakes for effec-
sharp turn, during sudden brak- the like. tiveness immediately after driving in sand,
ing or under other similar condi- mud or water. Do this by driving slowly
tions. . Do not drive across steep slopes.
Instead, drive either straight up or straight and stepping on the brake pedal. Repeat
. Always use the utmost care in down the slopes. A vehicle can much that process several times to dry out the
driving - overconfidence because more easily tip over sideways than it can brake discs and brake pads.
you are driving an All-Wheel end over end. Avoid driving straight up or . Do not drive or park over or near
Drive vehicle could easily lead down slopes that are too steep. flammable materials such as dry grass or
to a serious accident. . Avoid sharp turning maneuvers, espe- fallen leaves, as they may burn easily. The
cially at higher speeds. exhaust system is very hot while the
Because of the AWD feature and higher engine is running and right after the
ground clearance, your SUBARU can be . Do not grip the inside or spokes of the
steering wheel. A bad bump could jerk the engine stops. This could create a fire
driven on ordinary roads or off-road. But hazard.
please keep in mind that an AWD wheel and injure your hands. Instead drive
with your fingers and thumbs on the . After driving through tall grass, mud,
SUBARU is a passenger car and is rocks, sand, rivers, etc., check that there
neither a conventional off-road vehicle outside of the rim.
. If driving through water, such as when is no grass, bush, paper, rags, stones,
nor an all-terrain vehicle. If you do take sand, etc. adhering to or trapped on the
your SUBARU off-road, certain common crossing shallow streams, first check the
depth of the water and the bottom of the underbody. Clear off any such matter from
sense precautions such as the following the underbody. If the vehicle is used with
should be taken: stream bed for firmness and ensure that
the bed of the stream is flat. Drive slowly these materials trapped or adhering to the
. Make certain that you and all of your and completely through the stream. The underbody, a mechanical breakdown or
passengers are wearing seatbelts. water should be shallow enough that it fire could occur.
. Carry some emergency equipment, does not reach the vehicle’s undercar- . Secure all cargo carried inside the
such as a towing rope or chain, a shovel, riage. Water entering the engine air intake vehicle and make certain that it is not

Black plate (247,1)
Driving tips 8-7
piled higher than the seatbacks. During such as those listed above is not eligible Winter driving
sudden stops or jolts, unsecured cargo for warranty coverage.
could be thrown around in the vehicle and . Wash the vehicle’s underbody after off-
cause injury. Do not pile heavy loads on road driving. Suspension components are
the roof. Those loads raise the vehicle’s particularly prone to dirt buildup, so they
center of gravity and make it more prone need to be washed thoroughly.
to tip over.
. If you must rock the vehicle to free it
from sand or mud, depress the accelerator
pedal slightly and move the selector lever
back and forth between “D” and “R”
repeatedly. Do not race the engine. For
the best possible traction, avoid spinning
the wheels when trying to free the vehicle.
When the road surface is extremely
slippery, you can obtain better traction by & Operation during cold
starting the vehicle with the transmission weather 8
in 2nd than 1st (both for MT and AT).
. Never equip your vehicle with tires Carry some emergency equipment, such
larger than those specified in this manual. as tire chains, a window scraper, a bag of
sand, flares, a small shovel, and jumper
. Frequent driving of an AWD vehicle cables.
under hard-driving conditions such as
rough roads or off roads will necessitate Check the battery and cables. Cold
more frequent replacement of engine oil, temperatures reduce battery capacity.
brake fluid and transmission oil than that The battery must be in good condition to
specified in the maintenance schedule provide enough power for cold winter
described in the “Warranty and Mainte- starts.
nance Booklet”.
Use an engine oil of proper grade and
Remember that damage done to your viscosity for cold weather. Heavy summer
SUBARU while operating it off-road and oil will cause harder starting.
not using common sense precautions
Keep the door locks from freezing by
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (248,1)
8-8 Driving tips
squirting them with deicer or glycerin. used previously, purge the old fluid from winter driving, stop when and where it is
the piping between the reservoir tank and safe to do so and check under the fenders
Forcing a frozen door open may damage washer nozzles by operating the washer periodically.
or separate the rubber weather strips for a certain period of time. Otherwise, if
around the door. If the door is frozen, ! Parking in cold weather
the concentration of the fluid remaining in
use hot water to melt the ice, and after- the piping is too low for the outside
wards thoroughly wipe the water away. WARNING
temperature, it may freeze and block the
Use a windshield washer fluid that con- nozzles. Snow can trap dangerous exhaust
tains an antifreeze solution. Do not use gases under your vehicle. Keep
engine antifreeze or other substitutes CAUTION snow clear of the exhaust pipe and
because they may damage the paint of from around your vehicle if you park
Adjust the washer fluid concentra-
the vehicle. the vehicle in snow with the engine
tion appropriately for the outside
SUBARU Windshield Washer Fluid con- temperature. If the concentration is running.
tains 58.5% methyl alcohol and 41.5% inappropriate, sprayed washer fluid
surfactant, by volume. Its freezing tem- may freeze on the windshield and Do not use the parking brake when
perature varies according to how much it obstruct your view, and the fluid parking for long periods in cold weather
is diluted, as indicated in the following may freeze in the reservoir tank. since it could freeze in that position.
table. Instead, observe the following.
1. Place the shift lever in “1” or “R” for
Washer Fluid Con- ! Before driving your vehicle manual transmission vehicles, and in “P”
centration Freezing Temperature
Before entering the vehicle, remove any for automatic transmission vehicles.
30% 10.48F (−128C) snow or ice from your shoes because that 2. Use tire stops under the tires to
could make the pedals slippery and prevent the vehicle from moving.
50% −48F (−208C)
dangerous.
100% −498F (−458C) When the vehicle is parked in snow or
While warming up the vehicle before when it snows, raise the wiper blades off
In order to prevent freezing of washer driving, check that the accelerator pedal, the glass to prevent damage to them.
fluid, check the freezing temperatures in brake pedal, and all other controls operate
the table above when adjusting the fluid smoothly. When the vehicle has been left parked
concentration to the outside temperature. after use on roads heavily covered with
Clear away ice and snow that has snow, or has been left parked during a
If you fill the reservoir tank with a fluid with accumulated under the fenders to avoid snowstorm, icing may develop on the
a different concentration from the one making steering difficult. During severe brake system, which could cause poor

Black plate (249,1)
Driving tips 8-9
braking action. Check for snow or ice CAUTION ! Wiper operation when snowing
buildup on the suspension, disc brakes Before driving in cold weather, make sure
and brake hoses underneath the vehicle. Avoid prolonged continuous driving the wiper blades are not frozen to the
If there is caked snow or ice, remove it, in snowstorms. Snow will enter the windshield or rear window. If the wiper
being careful not to damage the disc engine’s intake system and may blades are frozen to the windshield or rear
brakes and brake hoses and ABS har- hinder the air flow, which could window, use the defroster with the airflow
ness. result in engine shutdown or even control button/dial in the “ ” position and
! Refueling in cold weather breakdown. the temperature control dial set for max-
To help prevent moisture from forming in imum warmth until the wiper blades are
To prevent skidding and slipping, avoid completely thawed out. If your vehicle is
the fuel system and the risk of its freezing, sudden braking, abrupt acceleration, high-
use of an antifreeze additive in the fuel equipped with a wiper deicer, it is helpful
speed driving, and sharp turning when to thaw the windshield wiper blades. To
tank is recommended during cold weather. driving on snowy or icy roads. thaw out the rear wiper blade, use the rear
Use only additives that are specifically Always maintain ample distance between window defogger.
designed for this purpose. When an your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you
antifreeze additive is used, its effect lasts to avoid the need for sudden braking. When driving in snow, if frozen snow starts
longer if the tank is refilled whenever the to stick on the surface of the windshield
fuel level reaches half empty.
To supplement the foot brake, use the
despite wiper operation, use the defroster
8
engine brake effectively to control the
with the airflow control button/dial in “ ”
If your SUBARU is not going to be used vehicle speed. (Shift into a lower gear
and the temperature control dial set for
for an extended period, it is best to have when necessary.)
maximum warmth. After the windshield
the fuel tank filled to capacity. Avoid shifting down abruptly. Such beha- gets warmed enough to melt the frozen
& Driving on snowy and icy vior can cause the wheels to lock, possibly snow on it, wash it away using the
leading to loss of vehicle control. windshield washer.
roads
An anti-lock brake system (ABS) en- Snow stuck on the wiper arm prevents the
WARNING hances your vehicle’s braking perfor- wiper from working effectively. If snow is
mance on snowy and icy roads. Refer to stuck on the wiper arm, pull off the road to
Do not use the cruise control on the “ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)” sec- a safe place, then remove it. If you stop
slippery roads such as snowy or icy tion in chapter 7 for information on braking the vehicle at road side, use the hazard
roads. This may cause loss of on slippery surfaces. warning flasher to alert other drivers.
vehicle control.
We recommend use of non-freezing type
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (250,1)
8-10 Driving tips
wiper blades (winter blades) during the construction and load range as may be possible to enhance performance
seasons you could have snow and sub- the original tires listed on the tire through use of tires designed specifically
zero temperatures. Blades of this type placard. Using other sizes and for winter driving conditions.
give superior wiping performance in construction may affect speed- When you choose to install winter tires on
snowy conditions. Be sure to use blades ometer/odometer calibration and your vehicle, be sure to use the correct tire
that are suitable for your vehicle. clearance between the body and size and type. You must install four winter
tires. It also may be dangerous tires that are of the same size, construc-
CAUTION and lead to loss of vehicle con- tion, brand and load range and you should
trol. never mix radial, belted bias or bias tires
During high-speed driving, non-
. You must install four winter tires since this may result in dangerous hand-
freezing type wiper blades may not
that are of the same size, con- ling characteristics. When you choose a
perform as well as standard wiper
struction, brand, and load range. tire, make sure that there is enough
blades. If this happens, reduce the
Mixing other sizes or construc- clearance between the tire and vehicle
vehicle speed.
tions may result in severe me- body.
chanical damage to the drive Remember to drive with care at all times
NOTE train of your vehicle and may regardless of the type of tires on your
When the season requiring non-freez- affect ride, handling, braking and vehicle.
ing type wiper blades is over, replace speedometer/odometer calibra-
them with standard wiper blades. tion. It also may be dangerous & Tire chains
and lead to loss of vehicle con-
trol. Driving on snowy grades or icy roads may
& Corrosion protection require the use of tire chains, in which
. Do not use a combination of
Refer to the “Corrosion protection” section case put the chains on the front wheels
radial, belted bias or bias tires
(chapter 10). only. Use only SAE class S type chains
since it may cause dangerous
that are of the correct size for your tires so
handling characteristics and lead
& Snow tires to an accident.
as not to damage the vehicle body or
suspension.
WARNING Your vehicle is equipped with “all season When driving with tire chains, drive at
tires” as original equipment, which are speeds below 19 mph (30 km/h).
. When replacing original tires with designed to provide an adequate measure Always use the utmost care when driving
winter (snow) tires, make sure of traction, handling and braking perfor- with tire chains – overconfidence because
you use only the same size, mance in year-round driving. In winter, it you are driving with tire chains could

Black plate (251,1)
Driving tips 8-11
easily lead to a serious accident. Loading your vehicle WARNING

& Rocking the vehicle . When you carry something inside
If you must rock the vehicle to free it from WARNING the vehicle, secure it whenever
snow, sand, or mud, depress the accel- you can to prevent it from being
. Never allow passengers to ride
erator pedal slightly and move the selector thrown around inside the vehicle
on a folded rear seatback or in
lever back and forth between “D” and “R” the cargo area. Doing so may
during sudden stops, sharp turns
repeatedly. Do not race the engine. For or in an accident.
result in serious injury.
the best possible traction, avoid spinning . Do not pile heavy loads on the
the wheels when trying to free the vehicle. . Never stack luggage or other
roof. These loads raise the vehi-
cargo higher than the top of the
When the road surface is extremely cle’s center of gravity and make it
seatback because it could tumble
slippery, you can obtain better traction by more prone to tip over.
forward and injure passengers in
starting the vehicle with the transmission the event of a sudden stop or . Secure lengthy items properly to
in 2nd than 1st (both for MT and AT). accident. Keep luggage or cargo prevent them from shooting for-
low, as close to the floor as ward and causing serious injury
Refer to the “Automatic transmission” during a sudden stop.
section in chapter 7 for information on possible. 8
holding the transmission in 2nd position. . Never exceed the maximum load
limit. If you do, some parts on
your vehicle can break, or it can
change the way your vehicle
handles. This could result in loss
of control and cause personal
injury. Also, overloading can
shorten the life of your vehicle.
. Do not place anything on the
extended cargo area cover. Such
items could tumble forward in the
event of a sudden stop or a
collision. This could cause ser-
ious injury.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (252,1)
8-12 Driving tips
CAUTION & Vehicle capacity weight side door pillar. It includes the total weight
of the driver and all passengers and their
Do not carry spray cans, containers belongings, any optional equipment such
with flammable or corrosive liquids as a trailer hitch, roof rack or bike carrier,
or any other dangerous items inside etc., and the tongue load of a trailer.
the vehicle.
& GVWR and GAWR (Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating and
NOTE Gross Axle Weight Rating)
For better fuel economy, do not carry
unneeded cargo.
The certification label attached to the

driver’s side door jamb shows GVWR
(Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) and GAWR
(Gross Axle Weight Rating).
The GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) must
The load capacity of your vehicle is never exceed the GVWR. GVW is the
determined by weight, not by available combined total of weight of the vehicle,
cargo space. The maximum load you can fuel, driver, all passengers, luggage, any
carry in your vehicle is shown on the optional equipment and trailer tongue
vehicle placard attached to the driver’s load. Therefore, the GVW changes de-

Black plate (253,1)
Driving tips 8-13
pending on the situation. The GVWR & Roof rail and crossbar (if attachment, never exceed the maximum
equals Curb Weight (actual weight of your equipped) load limit explained in the following. You
vehicle – including standard equipment, should also be careful that your vehicle
fluids, emergency tools and spare tire CAUTION does not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight
assembly) plus the vehicle capacity Rating (GVWR) and front and rear Gross
weight. . For cargo carrying purposes, the Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). See the
In addition, the total weight applied to roof rail must be used together “Loading your vehicle” section in this
each axle (GAW) must never exceed the with a roof crossbar kit and the chapter for information on loading cargo
GAWR. The front and rear GAWs can be appropriate carrying attachment. into or onto your vehicle. The maximum
adjusted by relocating luggage inside the The roof rail must never be used load limit of the cargo, crossbars and
vehicle. alone to carry cargo. Otherwise, carrying attachment must not exceed 150
Even if the total weight of your luggage is damage to the roof or paint or a lbs (68 kg). Place the heaviest load at the
lower than the vehicle capacity weight, dangerous road hazard due to bottom, nearest the roof, and evenly
either front or rear GAW may exceed the loss of cargo could result. distribute the cargo. Always properly
GAWR, depending on the distribution of . When using the roof crossbar kit, secure all cargo.
the luggage. make sure that the total weight of ! Installing carrying attachments on
When possible, the load should be evenly the crossbars, carrying attach- the crossbars 8
distributed throughout the vehicle. ment and cargo does not exceed When installing any carrying attachment
If you carry heavy loads in the vehicle, you the maximum load limit. Over- such as a bike carrier, ski carrier, kayak
should confirm that GVW and front and loading may cause damage to carrier, cargo basket, etc. on the cross-
rear GAWs are within the GVWR and the vehicle and create a safety bars, follow the manufacturer’s instruc-
GAWR by putting your vehicle on a hazard. tions and make sure that the attachment is
vehicle scale, found at a commercial securely fixed to the crossbars. Use only
weighing station. The roof rail is not designed to carry cargo attachments designed specifically for the
by itself. Cargo can be carried after crossbars. A set of crossbars is designed
Do not use replacement tires with a lower securing the roof crossbar kit to the roof
load range than the originals because they to carry loads (cargo and attachment) of
rail and installing the appropriate carrying not more than 150 lbs (68 kg). Before
may lower the GVWR and GAWR limita- attachment. When installing the roof
tions. Replacement tires with a higher load operating the vehicle, make sure that the
crossbar kit, follow the manufacturer’s cargo is properly secured on the attach-
range than the originals do not increase instructions.
the GVWR and GAWR limitations. ment.
When you carry cargo on the roof using
the roof crossbar kit and a carrying
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (254,1)
8-14 Driving tips
NOTE end support.

Remember that the vehicle’s center of 2. Move the end support and inner clamp
gravity is altered with the weight of the to unhook each side of the crossbar from
load on the roof, thus affecting the the roof rail.
driving characteristics.
Drive carefully. Avoid rapid starts, hard
cornering and abrupt stops. Crosswind
effects will be increased.
! Removal and installation of the
crossbars
The crossbars can be removed when you
do not use the roof to carry cargo.
1) Crossbar end support
! To remove the crossbar 2) T-30 torx® head screw
1. Before placing the crossbar on the roof

rails, make sure that the T-30 torx® head
3. Carefully raise the crossbar from roof screw is fully loosened from each end
rails. support.
2. Spread the inner clamp and the end
NOTE support as far apart as possible.
It may be necessary to move the Front
crossbar rearward, near the center of
the roof rail for easier removal. Use
care not to cross-thread the screw in
the insert if it has been removed.
1) Crossbar end support ! To install the crossbar

2) T-30 torx® head screw Front crossbar:
Front crossbar has 150 lbs. Load Label on
1. Loosen and remove the T-30 torx®
right-hand side.
head screw from the top of each crossbar

Black plate (255,1)
Driving tips 8-15

NOTE Install the rear crossbar in the same
It may be necessary to start the inner manner as the front crossbar.
clamp and end support at the center of
the roof rail for easier installation, then NOTE
move the crossbar forward. Use care The rear crossbar should be positioned
not to cross-thread the screw in the 6 inches (150 mm) forward of the rear
insert if it has been removed. radius in the roof rail.
5. Adjust the alignment of the crossbar
on the roof rails, and if available, use a T- CAUTION
30 torx® bit and torque wrench and tighten Do not carry cargo on the roof when
the T-30 torx® head screws to 30 to 35 the crossbars are removed. Lug-
lbf·in (3.4 to 4.0 N·m, 0.35 to 0.41 kgf·m) of gage on the roof will be thrown
1) Load label torque (or tighten securely with the torx® forward or backward in sudden
2) Direction arrow label wrench provided). stops or rapid accelerations, result-
3) 6 in (150 mm) Rear crossbar: ing in a dangerous road hazard.
3. With the front direction arrow label on 8
the top right side of the crossbar pointing NOTE
toward the front of the vehicle, carefully Before each use of the roof crossbar,
place the crossbar across the top of the make sure the four T-30 crossbar
vehicle so that the crossbar end supports clamp screws have been checked,
rest on the top of the roof rails approxi- and retightened if necessary to 30 to
mately 6 inches (150 mm) rearward in the 35 lbf·in (3.4 to 4.0 N·m, 0.35 to 0.41
front radius of the roof rail. kgf·m), as outlined in Step #5 above.
4. Move the end support and inner clamp
to hook under the end of the roof rail on
both sides and loosely assemble the T-30
torx® head screw with the tool provided
into the threaded insert in the inner clamp
on each end of the crossbar. 1) T-30 torx® head screw
2) Front arrow label
3) 6 in (150 mm)

Black plate (256,1)
8-16 Driving tips
Trailer hitch (if equipped) traffic safety hazard.

. Use only the ball mount supplied
with this hitch. Use the hitch only
WARNING as a weight carrying hitch. Do not
use with any type of weight
. Never exceed the maximum
distributing hitch.
weight specified for the trailer
hitch. Exceeding the maximum
When you tow a trailer, follow the instruc-
weight could cause an accident
tions in the next section “Trailer towing”.
resulting in serious personal in-
juries. Permissible trailer weight
changes depending on the situa- & Connecting a trailer
tion. Refer to the next section 1. Remove the receiver cover from the
“Trailer towing” for possible re- hitch receiver tube. Then insert the ball 3. Insert the safety pin securely into the
commendations and limitations. mount into the hitch receiver tube. hitch pin.
. Trailer brakes are required when 4. Pull the ball mount to make sure it
the towing load exceeds 1,000 does not come off the hitch receiver.
lbs (453 kg). Be sure your trailer
has safety chains and that each
chain will hold the trailer’s max-
imum gross weight. Towing trai-
lers without safety chains could
create a traffic safety hazard if
the trailer separates from the
hitch due to coupling damage or
hitch ball damage.
. Be sure to check the hitch pin
and safety pin for positive lock-
ing placement before towing a 2. Insert the hitch pin into the hole on the
trailer. If the ball mount comes off hitch receiver tube so that the pin passes
the hitch receiver, the trailer through the ball mount.
could get loose and create a

Black plate (257,1)
Driving tips 8-17
WARNING watercraft.
Do not connect safety chains to part & When you do not tow a trailer
of the vehicle other than the safety . Remove the ball mount from the hitch
chain hooks. receiver tube and insert the receiver cover
onto the hitch receiver tube.
. Place the dust cap over the four-pin
connector of the hitch wire harness to
protect against possible damage.
. Occasionally lubricate terminals of the
four-pin connector using terminal grease.
1) Hitch ball installation point

2) Hooks for safety chains
5. Use only a hitch ball that is appropriate

for the ball mount and your trailer. The 8
hitch ball must be securely installed on the
ball mount.
Hitch harness connector
6. Connect your trailer to the hitch ball.
7. Connect the trailer and the hitch with 8. Connect the hitch wire harness’s black
safety chains that will hold the trailer’s four-pin wire connector to the towing
maximum gross weight. The chains trailer’s wire harness
should cross under the trailer tongue to 9. Confirm proper function of the hitch
prevent the tongue from dropping onto the wire harness by individually activating the
ground in case it should disconnect from brake, right turn signal, left turn signal,
the hitch ball. Allow sufficient slack in the stop, and parking lights on the trailer.
chains taking tight-turn situations into
account; however, be careful not to let NOTE
them drag on the ground. Always disconnect the trailer wire har-
ness before launching or retrieving a

Black plate (258,1)
8-18 Driving tips
Trailer towing (Refer to “Maintenance schedule under ble.

severe driving conditions” in the “Warranty
Your vehicle is designed and intended to and Maintenance Booklet”.) ! Total trailer weight
be used primarily as a passenger-carrying Under no circumstances should a trailer
vehicle. Towing a trailer puts additional be towed with a new vehicle or a vehicle
loads on your vehicle’s engine, drivetrain, with any new powertrain component (en-
brakes, tires and suspension and has an gine, transmission, differential, wheel
adverse effect on fuel economy. bearings, etc.) for the first 1,000 miles
If you do decide to tow a trailer, your safety (1,600 km) of driving.
and satisfaction depend upon proper use
of correct equipment and cautious opera- & Maximum load limits
tion of your vehicle. Seek the advice of
your SUBARU dealer to assist you in WARNING
purchasing a hitch and other necessary
towing equipment appropriate for your Never exceed the maximum load
vehicle. In addition, be sure to follow the limits explained in the following.
instructions on correct installation and use Exceeding the maximum load limits
Total trailer weight
provided by the trailer and other towing could cause personal injury and/or
equipment manufacturers. vehicle damage. The total trailer weight (trailer weight plus
SUBARU assumes no responsibility for its cargo load) must never exceed the
injuries or vehicle damage that result from maximum weight shown in the following
trailer towing equipment, or from any CAUTION table.
errors or omissions in the instructions . Adequate size trailer brakes are
accompanying such equipment or for your required when the trailer and its
failure to follow the proper instructions. cargo exceed 1,000 lbs (453 kg)
total weight.
& Warranties and maintenance
. Before towing a trailer, check the
SUBARU warranties do not apply to trailer total weight, GVW, GAWs
vehicle damage or malfunction caused and tongue load. Make sure the
by trailer towing. If you use your vehicle to load and its distribution in your
tow a trailer, more frequent maintenance vehicle and trailer are accepta-
will be required due to the additional load.

Black plate (259,1)
Driving tips 8-19
Model Conditions Maximum

! Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) and
total trailer Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
weight (GVWR)
MT models When towing a 1,000 lbs
trailer without (453 kg)
brakes.
When towing a 2,400 lbs
trailer with brakes. (1,087 kg)
AT models When towing a 1,000 lbs
trailer without (453 kg)
brakes.
When towing a 2,400 lbs
trailer with brakes. (1,087 kg)
1,000 lbs Certification label
When towing a
trailer on a long (453 kg) GVWR is shown on the certification label
uphill grade con- located on the driver’s side door jamb.
tinuously for over
5 miles (8 km) with Gross Vehicle Weight 8
an outside tem-
perature of 1048F The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) must
(408C) or above. never exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating (GVWR).
Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) is the
combined total of the weight of the vehicle,
driver, passengers, luggage, trailer hitch,
trailer tongue load and any other optional
equipment installed on your vehicle.
Therefore, the GVW changes depending
on the situation. Determine the GVW each
time before going on a trip by putting your
vehicle and trailer on a vehicle scale.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (260,1)
8-20 Driving tips
! Tongue load
! Gross Axle Weight (GAW) and
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
1) Jack
Tongue load 2) Bathroom scale
Gross Axle Weight Ensure that the trailer tongue load is from The tongue load can be weighed with a
8 to 11 percent of the total trailer weight bathroom scale as shown in the illustration
The total weight applied to each axle
and does not exceed the maximum value above. When weighing the tongue load,
(GAW) must never exceed the Gross Axle
of 200 lbs (90 kg). be sure to position the towing coupler at
Weight Rating (GAWR). The front and rear
GAWs can be adjusted by relocating the height at which it would be during
passengers and luggage inside the vehi- actual towing, using a jack as shown.
cle. The front and rear GAWR are also
shown on the certification label.
To check both GVWR and GAWR and to
confirm that the total weight and weight
distribution are within safe driving limits,
you should have your vehicle and trailer
weighed at a commercial weighing station.
Be sure that all cargo is firmly secured to
prevent a change in weight distribution
while driving.

Black plate (261,1)
Driving tips 8-21
the rear axle of the towing vehicle. hitch or other trailer towing
This may cause the rear wheels to equipment.
skid, especially during braking or . Do not use axle-mounted hitches
when vehicle speed is reduced dur- as they can cause damage to the
ing cornering, resulting in over- axle housing, wheel bearings,
steer, spin out and/or jackknifing. wheels or tires.
Choose a proper hitch for your vehicle and

& Trailer hitches trailer.
The use of a genuine SUBARU trailer
WARNING hitch is recommended. A genuine
SUBARU hitch is available from your
Never drill the frame or under-body SUBARU dealer.
F: Front of vehicle of your vehicle to install a commer-
cial trailer hitch. If you do, danger- If use of a non-genuine hitch is unavoid-
The tongue load can be adjusted by able, be sure the hitch is suited to your
proper distribution of the load in the trailer. ous exhaust gas, water or mud may
vehicle and trailer. Consult with a profes-
Never load the trailer with more weight in enter the passenger compartment
sional hitch supplier to assist you in 8
the back than in the front; approximately through the drilled hole. Exhaust
gas contains carbon monoxide, a choosing an appropriate hitch for your
60 percent of the trailer load should be in vehicle. Be sure to follow all of the hitch
the front and approximately 40 percent in colorless and odorless gas which is
dangerous, or even lethal, if inhaled. manufacturer’s instructions for installation
the rear. Also, distribute the load as evenly and use.
as possible on both the left and right Also, drilling the frame or under-
body of your vehicle could cause Never use a hitch that mounts only to the
sides. rear bumper. The bumper is not designed
deterioration of strength of your
Be sure that all cargo is firmly secured to vehicle and cause corrosion around to handle that type of load.
prevent a change in weight distribution the drilled hole. For all types of hitches, regularly check
while driving. that the hitch mounting bolts and nuts are
tight.
WARNING CAUTION
If the trailer is loaded with more . Do not modify the vehicle ex-
weight in the back of trailer’s axle haust system, brake system, or
than in the front, the load is taken off other systems when installing a
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (262,1)
8-22 Driving tips
! Trailer safety chains

& Connecting a trailer ! Side mirrors
! Trailer brakes WARNING
WARNING Always use safety chains between

your vehicle and the trailer. Towing a
. Adequate size trailer brakes are trailer without safety chains could
required when the trailer and its create a traffic safety hazard if the
cargo exceed 1,000 lbs (453 kg) trailer separates from the hitch due
total weight. to coupling damage or hitch ball
damage.
. Do not directly connect your
trailer’s hydraulic brake system
In case the trailer hitch connector or hitch
to the hydraulic brake system in
ball should break or become discon-
your vehicle. Direct connection
nected, the trailer could get loose and
would cause the vehicle’s brake
create a traffic safety hazard. After hitching a trailer to your vehicle,
performance to deteriorate and
could lead to an accident. For safety, always connect the towing check that the standard side mirrors
vehicle and trailer with trailer safety provide a good rearward field of view
If your trailer’s total weight (trailer weight chains. Pass the chains crossing each without significant blind spots. If significant
plus its cargo weight) exceeds 1,000 lbs other under the trailer tongue to prevent blind spots occur with the vehicle’s stan-
(453 kg), the trailer is required to be the trailer from dropping onto the ground dard side mirrors, use towing mirrors that
equipped with its own brake system. in case the trailer tongue should discon- conform with Federal, state/province and/
Electric brakes or surge brakes are nect from the hitch ball. Allow sufficient or other applicable regulations.
recommended, and must be installed slack in the chains taking tight-turn situa- ! Trailer lights
properly. Check that your trailer’s brakes tions into account; however, be careful not
conform with Federal, state/province and/ to let them drag on the ground.
CAUTION
or other applicable regulations. Your For more information about the safety
SUBARU’s brake system is not designed chain connection, refer to the instructions Direct splicing or other improper
to be tapped into the trailer’s hydraulic for your hitch and trailer. connection of trailer lights may
brake system. Please ask your SUBARU damage your vehicle’s electrical
dealer and professional trailer supplier for system and cause a malfunction of
more information about the trailer’s brake your vehicle’s lighting system.
system.

Black plate (263,1)
Driving tips 8-23
Connection of trailer lights to your vehi- Trailer tire condition, size, load rating and ! Before starting out on a trip
cle’s electrical system requires modifica- proper inflation pressure should be in . Check that the vehicle and vehicle-to-
tions to the vehicle’s lighting circuit to accordance with the trailer manufacturer’s hitch mounting are in good condition. If
increase its capacity and accommodate specifications. any problems are apparent, do not tow the
wiring changes. To ensure the trailer lights trailer.
are connected properly, please consult In the event your vehicle gets a flat tire
when towing a trailer, ask a commercial . Check that the vehicle sits horizontally
your SUBARU dealer. Check for proper
road service to repair the flat tire. with the trailer attached. If the vehicle is
operation of the turn signals, the brake
tipped sharply up at the front and down at
lights and parking lights each time you If you carry a regular size spare tire in your the rear, check the total trailer weight,
hitch up. vehicle or trailer as a precaution against GVW, GAWs and tongue load again, then
! Tires getting a flat tire, be sure that the spare confirm that the load and its distribution
tire is firmly secured. are acceptable.
WARNING . Check that the tire pressures are
& Trailer towing tips correct.
Never tow a trailer when the tem-
porary spare tire is used. The tem- . Check that the vehicle and trailer are
WARNING connected properly. Confirm that
porary spare tire is not designed to
– the trailer tongue is connected 8
sustain the towing load. Use of the . Never exceed 45 mph (72 km/h)
temporary spare tire when towing when towing a trailer in hilly properly to the hitch ball.
can result in failure of the spare tire country on hot days. – the trailer lights connector is con-
and/or less stability of the vehicle. nected properly and trailer’s brake
. When towing a trailer, steering,
lights illuminate when the vehicle’s
stability, stopping distance and
Make sure that all the tires on your vehicle brake pedal is pressed, and that the
braking performance will be dif-
are properly inflated. trailer’s turn signal lights flash when
ferent from normal operation. For
the vehicle’s turn signal lever is oper-
The recommended cold tire pressure safety’s sake, you should employ
ated.
under trailer towing conditions is shown extra caution when towing a
trailer and you should never – the safety chains are connected
in chapter 12, “Specifications” and in properly.
“GAS STATION REFERENCE” at the speed. You should also keep the
following tips in mind: – all cargo in the trailer is secured
end of this manual. Adjust the rear tire safety in position.
pressure to the recommended pressure – the side mirrors provide a good
when the tires are cold. Normal pressure rearward field of view without a sig-
should be maintained in the front tires.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (264,1)
8-24 Driving tips
nificant blind spot. immediately but gradually. ! Driving on grades

. Sufficient time should be taken to learn . When passing other vehicles, consid- . Before going down a steep hill, slow
the “feel” of the vehicle/trailer combination erable distance is required because of the down and shift into lower gear (if neces-
before starting out on a trip. In an area free added weight and length caused by sary, use 1st gear) in order to utilize the
of traffic, practice turning, stopping and attaching the trailer to your vehicle. engine braking effect and prevent over-
backing up. heating of your vehicle’s brakes. Do not
make sudden downshifts.
! Driving with a trailer
. When driving uphill in hot weather, the
. You should allow for considerably more air conditioner may turn off automatically
stopping distance when towing a trailer. to protect the engine from overheating.
Avoid sudden braking because it may
. When driving uphill in hot weather, pay
result in skidding or jackknifing and loss of
attention to the water temperature gauge
control.
pointer (for all vehicles) and AT OIL TEMP
. Avoid abrupt starts and sudden accel- warning light (for AT vehicles) since the
erations. If your vehicle has a manual engine and transmission are relatively
transmission, always start out in first gear prone to overheating under these condi-
and release the clutch at moderate engine tions. If the water temperature gauge
revolution. pointer approaches the OVERHEAT zone
. Avoid uneven steering, sharp turns and 1) Left turn or the AT OIL TEMP warning light illumi-
rapid lane changes. 2) Right turn nates, immediately switch off the air
. Slow down before turning. Make a conditioner and stop the vehicle at the
. Backing up with a trailer is difficult and
longer than normal turning radius because nearest safe place. Refer to the “Engine
the trailer wheels will be closer than the takes practice. When backing up with a
overheating” section in chapter 9, and
trailer, never accelerate or steer rapidly.
vehicle wheels to the inside of the turn. In “Warning and indicator lights” section in
a tight turn, the trailer could hit your When turning back, grip the bottom of the
chapter 3.
steering wheel with one hand and turn it to
vehicle.
the left for a left turn, and turn it to the right . If your vehicle has an automatic trans-
. Crosswinds will adversely affect the for a right turn. mission, avoid using the accelerator pedal
handling of your vehicle and trailer, caus- to stay stationary on an uphill slope
ing sway. Crosswinds can be due to . If the ABS warning light illuminates
instead of using the parking brake or foot
weather conditions or the passing of large while the vehicle is in motion, stop towing
brake. That may cause the transmission
trucks or buses. If swaying occurs, firmly the trailer and have repairs performed
fluid to overheat.
immediately by the nearest SUBARU
grip the steering wheel and slow down
dealer. . If your vehicle has an automatic trans-

Black plate (265,1)
Driving tips 8-25
mission, place the selector lever as Forester Sports 2.5XT front

follows:
lip spoiler (U.S. only)
Uphill slopes: “D” position
Downhill slopes: A low-speed gear posi-
tion to use engine braking CAUTION
! Parking on a grade . Your vehicle’s ground clearance
Always block the wheels under both and approach angle are de-
vehicle and trailer when parking. Apply creased due to the addition of
the parking brake firmly. You should not the front lip spoiler. Please ex-
park on a hill or slope. But if parking on a ercise caution when parking the
hill or slope cannot be avoided, you vehicle, driving over speed
should take the following steps: bumps, traveling up or down
1. Apply the brakes and hold the pedal steep inclines, or when under-
down. taking any other maneuver that
2. Have someone place wheel blocks may involve the front end of the
under both the vehicle and trailer wheels. vehicle. 8
3. When the wheel blocks are in place, . When towing a vehicle or loading
release the regular brakes slowly until the it onto a flatbed tow truck, extra
blocks absorb the load. precautions must be taken to
4. Apply the regular brakes and then ensure proper clearance between
apply the parking brake; slowly release the front lip spoiler and the
the regular brakes. loading ramp or towing appara-
5. Shift into 1st or reverse gear (manual tus. Failure to allow for proper
transmission) or “P” (automatic transmis- clearance in these situations may
sion) and shut off the engine. result in damage to the front lip
spoiler that is not covered under
warranty.
Extra care must be taken with vehicles

equipped with the front lip spoiler to avoid
damage to that accessory.

Black plate (2,1)
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
Left Page
Black plate (17,1)
In case of emergency
If you park your vehicle in an emergency......... 9-2 If no steam is coming from the engine
Temporary spare tire (if equipped) .................... 9-2 compartment ................................................... 9-11
Flat tires............................................................... 9-4 Towing ................................................................ 9-11
Changing a flat tire.............................................. 9-4 Towing and tie-down hooks................................ 9-12
Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) Using a flat-bed truck......................................... 9-13
(if equipped)...................................................... 9-7 Towing with all wheels on the ground................. 9-13
Jump starting ...................................................... 9-8 Rear gate – if the rear gate cannot be
How to jump start................................................ 9-9 unlocked.......................................................... 9-14
Engine overheating ............................................ 9-11 Moonroof – if the moonroof cannot be
If steam is coming from the engine closed .............................................................. 9-14
compartment.................................................... 9-11 Maintenance tools ............................................. 9-15
Jack and jack handle ......................................... 9-15

Black plate (268,1)
9-2 In case of emergency
If you park your vehicle in an NOTE Temporary spare tire (if

emergency When the hazard warning flasher is on, equipped)
the turn signals do not work.
WARNING
. Never tow a trailer when the
temporary spare tire is used.
The temporary spare tire is not
designed to sustain the towing
load. Use of the temporary spare
tire when towing can result in
failure of the spare tire and/or
less stability of the vehicle and
may lead to an accident.
. When a spare tire is mounted or a
The hazard warning flasher should be wheel rim is replaced without the
used in day or night to warn other drivers original pressure sensor/trans-
when you have to park your vehicle under mitter being transferred, the low
emergency conditions. tire pressure warning light will
Avoid stopping on the road. It is best to illuminate steadily after blinking
safely pull off the road if a problem occurs. for approximately one minute.
This indicates the tire pressure
The hazard warning flasher can be acti- monitoring system (TPMS) is un-
vated regardless of the ignition switch able to monitor all four road
position. wheels. Contact your SUBARU
Turn on the hazard warning by pushing dealer as soon as possible for
the hazard warning flasher switch. Turn it tire and sensor replacement and/
off by pushing the switch again. or system resetting.

Black plate (269,1)
In case of emergency 9-3
CAUTION
Never use any temporary spare tire
other than the original. Using other
sizes may result in severe mechan-
ical damage to the drive train of your
vehicle.
The temporary spare tire is smaller and

lighter than a conventional tire and is
designed for emergency use only. Re-
move the temporary spare tire and re-
install the conventional tire as soon as
possible because the spare tire is de- 1) Tread wear indicator bar 1) Spare fuse
signed only for temporary use. 2) Indicator location mark 2) FWD connector
Check the inflation pressure of the tem- . When the wear indicator appears on
porary spare tire periodically to keep the the tread, replace the tire. NOTE
tire ready for use. The correct pressure is . The temporary spare tire must be used (All AWD AT non-turbo models without
60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2). only on a rear wheel. If a front wheel tire Vehicle Dynamics Control system) Be-
fore driving your vehicle with the
9
gets punctured, replace the wheel with a
When using the temporary spare tire, note rear wheel and install the temporary spare temporary spare tire, put a spare fuse
the following. tire in place of the removed rear wheel. inside the FWD connector in the main
. Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h). fuse box located in the engine com-
. Do not put a tire chain on the temporary partment and confirm that the Front-
spare tire. Because of the smaller tire size, wheel drive warning light “AWD” in the
a tire chain will not fit properly. combination meter comes on. The all
. Do not use two or more temporary wheel drive capability of the vehicle
spare tires at the same time. has now deactivated. After re-installing
the conventional tire, remove the spare
. Do not drive over obstacles. This tire
fuse from the FWD connector in order
has a smaller diameter, so road clearance
to reactivate all wheel drive.
is reduced.

Black plate (270,1)
Flat tires . Always turn off the engine before

raising the flat tire off the ground
If you have a flat tire while driving, never using the jack. Never swing or
brake suddenly; keep driving straight push the vehicle supported with
ahead while gradually reducing speed. the jack. The jack can come out
Then slowly pull off the road to a safe of the jacking point due to a jolt
place. and this can result in a severe
accident.
& Changing a flat tire
1. Park on a hard, level surface, when-
WARNING ever possible, then stop the engine.
2. Set the parking brake securely and
. Do not jack up the vehicle on an shift a manual transmission vehicle in
incline or a loose road surface. reverse or an automatic transmission 1) Jack
The jack can come out of the vehicle in the “P” (Park) position. 2) Jack handle
jacking point or sink into the 3) Spare tire
3. Turn on the hazard warning flasher
ground and this can result in a and have everyone get out of the vehicle. 5. Take out the spare tire, jack, and
severe accident. wheel nut wrench.
. Use only the jack provided with The spare tire is stored under the floor of
your vehicle. The jack supplied the cargo area.
with the vehicle is designed only
for changing a tire. Never get To remove the spare tire:
under the vehicle while support- 1. Open the lid and remove it.
ing the vehicle with this jack.
4. Put wheel blocks at the front and rear

of the tire diagonally opposite the flat tire.

Black plate (271,1)
5. The jack is stored under the left side of

the cargo floor.
2. Remove the storage compartment To take out the jack handle:

bucket (Canada spec. non-turbo models). Open the rear-left and center lids in the
To take out the jack: cargo area by pulling their tabs.
Pull the tab to open the lid, turn the jack
screw counterclockwise to loosen it, then
remove the jack. 9
3. Remove the storage compartment tray

(except Canada spec. non-turbo models). 6. If your vehicle has wheel covers, insert
4. Turn the attaching bolt counterclock- the wheel cover remover into the notch
wise, then take spare tire out. provided in the wheel cover, and pry it off.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (272,1)
screw, and turn the handle until the tire

clears the ground. Do not raise the vehicle
higher than necessary.
10. Remove the wheel nuts and the flat
tire.
7. Loosen the wheel nuts using the wheel 8. Place the jack under the side sill at the
nut wrench but do not remove the nuts. front or rear jack-up point closest to the flat
tire.
Turn the jackscrew by hand until the jack
head engages firmly into the jack-up point.
9. Insert the jack handle into the jack- 11. Before putting the spare tire on, clean

Black plate (273,1)
the mounting surface of the wheel and hub The torque for tightening the nuts is 58 to WARNING
with a cloth. 72 lbf·ft (80 to 100 N·m, 8 to 10 kgf·m).
12. Put on the spare tire. Replace the This torque is equivalent to applying about Never place a tire or tire changing
wheel nuts. Tighten them by hand. 88 to 110 lbs (40 to 50 kg) at the top of the tools in the passenger compartment
wheel nut wrench. Never use your foot on after changing wheels. In a sudden
WARNING the wheel nut wrench or a pipe extension stop or collisions, loose equipment
on the wrench because you may exceed could strike occupants and cause
Do not use oil or grease on the the specified torque. Have the wheel nut injury. Store the tire and all tools in
wheel studs or nuts when the spare torque checked at the nearest automotive the proper place.
tire is installed. This could cause the service facility.
nuts to become loose and lead to an
accident. & Tire pressure monitoring
system (TPMS) (if equipped)
13. Turn the jack handle counterclockwise
to lower the vehicle.
15. Store the flat tire in the spare tire

compartment.
Put the spacer and tighten the attaching
bolt firmly. The tire pressure monitoring system pro-
Also store the jack and wheel nut wrench vides the driver with the warning message
14. Use the wheel nut wrench to securely in their storage locations. indicated by sending a signal from a
tighten the wheel nuts to the specified sensor that is installed in each wheel
torque, following the tightening order in the when tire pressure is severely low.
illustration. The tire pressure monitoring system will
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (274,1)
activate only when the vehicle is driven. sure warning light will illuminate Jump starting
Also, this system may not react immedi- steadily after blinking for approxi-
ately to a sudden drop in tire pressure (for mately one minute. This indicates
example, a blow-out caused running over the TPMS is unable to monitor all WARNING
a sharp object). four road wheels. Contact your
SUBARU dealer as soon as possible . Battery fluid is SULFURIC ACID.
WARNING for tire and sensor replacement and/ Do not let it come in contact with
or system resetting. the eyes, skin, clothing or the
If the low tire pressure warning light vehicle.
comes on while driving, never brake Do not inject any tire liquid or
aerosol tire sealant into the tires, If battery fluid gets on you,
suddenly and keep driving straight
as this may cause a malfunction of thoroughly flush the exposed
ahead while gradually reducing
the tire pressure sensors. area with water immediately. Get
speed. Then slowly pull off the road
medical help if the fluid has
to a safe place. Otherwise an acci- If the light illuminates steadily after
entered your eyes.
dent involving serious vehicle da- blinking for approximately one min-
mage and serious personal injury ute, promptly contact a SUBARU If battery fluid is accidentally
could occur. dealer to have the system inspected. swallowed, immediately drink a
large amount of milk or water,
Check the pressure for all four tires
and obtain immediate medical
and adjust the pressure to the COLD
help.
tire pressure shown on the vehicle
placard on the door pillar on the Keep everyone including chil-
driver’s side. If this light still comes dren away from the battery.
on while driving after adjusting the . The gas generated by a battery
tire pressure, a tire may have sig- explodes if a flame or spark is
nificant damage and a fast leak that brought near it. Do not smoke or
causes the tire to lose air rapidly. If light a match while jump starting.
you have a flat tire, replace it with a . Never attempt jump starting if the
spare tire as soon as possible. discharged battery is frozen. It
When a spare tire is mounted or a could cause the battery to burst
wheel rim is replaced without the or explode.
original pressure sensor/transmitter . Whenever working on or around
being transferred, the low tire pres- a battery, always wear suitable

Black plate (275,1)
eye protectors, and remove metal & How to jump start

objects such as rings, bands or
1. Make sure the booster battery is 12
other metal jewelry.
volts and the negative terminal is
. Be sure the jumper cables and grounded.
clamps on them do not have 2. If the booster battery is in another
loose or missing insulation. vehicle, do not let the two vehicles touch.
Do not jump start unless cables 3. Turn off all unnecessary lights and
in suitable condition are avail- accessories.
able. 4. Connect the jumper cables exactly in
. A running engine can be danger- the sequence illustrated.
ous. Keep your fingers, hands,
clothing, hair and tools away
from the cooling fan, belts and
any other moving engine parts.
Removing rings, watches and
ties is advisable.
. Jump starting is dangerous if it is
done incorrectly. If you are un-
sure about the proper procedure 9
for jump starting, consult a com-
petent mechanic.
When your vehicle does not start due to a

run down (discharged) battery, the vehicle
may be jump started by connecting your
battery to another battery (called the
booster battery) with jumper cables.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (276,1)
(1) Connect one jumper cable to the

positive (+) terminal on the discharged
battery.
(2) Connect the other end of the
jumper cable to the positive (+) term-
inal of the booster battery.
(3) Connect one end of the other
cable to the negative (−) terminal of
the booster battery.
(4) Connect the other end of the cable
to the engine lifting bracket.
Make sure that the cables are not near
any moving parts and that the cable
clamps are not in contact with any other
metal.
5. Start the engine of the vehicle with the
booster battery and run it at moderate
speed. Then start the engine of the vehicle
that has the discharged battery.
6. When finished, carefully disconnect
the cables in exactly the reverse order.
1) Booster battery
2) Engine lifting bracket

Black plate (277,1)
Engine overheating the engine and contact your authorized Towing

dealer for repair.
3. After the engine coolant temperature
WARNING has dropped, turn off the engine. WARNING
If the temperature gauge stays at the
Never attempt to remove the radia- overheated zone, turn off the engine. Never tow AWD vehicles (both AT
tor cap until the engine has been and MT) with the front wheels raised
shut off and has fully cooled down. 4. After the engine has fully cooled down, off the ground while the rear wheels
When the engine is hot, the coolant check the coolant level in the reserve are on the ground, or with the rear
is under pressure. Removing the tank. wheels raised off the ground while
cap while the engine is still hot If the coolant level is below the “LOW” the front wheels are on the ground.
could release a spray of boiling hot mark, add coolant up to the “FULL” mark. This will cause the vehicle to spin
coolant, which could burn you very 5. If there is no coolant in the reserve away due to the operation or dete-
seriously. tank, add coolant to the reserve tank. rioration of the center differential.
Then remove the radiator cap and fill the
If the engine overheats, safely pull off the radiator with coolant.
road and stop the vehicle in a safe place.
If you remove the radiator cap from a hot
radiator, first wrap a thick cloth around the
& If steam is coming from the
engine compartment
radiator cap, then turn the cap counter-
clockwise slowly without pressing down
9
Turn off the engine and get everyone until it stops. Release the pressure from
away from the vehicle until it cools down. the radiator. After the pressure has been
fully released, remove the cap by pressing
& If no steam is coming from down and turning it.
the engine compartment
1. Keep the engine running at idling
speed.
2. Open the hood to ventilate the engine If towing is necessary, it is best done by
compartment. your SUBARU dealer or a commercial
Confirm that the cooling fan is turning. If towing service. Observe the following
the fan is not turning, immediately turn off procedures for safety.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (278,1)
& Towing and tie-down hooks Front towing hook: Tie-down hooks:
The towing hooks should be used only in
an emergency (e.g., to free a stuck vehicle
from mud, sand or snow).
CAUTION
. Use only the specified towing
hooks and tie-down hooks. Never
use suspension parts or other
parts of the body for towing or
tie-down purposes.
. Never use the tie-down hook
closest to the muffler under the
vehicle for towing purposes. Rear towing hook:
. To prevent deformation to the
bumper and the towing hook, do
not apply excessive lateral load
to the towing hooks.
1) Tie-down hooks
2) Towing and tie-down hooks

Black plate (279,1)
& Using a flat-bed truck & Towing with all wheels on the CAUTION
ground
. If transmission failure occurs,
transport your vehicle on a flat-
bed truck.
. Do not run the engine while being
towed using this method. Trans-
mission damage could result if
the vehicle is towed with the
engine running.
. For vehicles with automatic
transmission, the traveling speed
must be limited to less than 20
mph (30 km/h) and the traveling
This is the best way to transport your distance to less than 31 miles (50
vehicle. Use the following procedures to km). For greater speeds and
ensure safe transportation. WARNING distances, transport your vehicle
1. Shift the selector lever into the “P” on a flat-bed truck.
position for automatic transmission vehi- . Never turn the ignition switch to 9
cles or “1st” for manual transmission the “LOCK” position while the 1. Check the transmission and differen-
vehicles. vehicle is being towed because tial oil levels and add oil to bring it to the
the steering wheel and the direc- upper level if necessary.
2. Pull up the parking brake lever firmly. tion of the wheels will be locked.
3. Secure the vehicle onto the carrier 2. Release the parking brake and put the
properly with safety chains. Each safety . Remember that the brake booster transmission in neutral.
chain should be equally tightened and and power steering do not func- 3. The ignition switch should be in the
care must be taken not to pull the chains tion when the engine is not “Acc” position while the vehicle is being
so tightly that the suspension bottoms out. running. Because the engine is towed.
turned off, it will take greater
effort to operate the brake pedal 4. Take up slack in the towline slowly to
and steering wheel. prevent damage to the vehicle.

Black plate (280,1)
Rear gate – if the rear gate Moonroof – if the moonroof

cannot be unlocked cannot be closed
In the event that you cannot unlock the If the moonroof cannot be closed with the
rear gate by operating the power door moonroof switch, you can close the moon-
locking switches or the remote keyless roof manually.
entry system, you can unlock it from inside
the cargo area.
2. Locate the rear gate lock release lever

behind the rear gate trim panel.
3. Unlock the rear gate by pressing the
lever inside the trim upward.
4. Open the rear gate from outside by
raising the rear gate handle.
1. Remove the plug on the roof trim
located to the rear of the moonroof by
1. Remove the access cover at the inserting the end of the flat-head screw-
bottom-center of the rear gate trim. driver between the roof and plug and
prying it off.

Black plate (281,1)
Maintenance tools & Jack and jack handle
2. Insert a hex-head wrench in the end of

the motor shaft. The jack is stored under the left side of the
To close the moonroof, turn the wrench Your vehicle is equipped with the following
maintenance tools: cargo floor.
counterclockwise.
Wheel nut wrench
Have your vehicle checked and repaired Screwdriver
by an authorized SUBARU dealer. Hex-head wrench (for vehicle with moon- 9
roof)
Wheel cover remover (only for vehicles
with wheel covers)
The jack handle is stowed under the rear-

left and center lids in the cargo area.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (282,1)
For how to use the jack, refer to the “Flat

tires” section in this chapter.

Black plate (19,1)
Appearance care
Exterior care ....................................................... 10-2 Cleaning the interior.......................................... 10-5

Washing............................................................. 10-2 Seat fabric ......................................................... 10-5
Waxing and polishing ......................................... 10-3 Leather seat materials........................................ 10-5
Cleaning aluminum wheels ................................. 10-3 Synthetic leather upholstery............................... 10-5
Corrosion protection.......................................... 10-4 Ashtray (Canada only, if equipped) ..................... 10-5
Most common causes of corrosion ..................... 10-4 Climate control panel, audio panel, instrument
To help prevent corrosion................................... 10-4 panel, console panel, switches, combination
meter, and other plastic surfaces ..................... 10-6
10

Black plate (286,1)
10-2 Appearance care
Exterior care . Since your vehicle is equipped strong soap or chemical detergents. All
with a rear wiper, automatic car- cleaning agents should be promptly
& Washing wash brushes could become flushed from the surface and not allowed
tangled around it, damaging the to dry there. Rinse the vehicle thoroughly
CAUTION wiper arm and other compo- with plenty of lukewarm water. Wipe the
nents. Ask the automatic car- remaining water off with a chamois or soft
. When washing the vehicle, the wash operator not to let the cloth.
brakes may get wet. As a result, brushes touch the wiper arm or ! Washing the underbody
the brake stopping distance will to fix the wiper arm on the rear
be longer. To dry the brakes, window glass with adhesive tape Chemicals, salts and gravel used for
drive the vehicle at a safe speed before operating the machine. deicing road surfaces are extremely cor-
while lightly pressing the brake rosive, accelerating the corrosion of un-
pedal to heat up the brakes. derbody components, such as the exhaust
NOTE system, fuel and brake lines, brake
. Do not wash the engine compart- cables, floor pan and fenders, and sus-
ment and area adjacent to it. If When having your vehicle washed in
an automatic car wash, make sure pension.
water enters the engine air in-
beforehand that the car wash is of Thoroughly flush the underbody and in-
take, electrical parts or the power
suitable type. side of the fenders with lukewarm or cold
steering fluid reservoir, it will
The best way to preserve your vehicle’s water at frequent intervals to reduce the
cause engine trouble or faulty
beauty is frequent washing. Wash the harmful effects of such agents.
power steering respectively.
vehicle at least once a month to avoid Mud and sand adhering to the underbody
contamination by road grime. components may accelerate their corro-
Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty sion.
of lukewarm or cold water. Do not wash After driving off-road or muddy or sandy
the vehicle with hot water and in direct roads, wash the mud and sand off the
sunlight. underbody.
Carefully flush the suspension and axle
Salt, chemicals, insects, tar, soot, tree sap parts, as they are particularly prone to
and bird droppings should be washed off mud and sand buildup. Do not use a
by using a light detergent, as required. If sharp-edged tool to remove caked mud.
you use a light detergent, make certain
that it is a neutral detergent. Do not use

Black plate (287,1)
Appearance care 10-3

NOTE mended that a coat of wax be applied at clean of any kind of grime or agent. If dirt
Be careful not to damage brake hoses, least once a month, or whenever the is left on too long, it may be difficult to
sensor harnesses, and other parts surface no longer repels water. clean off.
when washing suspension compo- If the appearance of the paint has dimin- . Do not use soap containing grit to
nents. ished to the point where the luster or tone clean the wheels. Be sure to use a neutral
cannot be restored, lightly polish the cleaning agent, and later rinse thoroughly
! Using a warm water washer with water. Do not clean the wheels with a
surface with a fine-grained compound.
. Keep a good distance of 12 in (30 cm) stiff brush or expose them to a high-speed
Never polish just the affected area, but
or more between the washer nozzle and washing device.
include the surrounding area as well.
the vehicle.
Always polish in only one direction. A . Clean the vehicle (including the alumi-
. Do not wash the same area continu- No. 2000 grain compound is recom- num wheels) with water as soon as
ously. mended. Never use a coarse-grained possible when it has been splashed with
. If a stain will not come out easily, wash compound. Coarser grained compounds sea water, exposed to sea breezes, or
by hand. Some warm water washers are have a smaller grain-size number and driven on roads treated with salt or other
of the high temperature, high pressure could damage the paint. After polishing agents.
type, and they can damage or deform the with a compound, coat with wax to restore
resin parts such as mouldings, or cause the original luster. Frequent polishing with
water to leak into the vehicle. a compound or an incorrect polishing
technique will result in removing the paint
& Waxing and polishing layer and exposing the undercoat. When
in doubt, it is always best to contact your
Always wash and dry the vehicle before
SUBARU dealer or an auto paint specia-
10
waxing and polishing.
Use a good quality polish and wax and list.
apply them according to the manufac- NOTE
turer’s instructions. Wax or polish when
the painted surface is cool. Be careful not to block the windshield
washer nozzles with wax when waxing
Be sure to polish and wax the chrome trim, the vehicle.
as well as the painted surfaces. Loss of
wax on a painted surface leads to loss of & Cleaning aluminum wheels
the original luster and also quickens the
deterioration of the surface. It is recom- . Promptly wipe the aluminum wheels

Black plate (288,1)
Corrosion protection though other parts of the vehicle may be assistance.

dry.
Repair chips and scratches in the paint as
Your SUBARU has been designed and 4. High temperatures will cause corro- soon as you find them.
built to resist corrosion. Special materials sion to parts of the vehicle which cannot
and protective finishes have been used on dry quickly due to lack of proper ventila- Check the interior of the vehicle for water
most parts of the vehicle to help maintain tion. and dirt accumulation under the floor mats
fine appearance, strength, and reliable because that could cause corrosion.
operation. & To help prevent corrosion Occasionally check under the mats to
Wash the vehicle regularly to prevent make sure the area is dry.
& Most common causes of corrosion of the body and suspension Keep your garage dry. Do not park your
corrosion components. Also, wash the vehicle vehicle in a damp, poorly ventilated
The most common causes of corrosion promptly after driving on any of the garage. In such a garage, corrosion can
are: following surfaces: be caused by dampness. If you wash the
. roads that have been salted to prevent vehicle in the garage or put the vehicle
1. The accumulation of moisture retain-
them from freezing in winter into the garage when wet or covered with
ing dirt and debris in body panel sections,
snow, that can cause dampness.
cavities, and other areas. . mud, sand, or gravel
2. Damage to paint and other protective . coastal roads If your vehicle is operated in cold weather
coatings caused by gravel and stone and/or in areas where road salts and other
chips or minor accidents. After the winter has ended, it is recom- corrosive materials are used, the door
mended that the underbody be given a hinges and locks, trunk lid lock, and hood
Corrosion is accelerated on the vehicle very thorough washing. latch should be inspected and lubricated
when: periodically.
1. It is exposed to road salt or dust Before the beginning of winter, check the
control chemicals, or used in coastal condition of underbody components, such
areas where there is more salt in the air, as the exhaust system, fuel and brake
or in areas where there is considerable lines, brake cables, suspension, steering
industrial pollution. system, floor pan, and fenders. If any of
them are found to be rusted, they should
2. It is driven in areas of high humidity, be given an appropriate rust prevention
especially when temperatures range just treatment or should be replaced. Contact
above freezing. your SUBARU dealer to perform this kind
3. Dampness in certain parts of the of maintenance and treatment if you need
vehicle remains for a long time, even

Black plate (289,1)
Appearance care 10-5
Cleaning the interior & Leather seat materials or detergent and water, after first vacuum-
The leather used by SUBARU is a high ing or brushing away loose dirt. Allow the
Use a soft, damp cloth to clean the climate quality natural product which will retain its soap to soak in for a few minutes and wipe
control panel, audio equipment, instru- distinctive appearance and feel for many off with a clean, damp cloth. Commercial
ment panel, center console, combination years with proper care. foam-type cleaners suitable for synthetic
meter panel, and switches. (Do not use leather materials may be used when
Allowing dust or road dirt to build up on the necessary.
organic solvents.) surface can cause the material to become
brittle and to wear prematurely. Regular NOTE
& Seat fabric cleaning with a soft, moist, natural fiber Strong cleaning agents such as sol-
Remove loose dirt, dust or debris with a cloth should be performed monthly, taking vents, paint thinners, window cleaner
vacuum cleaner. If the dirt is caked on the care not to soak the leather or allow water or gasoline must never be used on
fabric or hard to remove with a vacuum to penetrate the stitched seams. leather or synthetic interior materials.
cleaner, use a soft blush then vacuum it. A mild detergent suitable for cleaning
Wipe the fabric surface with a tightly woolen fabrics may be used to remove
wrung cloth and dry the seat fabric difficult dirt spots, rubbing with a soft, dry & Ashtray (Canada only, if
thoroughly. If the fabric is still dirty, wipe cloth afterwards to restore the luster. If equipped)
using a solution of mild soap and luke- your SUBARU is to be parked for a long
warm water then dry thoroughly. time in bright sunlight, it is recommended
that the seats and headrests be covered,
If the stain does not come out, try a or the windows shaded, to prevent fading
commercially-available fabric cleaner. Use
the cleaner on a hidden place and make
or shrinkage. 10
sure it does not affect the fabric adversely. Minor surface blemishes or bald patches
Use the cleaner according to its instruc- may be treated with a commercial leather
tions. spray lacquer. You will discover that each
leather seat section will develop soft folds
NOTE or wrinkles, which is characteristic of
When cleaning the seat, do not use genuine leather.
benzine, paint thinner, or any similar
materials. & Synthetic leather upholstery
The synthetic leather material used on the Particles of ash and tobacco will accumu-
SUBARU may be cleaned using mild soap late around the hinges of the ashtray’s
inner lid. Clean them off using a tooth-
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (290,1)
brush or other narrow-ended implement.
& Climate control panel, audio

panel, instrument panel,
console panel, switches,
combination meter, and other
plastic surfaces
Use a soft, damp cloth to clean the climate
control panel, audio equipment, instru-
ment panel, center console, combination
meter panel, and switches. (Do not use
organic solvents.)
NOTE
Do not use organic solvents such as
paint thinners or gasoline, or strong
cleaning agents that contain those
solvents.

Black plate (21,1)
Maintenance and service
Maintenance schedule ....................................... 11-3 Automatic transmission fluid.......................... 11-20

Maintenance precautions................................... 11-3 Checking the fluid level.................................... 11-20
Before checking or servicing in the engine Recommended fluid ......................................... 11-21
compartment.................................................... 11-4 Front differential gear oil (AT vehicles).......... 11-21
When you do checking or servicing in the engine Checking the oil level ...................................... 11-21
compartment while the engine is running.......... 11-4 Recommended grade and viscosity .................. 11-22
Engine hood ....................................................... 11-4 Rear differential gear oil.................................. 11-22
Engine compartment overview.......................... 11-6 Checking the gear oil level............................... 11-22
Non-turbo models .............................................. 11-6 Recommended grade and viscosity .................. 11-23
Turbo models ..................................................... 11-7 Power steering fluid ........................................ 11-24
Engine oil............................................................ 11-8 Checking the fluid level.................................... 11-24
Checking the oil level ......................................... 11-8 Recommended fluid ......................................... 11-25
Changing the oil and oil filter.............................. 11-9 Brake fluid........................................................ 11-25
Recommended grade and viscosity .................. 11-10 Checking the fluid level.................................... 11-25
Recommended grade and viscosity under severe Recommended brake fluid ............................... 11-26
driving conditions .......................................... 11-11
Clutch fluid (MT vehicles) ............................... 11-26
Synthetic oil..................................................... 11-11
Checking the fluid level.................................... 11-26
Cooling system ................................................ 11-12 Recommended clutch fluid............................... 11-27
Cooling fan, hose and connections ................... 11-12
Brake booster .................................................. 11-27
Engine coolant ................................................. 11-12
Brake pedal ...................................................... 11-27
Air cleaner element .......................................... 11-15
Checking the brake pedal free play .................. 11-27 11
Replacing the air cleaner element ..................... 11-15
Checking the brake pedal reserve distance....... 11-28
Spark plugs ...................................................... 11-17
Clutch pedal (MT vehicles).............................. 11-28
Recommended spark plugs .............................. 11-18
Checking the clutch function............................ 11-28
Drive belts ........................................................ 11-18 Checking the clutch pedal free play.................. 11-28
Manual transmission oil .................................. 11-19 Hill holder (MT vehicles – if equipped) .......... 11-29
Checking the oil level ....................................... 11-19
Recommended grade and viscosity .................. 11-20

Black plate (22,1)
Maintenance and service
Replacement of brake pad and lining............. 11-29 Windshield washer fluid.................................. 11-37
Breaking-in of new brake pads and linings........ 11-29 Replacement of wiper blades ......................... 11-39
Parking brake stroke........................................ 11-30 Windshield wiper blades .................................. 11-39
Tires and wheels .............................................. 11-30 Rear window wiper blade ................................. 11-40
Types of tires ................................................... 11-30 Battery .............................................................. 11-42
Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) Fuses ................................................................ 11-43
(if equipped)................................................... 11-31 Main fuse.......................................................... 11-44
Tire inspection ................................................. 11-32 Installation of accessories .............................. 11-45
Tire pressures and wear ................................... 11-33
Replacing bulbs ............................................... 11-46
Wheel balance.................................................. 11-34
Headlights (Vehicle with HID headlights)........... 11-48
Wear indicators ................................................ 11-35
Headlights (Vehicle without HID headlights) ...... 11-48
Tire rotation direction mark .............................. 11-35
Rear combination lights ................................... 11-50
Tire rotation ..................................................... 11-35
License plate light ........................................... 11-50
Tire replacement .............................................. 11-36
Dome light and map light ................................. 11-51
Wheel replacement........................................... 11-36
High mount stop light ...................................... 11-51
Aluminum wheels (if equipped) ...................... 11-37

Black plate (293,1)
Maintenance and service 11-3
Maintenance schedule Maintenance precautions . Always be very careful to avoid

injury when working on the vehi-
The scheduled maintenance items re- When maintenance and service are re- cle. Remember that some of the
quired to be serviced at regular intervals quired, it is recommended that all work be materials in the vehicle may be
are shown in the “Warranty and Main- done by an authorized SUBARU dealer. hazardous if improperly used or
tenance Booklet”. handled, for example, battery
If you perform maintenance and service acid.
For details of your maintenance schedule, by yourself, you should familiarize yourself
read the separate “Warranty and Main- with the information provided in this . Your vehicle should only be ser-
tenance Booklet”. section on general maintenance and viced by persons fully competent
service for your SUBARU. to do so. Serious personal injury
may result to persons not experi-
Incorrect or incomplete service could enced in servicing vehicles.
cause improper or unsafe vehicle opera- . Always use the proper tools and
tion. Any problems caused by improper make certain that they are well
maintenance and service performed by maintained.
you are not eligible for warranty coverage.
. Never get under the vehicle sup-
WARNING ported only by a jack. Always use
a safety stands to support the
. Testing of an All-Wheel Drive vehicle.
vehicle must NEVER be per- . Never keep the engine running in
formed on a single two-wheel a poorly ventilated area, such as
dynamometer or similar appara- a garage or other closed areas.
tus. Attempting to do so will
. Do not smoke or allow open 11
result in transmission damage
flames around the fuel or battery.
and in uncontrolled vehicle
This will cause a fire.
movement and may cause an
accident or injuries to persons . Because the fuel system is under
nearby. pressure, replacement of the fuel
filter should be performed only
. Always select a safe area when
by your SUBARU dealer.
performing maintenance on your
vehicle. . Wear adequate eye protection to
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (294,1)
11-4 Maintenance and service
guard against getting oil or fluids remain hot for some time after Engine hood
in your eyes. If something does the engine is stopped.
get in your eyes, thoroughly . Do not spill engine oil, engine
wash them out with clean water. coolant, brake fluid or any other
. Do not tamper with the wiring of fluid on hot engine components.
the SRS airbag system or seat- This may cause a fire.
belt pretensioner system, or at- . Always remove the key from the
tempt to take its connectors ignition switch. When the ignition
apart, as that may activate the switch is in the “ON” position,
system or it can render it inop- the cooling fan may operate
erative. The wiring and connec- suddenly even when the engine
tors of these systems are yellow is stopped.
for easy identification. NEVER
use a circuit tester for these
wiring. & When you do checking or
If your SRS airbag or seatbelt servicing in the engine com- To open the hood:
pretensioner needs service, con- partment while the engine is 1. If the wiper blades are lifted off the
sult your nearest SUBARU deal- windshield, return them to their original
running positions.
er.
2. Pull the hood release knob under the
WARNING instrument panel.
& Before checking or servicing A running engine can be dangerous.
in the engine compartment Keep your fingers, hands, clothing,
hair and tools away from the cooling
WARNING fan, belts and any other moving
engine parts. Removing rings,
. Always stop the engine and set watches and ties is advisable.
the parking brake firmly to pre-
vent the vehicle from moving.
. Always let the engine cool down.
Engine parts become very hot
when the engine is running and

Black plate (295,1)
hood prop into the slot in the hood.

To close the hood:
1. Lift the hood slightly and remove the
hood prop from the slot in the hood and
return the prop to its retainer.
2. Lower the hood until it approaches
approximately 12 in (30 cm) from the
closed position and let it drop.
After closing the hood, be sure the hood is
securely locked.
If this does not close the hood, release it
3. Release the secondary hood release from a slightly higher position. Do not push
located under the front grille by moving the the hood forcibly to close it. It could
lever toward the left. deform the metal.
WARNING
Always check that the hood is
properly locked before you start
driving. If it is not, it might fly open
while the vehicle is moving and
block your view, which may cause
an accident and serious bodily in- 11
jury.
Lift up the hood, release the hood prop

from its retainer and put the end of the

Black plate (296,1)
1) Air cleaner element (page 11-15)

Engine compartment overview 2) Manual transmission oil level gauge (MT)
(page 11-19) or Differential gear oil level
& Non-turbo models gauge (AT) (page 11-21)
3) Clutch fluid reservoir (page 11-26)
4) Automatic transmission fluid level gauge
(page 11-20)
5) Brake fluid reservoir (page 11-25)
6) Fuse box (page 11-43)
7) Battery (page 11-42)
8) Windshield washer tank (page 11-37)
9) Engine coolant reservoir (page 11-12)
10) Engine oil level gauge (page 11-8)
11) Engine oil filler cap (page 11-8)
12) Radiator cap (page 11-12)
13) Power steering fluid reservoir
(page 11-24)

Black plate (297,1)
& Turbo models 1) Air cleaner element (page 11-15)

2) Manual transmission oil level gauge (MT)
(page 11-19) or Differential gear oil level
gauge (AT) (page 11-21)
3) Clutch fluid reservoir (page 11-26)
4) Automatic transmission fluid level gauge
(page 11-20)
5) Brake fluid reservoir (page 11-25)
6) Fuse box (page 11-43)
7) Battery (page 11-42)
8) Windshield washer tank (page 11-37)
9) Engine coolant reservoir (page 11-12)
10) Engine oil level gauge (page 11-8)
11) Engine oil filler cap (page 11-8)
12) Radiator cap (page 11-12)
13) Power steering fluid reservoir
(page 11-24)
11

Black plate (298,1)
Engine oil 1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and

stop the engine.
NOTE
. The engine oil consumption rate is
not stabilized, and therefore cannot be
determined until the vehicle has tra-
veled at least several thousand miles
(kilometers). Even after break-in, when
the vehicle is used under severe driv-
ing conditions such as those men-
tioned in the Warranty and Mainte-
nance Booklet, engine oil is consumed
or deteriorated more quickly than un- 1) Notch
der normal driving conditions. If you 2) Upper level
drive your vehicle under these severe 3) Lower level
2. Pull out the dipstick, wipe it clean, and
conditions, you should check the oil insert it again. 4. Pull out the dipstick again and check
level at least at every second fuel fill-up 3. Be sure the dipstick is correctly in- the oil level on it. If it is below the lower
time, and change the oil more fre- serted until it stops with the graphic level, add oil to bring the level up to the
quently. Please refer to the Warranty symbol “ ” on its top appearing as upper level.
and Maintenance Booklet for more de- shown in the illustration.
tails.
. If the oil consumption rate seems CAUTION
abnormally high after the break-in
period, for example more than 1 quart . Use only engine oil with the
per 1,200 miles or 1 liter per 2,000 recommended grade and vis-
kilometers, we recommend that you cosity.
contact your SUBARU dealer.
& Checking the oil level

Check the engine oil level at each fuel
stop.

Black plate (299,1)
. Be careful not to spill engine oil engine idle for approximately 10 minutes
when adding it. If oil touches the to ease draining the engine oil.
exhaust pipe, it may cause a bad 2. Park the vehicle on a level surface and
smell, smoke, and/or a fire. If stop the engine.
engine oil gets on the exhaust 3. Remove the oil filler cap.
pipe, be sure to wipe it off.
If you check the oil level just after stopping

the engine, wait a few minutes for the oil to
drain back into the oil pan before checking
the level.
Just after driving or while the engine is
warm, the engine oil level reading may be
in a range between the upper level and 5. Drain out the engine oil by removing
the notch mark. This is caused by thermal the drain plug while the engine is still
expansion of the engine oil. warm. The used oil should be drained into
To prevent overfilling the engine oil, do not an appropriate container and disposed of
add any additional oil above the upper properly.
level when the engine is cold. 4. Open the access cover by removing
WARNING
& Changing the oil and oil filter the eight clips and turning the access
cover counterclockwise. The drain plug Be careful not to burn yourself with
Change the oil and oil filter according to will be exposed.
the maintenance schedule in the “War- hot engine oil.
ranty and Maintenance Booklet”. 11
The engine oil and oil filter must be 6. Wipe the seating surface of the drain
changed more frequently than listed in plug with a clean cloth and tighten it
the maintenance schedule when driving securely with a new sealing washer after
on dusty roads, when short trips are the oil has completely drained out.
frequently made, when towing a trailer, or
when driving in extremely cold weather.
1. Warm up the engine by letting the
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (300,1)
CAUTION 14. Run the engine until it reaches the

normal operating temperature. Then stop
. Never over tighten the oil filter the engine and wait a few minutes to allow
because that can result in an oil the oil drain back. Check the oil level
leak. again and if necessary, add more engine
. Thoroughly wipe off any engine oil.
oil that has spilled over the
exhaust pipe and/or under-cover. & Recommended grade and
If left unremoved, the oil could viscosity
catch fire.
Oil grade:
11. Close the access cover by turning it ILSAC GF-4, which can be identified with
clockwise and reinstall the eight clips in the ILSAC certification mark (Starburst
7. Remove the oil filter with an oil filter their original positions. mark)
wrench. 12. Pour engine oil through the filler neck. or API classification SM with the words
8. Before installing a new oil filter, apply a “ENERGY CONSERVING”
thin coat of engine oil to the seal. Oil capacity (Guideline):
9. Clean the rubber seal seating area of 4.2 US qt (4.0 liters, 3.5 Imp qt) These recommended oil grades can be
the bottom of engine and install the oil identified by looking for either or both of
filter by hand turning. Be careful not to the following marks displayed on the oil
twist or damage the seal. The oil quantity indicated above is only a container.
guideline. The necessary quantity of oil
10. Tighten the oil filter by the amount depends on the quantity of oil that has
indicated in the following table after the been drained. The quantity of drained oil
seal makes contact with the bottom of differs slightly depending on the tempera-
engine. ture of the oil and the time the oil is left
Oil filter Part Amount of flowing out. After pouring oil into the
color number rotation engine, therefore, you must use the dip-
Black stick to confirm that the level is correct.
15208AA100 1 rotation
13. Start the engine and make sure that no
White 15208AA09A 2/3 – 3/4 oil leaks appear around the filter’s rubber
rotation
seal.

Black plate (301,1)
In choosing an oil, you want the proper CAUTION

quality and viscosity, as well as one that
will add to fuel economy. The following Use only engine oil with the recom-
table lists the recommended viscosities mended grade and viscosity.
and applicable temperatures.
When adding oil, different brands may be
used together as long as they are the & Recommended grade and
same API classification and SAE viscosity viscosity under severe driv-
as those recommended by SUBARU. ing conditions
If the vehicle is used in desert areas, in
areas with very high temperatures, or
used for heavy-duty applications such as
API Service label towing a trailer, use of oil with the following
1) Indicates the oil quality by API designa- grade and viscosities is recommended.
tions
2) Indicates the SAE oil viscosity grade API classification SM (or SL):
3) Indicates that the oil has fuel saving SAE viscosity No.:
capabilities
30, 40, 10W-50, 20W-40, 20W-50
& Synthetic oil

SAE viscosity number and applicable
You can use synthetic engine oil that
temperature
meets the same requirements given for 11
*: 5W-30 is recommended.
conventional engine oil. When using
Engine oil viscosity (thickness) affects fuel synthetic oil, you must use oil of the same
economy. Oils of lower viscosity provide classification, viscosity and grade shown
better fuel economy. However, in hot in this Owner’s Manual, and must follow
weather, oil of higher viscosity is required the oil and filter changing intervals shown
to properly lubricate the engine. in the maintenance schedule.
ILSAC Certification Mark (Starburst Mark)

Black plate (302,1)
Cooling system tenance intervals may result in If the radiator cooling fan does not operate
problems, including, but not lim- even when the engine coolant tempera-
ited to shortened life of engine ture gauge exceeds the normal operating
WARNING components and cooling system range, the cooling fan circuit may be
clogging, coolant leaks and en- defective. Check the fuse and replace it
Never attempt to remove the radia- gine damage from overheating. if necessary. If the fuse is not blown, have
tor cap until the engine has been the cooling system checked by your
Problems caused by the failure to
shut off and has cooled down SUBARU dealer.
use Subaru Genuine Coolant and
completely. Since the coolant is
Subaru Cooling System Condi- If frequent addition of coolant is neces-
under pressure, you may suffer
tioner at recommended intervals sary, there may be a leak in the engine
serious burns from a spray of boil-
are not covered under the cooling system. It is recommended that
ing hot coolant when the cap is
Subaru Limited Warranty. the cooling system and connections be
removed.
While there may be other generic checked for leaks, damage, or looseness.
products that may provide the
CAUTION required protection, they have & Engine coolant
not been tested for compatibility
. The cooling system has been with Subaru engines and cooling ! Checking the coolant level
filled at the factory with a high system components, and there-
quality, corrosion-inhibiting, fore they are not recommended.
year-around coolant which pro- . Do not splash the engine coolant
vides protection against freezing over painted parts. The alcohol
down to −338F (−368C). contained in the engine coolant
Subaru engines use aluminum may damage the paint surface.
components that require the
anti-corrosive and anti-freeze
properties of Subaru Genuine & Cooling fan, hose and con-
Coolant, which is specifically nections
formulated for the Subaru cool-
Your vehicle employs an electric cooling
ing system. Failure to use Subaru
fan which is thermostatically controlled to
Genuine Coolant along with
operate when the engine coolant reaches 1) “FULL” level mark
Subaru Cooling System Condi-
a specific temperature. 2) “LOW” level mark
tioner at the recommended main-

Black plate (303,1)
Check the coolant level at each fuel stop. a fire. If engine coolant gets on 1. Remove the under cover.
1. Check the coolant level on the outside the exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe 2. Place a proper container under the
of the reservoir while the engine is cool. it off. drain plug and loosen the drain plug.
2. If the level is close to or lower than the . Do not splash the engine coolant 3. Loosen the radiator cap to drain the
“LOW” level mark, add coolant up to the over painted parts. The alcohol coolant from the radiator. Then drain the
“FULL” level mark. If the reserve tank is contained in the engine coolant coolant from the reserve tank. Tighten the
empty, remove the radiator cap and refill may damage the paint surface. drain plug securely.
as required.
WARNING
! Changing the coolant
Never attempt to remove the radia-
tor cap until the engine has been
shut off and has cooled down
completely. Since the coolant is
under pressure, you may suffer
serious burns from a spray of boil-
ing hot coolant when the cap is
removed.
4. Install the under cover.
3. After refilling the reserve tank and the

radiator, reinstall the caps and check that
the rubber gaskets inside the radiator cap Always add genuine Subaru cooling sys-
11
are in the proper position. tem conditioner whenever the coolant is
replaced.
CAUTION Change the engine coolant and add
. Be careful not to spill engine genuine Subaru cooling system condi-
coolant when adding it. If coolant tioner using the following procedures
touches the exhaust pipe, it may according to the maintenance schedule.
cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (304,1)
5. Slowly pour the coolant and fill up to

just below the filler neck, allowing enough
room to add genuine Subaru cooling
system conditioner in the radiator. Add
genuine Subaru cooling system condi-
tioner until the coolant level reaches the
filler neck. Do not pour the coolant too
quickly, as this may lead to insufficient air
bleeding and trapped air in the system.
Guideline of coolant quantity (including

coolant in reservoir tank):
Non-turbo models:
Non-turbo models MT: 7.3 US qt (6.9 liters, 6.1 Imp qt) 1) “FULL” level mark
1) Filler neck AT: 7.2 US qt (6.8 liters, 6.0 Imp qt) 2) “LOW” level mark
2) Fill up to this level
Turbo models: 6. Pour the coolant and fill to the reser-
MT: 7.8 US qt (7.4 liters, 6.5 Imp qt) voir tank’s “FULL” level mark.
AT: 7.7 US qt (7.3 liters, 6.4 Imp qt)
CAUTION
. Be careful not to spill engine
coolant when adding it. If coolant
touches the exhaust pipe, it may
a fire. If engine coolant gets on
the exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe
it off.
. Do not splash the engine coolant
over painted parts. The alcohol
Turbo models contained in the engine coolant
1) Filler neck may damage the paint surface.
2) Fill up to this level

Black plate (305,1)
Air cleaner element type air cleaner element.
WARNING
Do not operate the engine with the
air cleaner element removed. The air
cleaner element not only filters
intake air but also stops flames if
the engine backfires. If the air
cleaner element is not installed
when the engine backfires, you
could be burned.
7. Put the radiator cap back on and
tighten firmly. At this time, make sure that The air cleaner element functions as a 1) Embossed requirement
the rubber gasket in the radiator cap is filter screen. When the element is perfo-
rated or removed, engine wear will be
correctly in place.
excessive and engine life shortened. & Replacing the air cleaner
8. Start and run the engine for more than element
five minutes at 2,000 to 3,000 rpm. The air cleaner element has a viscous
type and a dry type. Replace the air cleaner element according
9. Stop the engine and wait until the to the maintenance schedule in the
coolant cools down (122 to 1408F [50 to Be sure to use the appropriate type of air “Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”. Un-
608C]). If there is any loss of coolant, add cleaner element, which depends on the der extremely dusty conditions, replace it
coolant to the radiator’s filler neck and to
the reserve tank’s “FULL” level.
vehicle type. more frequently. It is recommended that
you always use genuine SUBARU parts.
11
10. Put the radiator cap and reservoir cap If there is the embossed requirement “Use
back on and tighten firmly. of genuine dry air cleaner element is
required” on the air cleaner case cover,
which is shown in the following figure, use
the dry type air cleaner element.
For vehicles without the requirement on
the air cleaner case cover, use the viscous
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (306,1)
! Non-turbo models drawing.
5. To install the air cleaner case cover,

1) Air cleaner case cover insert the three projections on the air
1. Unsnap the two clamps holding the air 2) Viscous air cleaner element cleaner case into the slits on the air
cleaner case cover. Dry air cleaner element (if required)
cleaner case cover and then snap the
3. Open the air cleaner case cover and two clamps on the air cleaner case cover.
remove the air cleaner element.
4. Clean the inside of the air cleaner
cover and case with a damp cloth and
install a new air cleaner element.
2. Push the air cleaner case cover in the

direction of the arrow shown in the

Black plate (307,1)
! Turbo models 3. Clean the inside of the air cleaner Spark plugs
cover and case with a damp cloth and
install a new air cleaner element.
CAUTION
. When disconnecting the spark
plug cables, always grasp the
spark plug cap, not the cables.
. Make sure the cables are re-
placed in the correct order.
1. Unsnap the two clamps holding the air

cleaner case cover.
4. To install the air cleaner case cover,
insert the two projections on the air
cleaner case cover into the slits on the
air cleaner case and then snap the two
clamps on the air cleaner case cover.
11
It may be difficult to replace the spark
plugs. It is recommended that you have
the spark plugs replaced by your
SUBARU dealer.
The spark plugs should be replaced
2. Open the air cleaner case cover and according to the maintenance schedule
remove the air cleaner element. in the “Warranty and Maintenance Book-
let”.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (308,1)
in (mm)
& Recommended spark plugs Drive belts Deflection
New belt Used belt
Non-turbo models:
0.28 – 0.35 0.35 – 0.43
FR5AP-11 (NGK) A (7.0 – 9.0) (9.0 – 11.0)
Turbo models: 0.30 – 0.33 0.35 – 0.40
B (7.5 – 8.5) (9.0 – 10.0)
ILFR6B (NGK)
1) Power steering pump pulley

2) Air conditioner compressor pulley
3) Crank pulley
The alternator, power steering pump, and
air conditioner compressor depend on
drive belts. Satisfactory performance re-
quires that belt tension be correct.
To check belt tension, place a straight-
edge (ruler) across two adjacent pulleys
and apply a force of 22 lbs (98 N, 10 kg)
midway between the pulleys by using a
spring scale. Belt deflection should be the
amount specified. If a belt is loose,
cracked, or worn, contact your SUBARU
dealer.

Black plate (309,1)
Manual transmission oil

& Checking the oil level
Turbo models 1) Upper level

Check the oil level monthly. 2) Lower level
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and 3. Pull out the dipstick again and check
Non-turbo models: stop the engine. the oil level on it. If it is below the lower
1) Yellow handle 2. Pull out the dipstick, wipe it clean, and level, add oil through the dipstick hole to
insert it again. bring the level up to the upper level.
CAUTION
Be careful not to spill manual trans-
mission oil when adding it. If oil
11
cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or a
fire. If oil gets on the exhaust pipe,
be sure to wipe it off.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (310,1)
& Recommended grade and Automatic transmission fluid

viscosity
Each oil manufacturer has its own base & Checking the fluid level
oils and additives. Never use different The automatic transmission fluid expands
brands together. largely as its temperature rises; the fluid
level differs according to fluid temperature.
Oil grade: Therefore, there are two different scales
API classification GL-5 for checking the level of hot fluid and cold
fluid on the dipstick.
Though the fluid level can be checked
without warming up the fluid on the
“COLD” range, we recommend checking
the fluid level when the fluid is at operating 1) Yellow handle
temperature.
! Checking the fluid level when the
fluid is hot
Check the fluid level monthly.
1. Drive the vehicle several miles to raise
the temperature of the transmission fluid
up to normal operating temperature; 154
to 1768F (70 to 808C) is normal.
SAE viscosity No. and applicable tempera- 2. Park the vehicle on a level surface and
ture set the parking brake.
3. First shift the selector lever in each
position. Then shift it in the “P” position,
and run the engine at idling speed. 1) HOT range
2) COLD range
3) Upper level
4) Lower level

Black plate (311,1)
4. Pull out the dipstick and check the fluid & Recommended fluid Front differential gear oil (AT
level on the gauge. If it is below the lower
level on the “HOT” range, add the recom-
vehicles)
Use one of the following types of auto-
mended automatic transmission fluid up to matic transmission fluid. & Checking the oil level
the upper level. Genuine Subaru Automatic Transmis-
sion Fluid Type-HP
! Checking the fluid level when the
IDEMITSU ATF HP
fluid is cold
Castrol Transmax J
When the fluid level has to be checked
without time to warm up the automatic
transmission, check to see that the fluid NOTE
level is between the lower level and upper For optimum transmission perfor-
level on the “COLD” range. If it is below mance, only use the automatic trans-
that range, add fluid up to the upper level. mission fluid that is recommended and
Be careful not to overfill. provided by Subaru.
CAUTION If the recommended automatic trans-
mission fluid is unavailable, Dexron III
Be careful not to spill automatic may be temporarily used. If the Dexron 1) Yellow handle
transmission fluid when adding it. III is used continuously there will be a Check the differential oil level monthly.
If automatic transmission fluid noticeable increase in the vibration and
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and
touches the exhaust pipe, it may noise from the automatic transmission.
stop the engine.
2. Pull out the dipstick, wipe it clean, and
fire. If automatic transmission fluid
gets on the exhaust pipe, be sure to insert it again. 11
wipe it off.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (312,1)
& Recommended grade and Rear differential gear oil

viscosity
Each oil manufacturer has its own base & Checking the gear oil level
oils and additives. Never use different Your vehicle may be equipped with a rear
brands together. differential protector. The differential pro-
tector provides protection to the rear
Oil grade: differential assembly during off-road use.
API classification GL-5 Removal of the rear differential protector is
not required when checking the oil level.
1) Upper level
2) Lower level
3. Pull out the dipstick again and check

the oil level on it. If it is below the lower
level, add oil to bring the level up to the
upper level.
CAUTION
Be careful not to spill front differ- 1) Filler plug
SAE viscosity No. and applicable tempera-
ential gear oil when adding it. If oil ture 2) Drain plug
fire. If oil gets on the exhaust pipe,
be sure to wipe it off.

Black plate (313,1)
CAUTION
. Be careful not to spill rear differ-
ential gear oil when adding it. If
rear differential gear oil touches
the exhaust pipe, it may cause a
bad smell, smoke, and/or a fire. If
rear differential gear oil gets on
the exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe
it off.
. If the vehicle requires frequent
refilling, there may be an oil leak.
If you suspect a problem, have
1) Filler hole SAE viscosity No. and applicable tempera-
the vehicle checked at your ture
2) Drain hole
SUBARU dealer.
3) Oil level
Remove the plug from the filler hole and
check the oil level. The oil level should be & Recommended grade and
kept even with the bottom of the filler hole. viscosity
If the oil level is below the bottom edge of
Each oil manufacturer has its own base
the hole, add oil through the filler hole to
oils and additives. Never use different
raise the level.
brands together.
Oil grade:
11
API classification GL-5

Black plate (314,1)
Power steering fluid it in the tank.

. Be careful not to spill power
& Checking the fluid level steering fluid when adding it. If
power steering fluid touches the
exhaust pipe, it may cause a bad
smell, smoke, and/or a fire. If
power steering fluid gets on the
exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it
off.
The power steering fluid expands greatly

as its temperature rises; the fluid level
differs according to fluid temperature.
Therefore, the reservoir tank has two 1) Specified range
different checking ranges for hot and cold 2. Check the fluid level of the reservoir
fluids. tank.
1) Reservoir tank Check the power steering fluid level When the fluid is hot after the vehicle has
monthly. been run: Check that the oil level is
WARNING 1. Park the vehicle on a level surface, between “HOT MIN” and “HOT MAX” on
and stop the engine. the surface of the reservoir tank.
Be careful not to burn yourself When the fluid is cool before the vehicle is
because the fluid may be hot. run: Check that the oil level is between
“COLD MIN” and “COLD MAX” on the
surface of the reservoir tank.
CAUTION 3. If the fluid level is lower than the
. When power steering fluid is applicable “MIN” line, add the recom-
being added, use only clean fluid, mended fluid as necessary to bring the
and be careful not to allow any level between the “MIN” and “MAX” line.
dirt into the tank. And never use If the fluid level is extreme low, it may
different brands together. indicate possible leakage. Consult your
. Avoid spilling fluid when adding SUBARU dealer for an inspection.

Black plate (315,1)
& Recommended fluid Brake fluid . When adding brake fluid, be care-
ful not to allow any dirt into the
Use one of the following types of auto- & Checking the fluid level reservoir.
matic transmission fluid. . Never splash the brake fluid over
Genuine Subaru Automatic Transmis- WARNING painted surfaces or rubber parts.
sion Fluid Type-HP Alcohol contained in the brake
“Dexron III” Type Automatic Transmis- . Never let brake fluid contact your fluid may damage them.
sion Fluid eyes because brake fluid can be
. Be careful not to spill brake fluid
harmful to your eyes. If brake
when adding it. If brake fluid
fluid gets in your eyes, immedi-
ately flush them thoroughly with
clean water. For safety, when
a fire. If brake fluid gets on the
performing this work, wearing
exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it
eye protection is advisable.
off.
. Brake fluid absorbs moisture
from the air. Any absorbed moist-
ure can cause a dangerous loss
of braking performance.
refilling, there may be a leak. If
you suspect a problem, have the
vehicle checked at your SUBARU
dealer.
11
CAUTION
. Never use different brands of
brake fluid together. Also, avoid
Check the fluid level monthly.
mixing DOT 3 and DOT 4 brake
fluids even if they are of the same Check the fluid level on the outside of the
brand. reservoir. If the level is below “MIN”, add
the recommended brake fluid to “MAX”.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (316,1)
Use only brake fluid from a sealed Clutch fluid (MT vehicles) . Never splash the clutch fluid over
container. painted surfaces or rubber parts.
& Checking the fluid level Alcohol contained in the clutch
& Recommended brake fluid fluid may damage them.
WARNING . Be careful not to spill clutch fluid
FMVSS No. 116, fresh DOT 3 or 4 brake when adding it. If clutch fluid
fluid Never let clutch fluid contact your touches the exhaust pipe, it may
eyes because clutch fluid can be cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or
harmful to your eyes. If clutch fluid a fire. If clutch fluid gets on the
gets in your eyes, immediately flush exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it
them thoroughly with clean water. off.
For safety, when performing this
work, wearing eye protection is
advisable.
CAUTION
. Clutch fluid absorbs moisture
from the air. Any absorbed moist-
ure can cause improper clutch
operation.
refilling, there may be a leak. If
you suspect a problem, have the
vehicle checked at your SUBARU
Check the fluid level on the outside of the
dealer.
reservoir. If the level is below “MIN” level
. Never use different brands of mark, add the recommended clutch fluid
clutch fluid together. to “MAX” level mark.
. When clutch fluid is added, be Use only clutch fluid from a sealed
careful not to allow any dirt into container.
the tank.

Black plate (317,1)
& Recommended clutch fluid Brake booster Brake pedal

FMVSS No. 116, fresh DOT 3 or DOT 4 If the brake booster does not operate as Check the brake pedal free play and
brake fluid described in the following, have it checked reserve distance according to the main-
by your SUBARU dealer. tenance schedule in the “Warranty and
1. With the engine off, depress the brake Maintenance Booklet”.
CAUTION pedal several times, applying the same
pedal force each time. The distance the & Checking the brake pedal
Avoid mixing DOT 3 and DOT 4 pedal travels should not vary. free play
brake fluids even if they are of the 2. With the brake pedal depressed, start
same brand. the engine. The pedal should move
slightly down to the floor.
3. With the brake pedal depressed, stop
the engine and keep the pedal depressed
for 30 seconds. The pedal height should
not change.
4. Start the engine again and run for
approximately one minute then turn it off.
Depress the brake pedal several times to
check the brake booster. The brake
booster operates properly if the pedal
stroke decreases with each depression.
1) 0.02 – 0.08 in (0.5 – 2.0 mm)
11
Stop the engine and firmly depress the
brake pedal several times. Lightly press
the brake pedal down with one finger to
check the free play with a force of less
than 2 lbs (10 N, 1 kg).
If the free play is not within proper
specification, contact your SUBARU deal-
er.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (318,1)
& Checking the brake pedal Clutch pedal (MT vehicles) & Checking the clutch pedal
reserve distance free play
Check the clutch pedal free play and
reserve distance according to the main-
tenance schedule in the “Warranty and
Maintenance Booklet”.
& Checking the clutch function

Check the clutch engagement and disen-
gagement.
1. With the engine idling, check that there
are no abnormal noises when the clutch
pedal is depressed, and that shifting into
1st or reverse feels smooth.
2. Start the vehicle by releasing the pedal
1) More than 2.56 in (65 mm) slowly to check that the engine and 1) 0.15 – 0.44 in (4 – 11 mm)
Depress the pedal with a force of approxi- transmission smoothly couple without Lightly press the clutch pedal down with
mately 66 lbs (294 N, 30 kg) and measure any sign of slippage. your finger until you feel resistance, and
the distance between the upper surface of check the free play.
the pedal pad and the floor. If the free play is not within proper
When the measurement is smaller than specification, contact your SUBARU deal-
the specification, or when the pedal does er.
not operate smoothly, contact with your
SUBARU dealer.

Black plate (319,1)
Hill holder (MT vehicles – if Replacement of brake pad you apply the brake pedal, have the brake
pads serviced by your SUBARU dealer as
equipped) and lining soon as possible.
Ensure that the hill holder operates
properly under the following circum- CAUTION & Breaking-in of new brake
stances: pads and linings
If you continue to drive despite the When replacing the brake pad or lining,
1. Stop the vehicle on an uphill grade by
scraping noise from the audible use only genuine SUBARU parts. After
depressing the brake pedal and clutch
brake pad wear indicator, it will replacement, the new parts must be
pedal, with the engine running.
result in the need for costly brake broken in as follows:
2. Make sure that the vehicle does not rotor repair or replacement.
move backward even after the brake ! Brake pad and lining
pedal is released.
While maintaining a speed of 30 to 40
3. Then make sure the vehicle starts
mph (50 to 65 km/h), step on the brake
climbing the grade by following the normal
pedal lightly. Repeat this five or more
starting procedures.
times.
If the hill holder does not operate as ! Parking brake lining
described above, contact with your
SUBARU dealer. WARNING
A safe location and situation should
be selected for break-in driving.
11
CAUTION
The right front disc brake and the right rear
disc brake have audible wear indicators Pulling the parking brake lever too
on the brake pads. If the brake pads wear forcefully may cause the rear
close to their service limit, the wear wheels to lock. To avoid this, be
indicator makes a very audible scraping certain to pull the lever up slowly
noise when the brake pedal is applied. and gently.
If you hear this scraping noise each time
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (320,1)
1. Drive the vehicle at a speed of Parking brake stroke Tires and wheels
approximately 22 mph (35 km/h).
2. With the parking brake release button & Types of tires
pushed in, pull the parking brake lever You should be familiar with type of tires
SLOWLY and GENTLY. (Pulling with a present on your vehicle.
force of approximately 33 lbs [147 N, 15
kg].) ! All season tires
3. Drive the vehicle for approximately The factory-installed tires on your new
220 yards (200 meters) in this condition. vehicle are all season tires.
4. Wait 5 to 10 minutes for the parking All season tires are designed to provide
brake to cool down. Repeat this proce- an adequate measure of traction, handling
dure. and braking performance in year-round
5. Check the parking brake stroke. If the driving including snowy and icy road
parking brake stroke is out of the specified conditions. However all season tires do
range, adjust it by turning the adjusting nut not offer as much traction performance as
located on the parking brake lever. Check the parking brake stroke according winter (snow) tires in heavy or loose snow
to the maintenance schedule in the or on icy roads.
“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”. All season tires are identified by “ALL
Parking brake stroke: When the parking brake is properly SEASON” and/or “M+S” (Mud & Snow) on
7 – 8 notches / 44 lbs (196 N, 20 kg) adjusted, braking power is fully applied the tire sidewall.
by pulling the lever up seven to eight
! Summer tires
notches gently but firmly (approximately
44 lbs, 196 N, 20 kg). If the parking brake Summer tires are high-speed capability
lever stroke is not within the specified tires best suited for highway driving under
range, have the brake system checked dry conditions.
and adjusted at your SUBARU dealer. Summer tires are inadequate for driving
on slippery roads such as on snow-
covered or icy roads.
If you drive your vehicle on snow-covered
or icy roads, we strongly recommend the
use of winter (snow) tires.
When installing winter tires, be sure to

Black plate (321,1)
replace all four tires. the temperature in the garage and the
Outside Adjusted pressure
! Winter (snow) tires temperature outside. By way of example, temperature [psi (kPa, kgf/cm2)]
the following table shows the required tire
Winter tires are best suited for driving on pressures that correspond to various out- front rear
snow-covered and icy roads. However side temperatures when the temperature 308F (−18C) 35 (240, 2.4) 33 (230, 2.3)
winter tires do not perform as well as in the garage is 608F (15.68C).
summer tires and all season tires on roads 108F (−128C) 37 35
Example: (255, 2.55) (240, 2.4)
other than snow-covered and icy roads.
Tire size: P215/60R16 94H −108F 39 (270, 2.7) 37 (255, 2.55)
& Tire pressure monitoring Standard tire pressures: (−238C)
system (TPMS) (if equipped) Front: 29 psi (200 kPa, 2.0 kgf/cm2) If the low tire pressure warning light
The tire pressure monitoring system pro- Rear: 28 psi (190 kPa, 1.9 kgf/cm2) comes on when you drive the vehicle in
vides the driver with a warning message Garage temperature: 608F (15.68C) cold outside air after adjusting the tire
by sending a signal from a sensor that is pressures in a warm garage, re-adjust the
Outside Adjusted pressure
installed in each wheel when tire pressure temperature [psi (kPa, kgf/cm2)]
tire pressures using the method described
is severely low. The tire pressure monitor- above. Then, increase the vehicle speed
front rear to at least 20 mph (32 km/h) and check to
ing system will activate only when the
vehicle is driven. Also, this system may 308F (−18C) 32 (220, 2.2) 31 (215, 2.15) see that the low tire pressure warning light
not react immediately to a sudden drop in 108F (−128C) 34 33 goes off a few minutes later. If the low tire
tire pressure (for example, a blow-out (235, 2.35) (230, 2.3) pressure warning light does not go off, the
caused by running over a sharp object). tire pressure monitoring system may not
−108F 36 (250, 2.5) 35 (240, 2.4)
(−238C) be functioning normally. In this event, go
If you adjust the tire pressures in a warm to a SUBARU dealer to have the system
garage and will then drive the vehicle in
cold outside air, the resulting drop in tire
Example: inspected as soon as possible. 11
pressures may cause the low tire pressure Tire size: P215/55R17 93H While the vehicle is driven, friction be-
warning light to come on. To avoid this Standard tire pressures: tween tires and the road surface causes
problem when adjusting the tire pressures Front: 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2) the tires to warm up. After illumination of
in a warm garage, inflate the tires to Rear: 30 psi (210 kPa, 2.1 kgf/cm2) the low tire pressure warning light, any
pressures higher than those shown on the Garage temperature: 608F (15.68C) increase in the tire pressures caused by
tire placard. Specifically, inflate them by an an increase in the outside air temperature
extra 1 psi (6.9 kPa, 0.07 kgf/cm2) for or by an increase in the temperature in the
every difference of 108F (5.68C) between tires can cause the low tire pressure
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (322,1)
warning light to go off. ignition switch is turned ON or the for tire and sensor replacement and/
light illuminates steadily after blink- or system resetting. If the light
System resetting is necessary when the
ing for approximately one minute, illuminates steadily after blinking
wheels are changed (for example, a
you should have your Tire Pressure for approximately one minute,
switch to snow tires) and new TPMS
Monitoring System checked at a promptly contact a SUBARU dealer
valves are installed on the newly fitted
SUBARU dealer as soon as possi- to have the system inspected.
wheels. Have this work performed by a
ble.
SUBARU dealer following wheel replace-
ment. If this light comes on while driving,
never brake suddenly and keep & Tire inspection
It may not be possible to install TPMS driving straight ahead while gradu- Check on a daily basis that the tires are
valves on certain wheels that are on the ally reducing speed. Then slowly free from serious damage, nails, and
market. Therefore, if you change the pull off the road to a safe place. stones. At the same time, check the tires
wheels (for example, a switch to snow Otherwise an accident involving for abnormal wear.
tires), use wheels that have the same part serious vehicle damage and serious Contact your SUBARU dealer immedi-
number as the standard-equipment personal injury could occur. ately if you find any problem.
wheels. Without four operational TPMS
If this light still comes on while
valve/sensors on the wheels, the TPMS NOTE
driving after adjusting the tire pres-
will not fully function and the warning light . When the wheels and tires strike
sure, a tire may have significant
in the instrument panel will illuminate curbs or are subjected to harsh treat-
damage and a fast leak that causes
steadily after blinking for approximately ment as when the vehicle is driven on a
the tire to lose air rapidly. If you have
one minute. rough surface, they can suffer damage
a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire
When a tire is replaced, adjustments are as soon as possible. that cannot be seen with the naked eye.
necessary to ensure continued normal When a spare tire is mounted or a This type of damage does not become
operation of the tire pressure monitoring wheel rim is replaced without the evident until time has passed. Try not
system. As with wheel replacement, there- original pressure sensor/transmitter to drive over curbs, potholes or on
fore, you should have the work performed being transferred, the low tire pres- other rough surfaces. If doing so is
by a SUBARU dealer. sure warning light will illuminate unavoidable, keep the vehicle’s speed
steadily after blinking for approxi- down to a walking pace or less, and
WARNING mately one minute. This indicates approach the curbs as squarely as
the TPMS is unable to monitor all possible. Also, make sure the tires are
If the low tire pressure warning light not pressed against the curb when you
four road wheels. Contact your
does not come on briefly after the park the vehicle.
SUBARU dealer as soon as possible

Black plate (323,1)
. If you feel unusual vibration while the tire pressures to the values shown on trollability and ride comfort, and they
driving or find it difficult to steer the the tire placard. The tire placard is located cause the tires to wear abnormally.
vehicle in a straight line, one of the on the door pillar on the driver’s side. . Correct tire pressure (tread worn
tires and/or wheels may be damaged. evenly)
Drive slowly to the nearest authorized Driving even a short distance warms up
SUBARU dealer and have the vehicle the tires and increases the tire pressures.
inspected. Also, the tire pressures are affected by the
outside temperature. It is best to check tire
pressure outdoors before driving the
& Tire pressures and wear vehicle.
Maintaining the correct tire pressures When a tire becomes warm, the air inside
helps to maximize the tires’ service lives it expands, causing the tire pressure to
and is essential for good running perfor- increase. Be careful not to mistakenly
mance. Check and, if necessary, adjust release air from a warm tire to reduce its
the pressure of each tire (including the pressure.
spare) at least once a month (for example,
during a fuel stop) and before any long NOTE
journey. . The air pressure in a tire increases Roadholding is good, and steering is
by approximately 4.3 psi (30 kPa, 0.3 responsive. Rolling resistance is low, so
kgf/cm2) when the tire becomes warm. fuel consumption is also lower.
. The tires are considered cold when
the vehicle has been parked for at least
three hours or has been driven less
than one mile (1.6 km). 11
WARNING
Do not let air out of warm tires to
adjust pressure. Doing so will result
in low tire pressure.
Check the tire pressures when the tires Incorrect tire pressures detract from con-
are cold. Use a pressure gauge to adjust
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (324,1)
. Abnormally low tire pressure (tread . Abnormally high tire pressure (tread tread separation, and destruction of
worn at shoulders) worn in center) the tires. The resulting loss of
vehicle control could lead to an
accident.
& Wheel balance

Each wheel was correctly balanced when
your vehicle was new, but the wheels will
become unbalanced as the tires become
worn during use. Wheel imbalance causes
the steering wheel to vibrate slightly at
certain vehicle speeds and detracts from
the vehicle’s straight-line stability. It can
also cause steering and suspension sys-
Rolling resistance is high, so fuel con- Ride comfort is poor. Also, the tire tem problems and abnormal tire wear. If
sumption is also higher. magnifies the effects of road-surface you suspect that the wheels are not
bumps and dips, possibly resulting in correctly balanced, have them checked
vehicle damage. and adjusted by your SUBARU dealer.
If the tire placard shows tire pressures for Also have them adjusted after tire repairs
the vehicle when fully loaded and for the and after tire rotation.
vehicle when towing a trailer, adjust the NOTE
tire pressures to the values that match
current loading conditions. Loss of correct wheel alignment*
causes the tires to wear on one side
WARNING and reduces the vehicle’s running
stability. Contact your SUBARU dealer
Driving at high speeds with exces- if you notice abnormal tire wear.
sively low tire pressures can cause *: The suspension system is designed to hold
the tires to deform severely and to each wheel at a certain alignment (relative to
rapidly become hot. A sharp in- the other wheels and to the road) for optimum
crease in temperature could cause straight-line stability and cornering perfor-

Black plate (325,1)
mance. a tire in this condition, driving at When you install a tire that has the tire
high speeds in wet weather can rotation direction mark, install the tire with
& Wear indicators cause the vehicle to hydroplane. the direction mark facing forward.
The resulting loss of vehicle control
can lead to an accident. & Tire rotation
NOTE
For safety, inspect tire tread regularly
and replace the tires before their tread
wear indicators become visible.
& Tire rotation direction mark
1) New tread
2) Worn tread
3) Tread wear indicator Vehicles equipped with 4 non-unidirec-
tional tires
Each tire incorporates a tread wear 1) Front
indicator, which becomes visible when
the depth of the tread grooves decreases
to 0.063 in (1.6 mm). A tire must be
replaced when the tread wear indicator
11
appears as a solid band across the tread.
WARNING Example of tire rotation direction mark

1) Front
When a tire’s tread wear indicator
becomes visible, the tire is worn If the tire has the rotation direction
beyond the acceptable limit and specification, the tire rotation direction
must be replaced immediately. With mark is placed on its sidewall.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (326,1)
& Tire replacement WARNING

The wheels and tires are important and
integral parts of your vehicle’s design; . All four tires must be the same in
they cannot be changed arbitrarily. The terms of manufacturer, brand
tires fitted as standard equipment are (tread pattern), construction, de-
optimally matched to the characteristics gree of wear, speed symbol, load
of the vehicle and were selected to give index and size. Mixing tires of
the best possible combination of running different types, sizes or degrees
performance, ride comfort, and service of wear can result in damage to
life. It is essential for every tire to have a vehicle’s power train. Use of
size and construction matching those different types or sizes of tires
shown on the tire placard and to have a can also dangerously reduce
speed symbol and load index matching controllability and braking per-
Vehicles equipped with unidirectional tires formance and can lead to an
those shown on the tire placard.
1) Front accident.
Tire wear varies from wheel to wheel. To Using tires of a non-specified size detracts . Use only radial tires. Do not use
maximize the life of each tire and ensure from controllability, ride comfort, braking radial tires together with belted
that the tires wear uniformly, it is best to performance, speedometer accuracy and bias tires and/or bias-ply tires.
rotate the tires every 7,500 miles (12,000 odometer accuracy. It also creates incor- Doing so can dangerously re-
km). Move the tires to the positions shown rect body-to-tire clearances and inappro- duce controllability, resulting in
in the illustration each time they are priately changes the vehicle’s ground an accident.
rotated. clearance.
Replace any damaged or unevenly worn All four tires must be the same in terms of
tire at the time of rotation. After tire manufacturer, brand (tread pattern), con- & Wheel replacement
rotation, adjust the tire pressures and struction, and size. You are advised to When replacing wheels due, for example,
make sure the wheel nuts are correctly replace the tires with new ones that are to damage, make sure the replacement
tightened. identical to those fitted as standard equip- wheels match the specifications of the
ment. wheels that are fitted as standard equip-
After driving approximately 600 miles
(1,000 km), check the wheel nuts again For safe vehicle operation, SUBARU ment. Replacement wheels are available
and retighten any nut that has become recommends replacing all four tires at from SUBARU dealers.
loose. the same time.

Black plate (327,1)
WARNING Aluminum wheels (if Windshield washer fluid

equipped)
Use only those wheels that are
specified for your vehicle. Wheels Aluminum wheels can be scratched and CAUTION
not meeting specifications could damaged easily. Handle them carefully to
interfere with brake caliper opera- Never use engine coolant as washer
maintain their appearance, performance,
tion and may cause the tires to rub fluid because it could cause paint
and safety.
against the wheel well housing dur- damage.
ing turns. The resulting loss of . When any of the wheels is removed
vehicle control could lead to an and replaced for tire rotation or to change
accident. a flat, always check the tightness of the
wheel nuts after driving approximately 600
miles (1,000 km). If any nut is loose,
tighten it to the specified torque.
. Never apply oil to the threaded parts,
wheel nuts, or tapered surface of the
wheel.
. Never let the wheel rub against sharp
protrusions or curbs.
. Be sure to fit tire chains on uniformly
and completely around the tire, otherwise
the chains may scratch the wheel.
If you spray washer fluid on the windshield
. When wheel nuts, balance weights, or
the center cap is replaced, be sure to
but the supply of washer fluid appears to 11
diminish, check the level of washer fluid in
replace them with genuine SUBARU parts
the tank.
designed for aluminum wheels.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (328,1)
level gauge or the “Full” mark on the tank. used previously, purge the old fluid from
Use windshield washer fluid. If windshield the piping between the reservoir tank and
washer fluid is unavailable use clean washer nozzles by operating the washer
water. for a certain period of time. Otherwise, if
In areas where water freezes in winter, the concentration of the fluid remaining in
use an anti-freeze type windshield washer the piping is too low for the outside
fluid. SUBARU Windshield Washer Fluid temperature, it may freeze and block the
contains 58.5% methyl alcohol and 41.5% nozzles.
surfactant, by volume. Its freezing tem-
perature varies according to how much it CAUTION
is diluted, as indicated in the following Adjust the washer fluid concentra-
table. tion appropriately for the outside
Washer fluid level gauge Washer Fluid Freezing
temperature. If the concentration is
Concentration Temperature inappropriate, sprayed washer fluid
may freeze on the windshield and
30% 10.48F (−128C) obstruct your view, and the fluid
50% −48F (−208C) may freeze in the reservoir tank.
100% −498F (−458C)
CAUTION
Never use engine coolant as washer
fluid because it could cause paint
damage.
In order to prevent freezing of washer

Remove the washer tank filler cap, then fluid, check the freezing temperatures in
check the fluid level indicated by the level the table above when adjusting the fluid
gauge (attached to the inside of the cap). concentration to the outside temperature.
If the level is near the “Low” mark, add If you fill the reservoir tank with a fluid with
fluid until it reaches the “Hi” level on the a different concentration from the one

Black plate (329,1)
Replacement of wiper blades & Windshield wiper blades

1. Raise the wiper arm off the windshield.
Grease, wax, insects, or other material on
the windshield or the wiper blade results in
jerky wiper operation and streaking on the
glass. If you cannot remove the streaks
after operating the windshield washer or if
the wiper operation is jerky, clean the
outer surface of the windshield (or rear
window) and the wiper blades using a
sponge or soft cloth with a neutral
detergent or mild abrasive cleaner. After
cleaning, rinse the windshield and wiper
blades with clean water. The windshield is 1) Metal support
clean if beads do not form when you rinse
3. Grasp the locked end of the blade
the windshield with water.
1) Stopper rubber assembly and pull it firmly until the
CAUTION stoppers on the rubber are free of the
2. Remove the wiper blade assembly by metal support.
holding its pivot area and pushing it in the
Do not clean the wiper blades with
direction shown by the arrow while de-
gasoline or a solvent, such as paint
pressing the wiper blade stopper.
thinner or benzene. This will cause
deterioration of the wiper blades.
If you cannot eliminate the streaking even 11

after following this method, replace the
wiper blades using the following proce-
dures:
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (330,1)
with the grooves in the rubber and slide & Rear window wiper blade
the blade rubber assembly into the metal
support until it locks. 1. Raise the wiper arm off the rear
window.
1) Metal spines
4. If the new blade rubber is not provided

with two metal spines, remove the metal 1) Stopper
spines from the old blade rubber and 2. Turn the wiper blade assembly coun-
install them in the new blade rubber. Be sure to position the claws at the end of terclockwise.
the metal support between the stoppers
on the rubber as shown. If the rubber is
not retained properly, the wiper blade may
scratch the windshield.
6. Install the wiper blade assembly to the
wiper arm. Make sure that it locks in place.
7. Lower the wiper arm.
5. Align the claws of the metal support

Black plate (331,1)
3. Having turned the wiper blade assem- install them in the new blade rubber.
bly to the angle shown in the illustration,
pull it in the direction of the arrow to
remove it from the wiper arm.
5. Pull the blade rubber assembly out of

the plastic support. 7. Align the claws of the plastic support
with the grooves in the blade rubber
assembly, then slide the blade rubber
1) Plastic support assembly into place.
4. Pull out the end of the blade rubber
assembly to unlock it from the plastic
support.
11
1) Metal spines
6. If the new blade rubber is not provided

with two metal spines, remove the metal
spines from the old blade rubber and Securely lock the end of the plastic
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (332,1)
support as shown in the illustration. If the Battery remove rings, metal watchbands,
rubber is not retained properly, the wiper and other metal jewelry. Never
may scratch the rear window glass. allow metal tools to contact the
8. Install the wiper blade assembly to the WARNING positive battery terminal and any-
wiper arm. Make sure that it locks in place. thing connected to it WHILE you
9. Lower the wiper arm. . Before beginning work on or near are at the same time in contact
any battery, be sure to extinguish with any other metallic portion of
all cigarettes, matches, and light- the vehicle because a short cir-
ers. Never expose a battery to an cuit will result.
open flame or electric sparks.
. Keep everyone including children
Batteries give off a gas which is
away from the battery.
highly flammable and explosive.
. Charge the battery in a well-
. For safety, in case an explosion
ventilated area.
does occur, wear eye protection
or shield your eyes when work- . Battery posts, terminals and re-
ing near any battery. Never lean lated accessories contain lead
over a battery. and lead compounds, chemicals
known to the State of California
. Do not let battery fluid contact
to cause cancer and reproductive
eyes, skin, fabrics, or paint be-
harm. Batteries also contain
cause battery fluid is a corrosive
other chemicals known to the
acid. If battery fluid gets on your
State of California to cause can-
skin or in your eyes, immediately
cer. Wash hands after handling.
flush the area with water thor-
oughly. Seek medical help imme-
diately if acid has entered the CAUTION
eyes.
If battery fluid is accidentally Never use more than 10 amperes
swallowed, immediately drink a when charging the battery because
large amount of milk or water, it will shorten battery life.
and seek medical attention im-
mediately.
. To lessen the risk of sparks,

Black plate (333,1)
Fuses
CAUTION
Never replace a fuse with one hav-
ing a higher rating or with material
other than a fuse because serious
damage or a fire could result.
The fuses are designed to melt during an

overload to prevent damage to the wiring
harness and electrical equipment. The
1) Cap fuses are located in two fuse boxes. The other one is housed in the engine
2) Upper level compartment.
3) Lower level
It is unnecessary to periodically check the
battery fluid level or periodically refill with
distilled water.
However, if the battery fluid level is below
the lower level, remove the cap. Fill to the
upper level with distilled water.
11
One is located under the instrument panel

behind the cover on the driver’s seat side. 1) Fuse puller
To remove the cover, pull it out. 2) Spare fuse
The fuse puller and spare fuses are stored
in the main fuse box cover in the engine
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (334,1)
compartment. Main fuse
4. Pull out the fuse with the fuse puller.

1) Good 5. Inspect the fuse. If it has blown,
2) Blown replace it with a spare fuse of the same Main fuse box
If any lights, accessories or other electrical rating. The main fuses are designed to melt
controls do not operate, inspect the 6. If the same fuse blows again, this during an overload to prevent damage to
corresponding fuse. If a fuse has blown, indicates that its system has a problem. the wiring harness and electrical equip-
replace it. Contact your SUBARU dealer for repairs. ment. Check the main fuses if any
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK” electrical component fails to operate (ex-
position and turn off all electrical acces- cept the starter motor) and other fuses are
sories. good. A melted main fuse must be
2. Remove the cover. replaced. Use only replacements with the
same specified rating as the melted main
3. Determine which fuse may be blown.
fuse. If a main fuse blows after it is
The back side of each fuse box cover and
replaced, have the electrical system
the “Fuses and circuits” section in chapter
checked by your nearest SUBARU dealer.
12 in this manual show the circuit for each
fuse.

Black plate (335,1)
Installation of accessories
Always consult your SUBARU dealer
before installing fog lights or any other
electrical equipment in your vehicle. Such
accessories may cause the electronic
system to malfunction if they are incor-
rectly installed or if they are not suited for
the vehicle.
11

Black plate (336,1)
Replacing bulbs

Black plate (337,1)
Wattage Bulb No. CAUTION

1) High beam headlight 12V-60W 9005 (HB3) Replace any bulb only with a new
2) Low beam headlight bulb of the specified wattage. Using
a bulb of different wattage could
Vehicle with HID headlights 12V-35W D2R
result in a fire.
Vehicle without HID headlights 12V-55W H1
3) Front turn signal light 12V-21W (Amber) 1474

4) Map light 12V-8W –
5) Dome light 12V-8W –
6) Side marker light (Front) 12V-5W 168
7) Front fog light 12V-51W 9006 (HB4)
8) Parking light 12V-5W 168
9) High mount stop light 12V-13W 912
10) Cargo area light 12V-5W –
11) Tail/stop light 12V-21/5W 7443
12) Backup light 12V-16W 921
13) Rear turn signal light 12V-21W (Amber) 1474
14) Tail/stop light 12V-21/5W 7443
15) License plate light 12V-5W 168 11
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (338,1)
& Headlights (Vehicle with HID the bulb surface with bare hands or the screw that retains the windshield
headlights) greasy gloves, finger prints or washer nozzle and tip the windshield
grease on the bulb surface will washer nozzle sideways.
WARNING develop into hot spots and cause ! Low beam light bulbs
the bulb to break. If there are finger
High-intensity-discharge (HID) bulbs prints or grease on the bulb surface,
are used for the low beams of the wipe them away with a soft cloth
headlights on the Canada-spec. moistened with alcohol.
2.5XT. These HID bulbs use an
extremely high voltage. To avoid
the risk of an electric shock and NOTE
resulting serious injury, you should . If headlight aiming is required, con-
not attempt to replace them. Neither sult your SUBARU dealer for proper
should you attempt to replace the adjustment of the headlight aim.
high-beam bulbs, remove/refit the . It may be difficult to replace the
headlight assemblies, or remove bulbs. Have your SUBARU dealer re-
any headlight-assembly compo- place the bulbs if necessary.
nents. For replacement of the head-
light bulbs (low-beam and high- 1. Remove the bulb cover, by turning it
beam), removal and installation of counterclockwise.
the headlight assemblies, and re-
moval of headlight-assembly com-
ponents, contact your SUBARU
dealer.
& Headlights (Vehicle without

HID headlights)
CAUTION
Halogen headlight bulbs become Before replacing the left-hand (battery-
very hot while in use. If you touch side) low- or high-beam light bulb, remove

Black plate (339,1)
securely. 2. Remove the bulb from the headlight

5. Install the bulb cover. assembly by turning it counterclockwise.
3. Replace the bulb with new one.
! High beam light bulbs 4. Reconnect the electrical connector. At
this time, use care not to touch the bulb
surface.
5. To install the bulb to the headlight
assembly, turn it clockwise until it clicks.
2. Remove the retainer spring, then pull

out the bulb and electrical connector unit.
1. Disconnect the electrical connector

from the bulb.
11
3. Disconnect the electrical connector

from the bulb.
4. Install a new bulb into the electrical
connector, then set the retainer spring
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (340,1)
& Rear combination lights & License plate light
1) Tail/stop light
2) Backup light
1. Remove the upper and lower screws. 3) Rear turn signal light 1. Remove the mounting screws using a
Then, slide the rear combination lamp 4) Tail/stop light Phillips screwdriver.
assembly to the rear and remove it from 2. Remove the cover and lens.
the vehicle. 2. Remove the bulb holder from the rear
combination light assembly by turning it 3. Pull the bulb out of the socket. Install a
counterclockwise. new bulb.
3. Pull the bulb from the holder. Install a 4. Reinstall the lens and cover.
new bulb. 5. Tighten the mounting screws.
4. Set the bulb holder into the rear
combination light assembly and turn it
clockwise until it locks.
5. Reinstall the rear combination light
assembly.

Black plate (341,1)
& Dome light and map light 2. Pull the bulb out of the socket. Install a
new bulb.
3. Reinstall the lens.
& High mount stop light
Dome light
1. Remove the mounting screws using a

Phillips screwdriver and then remove the
high mount stop light cover.
2. Pull the bulb from the socket. Install a
new bulb. 11
3. Reinstall the cover.
4. Tighten the mounting screws then
reinstall the covers.
Map light NOTE

1. Remove the lens by prying the edge of Other bulbs may be difficult to replace.
the lens with a flat-head screwdriver. Have your SUBARU dealer replace
these bulbs if necessary.

Black plate (2,1)
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
Left Page
Black plate (23,1)
Specifications
Specifications ..................................................... 12-2 Fuses and circuits ............................................. 12-6

Dimensions........................................................ 12-2 Fuse panel located behind the instrument
Engine ............................................................... 12-3 panel ............................................................... 12-6
Electrical system................................................ 12-3 Fuse panel located in the engine
Capacities .......................................................... 12-4 compartment ................................................... 12-8
Tires .................................................................. 12-5 Bulb chart........................................................... 12-9
Wheel alignment ................................................ 12-5 Vehicle identification ....................................... 12-10
12

Black plate (344,1)
12-2 Specifications
Specifications
These specifications are subject to change without notice.
& Dimensions
in (mm)
Item 2.5-liter non-turbo models 2.5-liter turbo models
Drive system AWD
Transmission type AT MT AT MT
Overall length 176.6 (4,485)
Overall width 68.3 (1,735)
Overall height 62.6 (1,590) 62.4 (1,585)
Wheel base 99.4 (2,525)
Tread Front 58.9 (1,495)
Rear 58.5 (1,485)
1
Ground clearance* 8.07 (205) 7.87 (200)
*1: Measured with vehicle empty

AT: Automatic transmission
MT: Manual transmission

Black plate (345,1)
Specifications 12-3
& Engine
Engine model EJ253 (2.5-liter, SOHC, non-turbo) EJ255 (2.5-liter, DOHC, turbo)
Engine type Horizontally opposed, liquid cooled 4 cylinder, 4 stroke gasoline engine
Displacement cc (cu-in) 2,457 (150)
Bore 6 Stroke in (mm) 3.92 6 3.11 (99.5 6 79.0)
Compression ratio 10.0 : 1 8.4 : 1
Firing order 1–3–2–4
& Electrical system

Battery type and capacity (5HR) MT models 12V-48AH (55D23L)
AT models 12V-52AH (75D23L)
Alternator 2.5-liter non-turbo models 12V-90A
2.5-liter turbo models 12V-110A
Spark plugs 2.5-liter non-turbo models FR5AP-11 (NGK)
2.5-liter turbo models ILFR6A (NGK)
12
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (346,1)
12-4 Specifications
& Capacities
Fuel tank 15.9 US gal (60 liters, 13.2 Imp gal)
Engine oil 4.2 US qt (4.0 liters, 3.5 Imp qt)
Transmission oil MT 3.7 US qt (3.5 liters, 3.1 Imp qt)
AT 9.8 US qt (9.3 liters, 8.2 Imp qt)
Front differential gear oil (AT) 1.3 US qt (1.2 liter, 1.1 Imp qt)
Rear differential gear oil 0.8 US qt (0.8 liter, 0.7 Imp qt)
Power steering fluid 0.7 US qt (0.7 liter, 0.6 Imp qt)
Engine coolant 2.5-liter non-turbo models MT 7.3 US qt (6.9 liters, 6.1 Imp qt)
2.5-liter turbo models MT 7.8 US qt (7.4 liters, 6.5 Imp qt)
AT: Automatic transmission

MT: Manual transmission

Black plate (347,1)
Specifications 12-5
& Tires
Tire size P215/60R16 94H P215/55R17 93H
Wheel size 16 6 6 /2 JJ or 16 6 6 /2 J
1 1
17 6 7 JJ
2
Pressure Front Light load 29 psi (200 kPa, 2.0 kgf/cm ) 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2)
2
Full load 29 psi (200 kPa, 2.0 kgf/cm ) 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2)
Rear Light load 28 psi (190 kPa, 1.9 kgf/cm2) 30 psi (210 kPa, 2.1 kgf/cm2)
Full load 36 psi (250 kPa, 2.5 kgf/cm2) 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2)
2
Trailer towing 41 psi (280 kPa, 2.8 kgf/cm ) 36 psi (250 kPa, 2.5 kgf/cm2)
Temporary Size T135/80D16 T135/90D16
spare tire
Pressure 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2)
NOTE
. For the Canada specification non-turbo models, there is a conventional tire installed under the floor of the cargo area.
. For the temporary spare tire, T135/80D16 or T135/90D16 is equipped to the vehicle.
& Wheel alignment

Item 2.5-liter non-turbo models 2.5-liter turbo models
Drive system AWD
Toe Front 0 + 0.12 in (0 + 3 mm)
12
Rear 0.079 + 0.12 in (2 + 3 mm)
Camber Front −0825’ + 45’
Rear −0850’ + 45’ −0855’ + 45’

Black plate (348,1)
12-6 Specifications
Fuses and circuits Fuse Fuse

Circuit
panel rating
& Fuse panel located behind the instrument panel
1 15A . Heater fan
2 15A . Heater fan
3 15A . Power door lock

. Remote keyless entry
4 15A . Power outlet (front)
. Remote controlled rear
view mirrors
5 10A . Tail light
. Parking light
6 15A . SRS airbag
7 15A . Fog light
8 30A . ABS
. Vehicle Dynamics Con-
trol system (models
with Vehicle Dynamics
Control system only)
9 15A . Radio
10 10A –
11 15A . Engine ignition system
. SRS airbag
. AT control system
12 10A . Illumination brightness
control
13 20A . Wiper deicer
. Outside mirror defogger

Black plate (349,1)
Specifications 12-7
Fuse Fuse
Circuit
panel rating
14 10A . Meter
15 30A . Windshield wiper and
washer
16 20A . Brake light
17 15A . Air conditioner
18 15A . Backup light
. Cruise control
19 15A . Power outlet (cargo)
20 15A . Rear window wiper and
washer
21 15A . Ignition coil (non-turbo
model only)
22 15A . Seat heater
23 Empty
12
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (350,1)
12-8 Specifications
& Fuse panel located in the engine compartment Fuse Fuse

Circuit
panel rating
1 30A . Radiator cooling fan
(main)
2 30A . Radiator cooling fan
(sub)
3 50A . Vehicle Dynamics Con-
trol system (models with
Vehicle Dynamics Con-
trol system only)
30A . ABS motor
4 30A . Engine sensor (non-turbo
models only)
5 20A . Rear window defogger
6 15A . Hazard warning flasher
. Horn
7 15A . Turn signal lights
8 10A . Automatic transmission
control unit
9 10A . Alternator
10 15A . Headlight (right side)
11 15A . Headlight (left side)
12 20A . Lighting switch
A) FWD socket (AT models without Vehicle Dynamics Control system) 13 15A . Clock
B) Main fuse . Interior light

Black plate (351,1)
Specifications 12-9
Fuse Fuse
Bulb chart
Circuit
panel rating
14 10A . Secondary air combina- Description Wattage Bulb No.
tion valve (turbo models
only) Headlight
High beam 12V-60W 9005 (HB3)
Low beam
Vehicle with HID headlights 12V-35W D2R
Vehicle without HID head- 12V-55W H1
lights
Front fog light 12V-51W 9006 (HB4)
Front turn signal light 12V-21W 1474
Parking light 12V-5W 168
Side marker light (Front) 12V-5W 168
Rear combination light
Tail/stop light 12V-21/5W 7443
Turn signal light 12V-21W (amber) 1474
Backup light 12V-16W 921
High mount stop light 12V-13W 912
License plate light 12V-5W 168
Cargo area light 12V-5W –
Dome light 12V-8W – 12
Map light 12V-8W –

Black plate (352,1)
12-10 Specifications
1) Vehicle identification number

Vehicle identification 2) Emission control label
3) Vehicle identification number plate
4) Tire inflation pressure plate
5) Certification label
Bar code label (U.S. only)
6) Model number label
7) Radio noise label (Canada only)
8) Fuel label

Black plate (25,1)
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
For U.S.A. ........................................................... 13-2 Adverse safety consequences of overloading on

Tire information .................................................. 13-2 handling and stopping and on tires ................ 13-11
Tire labeling ....................................................... 13-2 Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit......... 13-11
Recommended tire inflation pressure.................. 13-5 Uniform tire quality grading standards .......... 13-12
Glossary of tire terminology ............................... 13-6 Treadwear ....................................................... 13-12
Tire care – maintenance and safety practices...... 13-7 Traction AA, A, B, C......................................... 13-12
Vehicle load limit – how to determine.................. 13-8 Temperature A, B, C......................................... 13-13
Determining compatibility of tire and vehicle load Reporting safety defects (USA) ...................... 13-14
capacities ...................................................... 13-11
13

Black plate (356,1)
13-2 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
For U.S.A. Tire information Example:
The following information has been & Tire labeling

compiled according to Code of Many markings (e.g. Tire size, Tire
Federal Regulations “Title 49, Part Identification Number or TIN) are (1) P = Certain tire type used on
575”. placed on the sidewall of a tire by light duty vehicles such as passen-
tire manufacturers. These marking ger cars
can provide you with useful infor- (2) Section Width in millimeters
mation on the tire. (3) Aspect Ratio (= section height
! Tire size 7 section width).
Your vehicle comes equipped with (4) R = Radial Construction
P-Metric tire size. It is important to (5) Rim diameter in inches
understand the sizing system in ! Load and Speed Rating Descrip-
selecting the proper tire for your tions
vehicles. Here is a brief review of The load and speed rating descrip-
the tire sizing system with a break- tions will appear following the size
down of its individual elements. designation.
! P Metric They provide two important facts
With the P-Metric system, Section about the tire. First, the number
Width is measured in millimeters. designation is its load index. Sec-
To convert millimeters into inches, ond, the letter designation indicates
divide by 25.4. The Aspect Ratio the tire’s speed rating.
(Section Height divided by Section
Width) helps provide more dimen-
sional information about the tire
size.

Black plate (357,1)
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects 13-3
Example: WARNING
. Speed ratings apply only to
the tire, not to the vehicle. (1) Manufacturer’s Identification
(6) Load Index: A numerical code Putting a speed rated tire on Mark
which specifies the maximum load any vehicle does not mean (2) Tire Size
a tire can carry at the speed the vehicle can be operated (3) Tire Type Code
indicated by its speed symbol, at at the tire’s rated speed.
(4) Date of Manufacture
maximum inflation pressure. . The speed rating is void if
The first two figures identify the
For example, “94” means 1,477 lbs the tires are worn out, da-
maged, repaired, retreaded, week, starting with “01” to represent
(670 kg).
or otherwise altered from the first full week of the calendar
WARNING their original condition. If year; the second two figures repre-
tires are repaired, re- sent the year. For example, 0101
Load indices apply only to the means the 1st week of 2001.
tire, not to the vehicle. Putting treaded, or otherwise al-
tered, they may not be sui- ! Other markings
a load rated tire on any vehicle
does not mean the vehicle can table for original equipment The following makings are also
be loaded up to the tire’s rated tire designed loads and placed on the sidewall.
speeds.
load. ! Maximum permissible inflation
pressure
(7) Speed Rating: An alphabetical ! Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The maximum cold inflation pres-
system describing a tire’s capability Tire Identification Number (TIN) is sure to which this tire may be
to travel at established and prede- marked on the intended outboard inflated. For example, “300 kpa
termined speeds. sidewall. The TIN is composed of (44 PSI) MAX. PRESS” 13
For example, “H” means 130 mph four groups. Here is a brief review
(210 km/h) of the TIN with a breakdown of its
individual elements.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (358,1)
! Maximum load rating POLYESTER 1 TREAD POLYE-

The load rating at the maximum STER 1 + STEEL 2 + NYLON 1”
permissible weight load for this tire. ! Uniform Tire Quality Grading
For example, “MAX. LOAD 670 kg (UTQG)
(1477 LBS) @ 300 kpa (44 PSI) For details, refer to “Uniform tire
MAX. PRESS.” quality grading standards” in this
chapter.
WARNING
Maximum load rating applies
only to the tire, not to the
vehicle. Putting a load rated
tire on any vehicle does not
mean the vehicle can be
loaded up to the tire’s rated
load.
! Construction type
Applicable construction of this tire.
For example, “TUBELESS STEEL
BELTED RADIAL”
! Construction
The generic name of each cord
material used in the plies (both
sidewall and tread area) of this tire.
For example, “PLIES: SIDEWALL

Black plate (359,1)
& Recommended tire inflation pressure

! Recommended cold tire inflation pressure
Recommended cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle’s tires is as follows,
Tire size P215/60R16 94H P215/55R17 93H
Wheel size 16 6 61/2 JJ or 16 6 61/2 JJ 17 6 7 JJ
Pressure Front Light load 29 psi 32 psi
(200 kPa, 2.0 kgf/cm2) (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2)
Full load 29 psi 32 psi
(200kPa, 2.0 kgf/cm2) (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2)
Rear Light load 28 psi 30 psi
Full load 36 psi 32 psi
Trailer towing 41 psi 36 psi
Temporary spare tire Size T135/80D16 T135/90D16
Pressure 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2)
NOTE
For the temporary spare tire, T135/80D16 or T135/90D16 is equipped to the vehicle.
13
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (360,1)
! Vehicle placard The vehicle placard shows original specific values. Driving even a
tire size, recommended cold tire short distance warms up the tires
inflation pressure on each tire at and increases the tire pressures.
maximum loaded vehicle weight, Also, the tire pressures are affected
seating capacity and loading infor- by the outside temperature. It is
mation. best to check tire pressure out-
! Adverse safety consequences doors before driving the vehicle.
of under-inflation When a tire becomes warm, the air
Driving at high speeds with exces- inside it expands, causing the tire
sively low tire pressures can cause pressure to increase. Be careful not
the tires to flex severely and to to mistakenly release air from a
rapidly become hot. A sharp in- warm tire to reduce its pressure.
The vehicle placard is affixed to the crease in temperature could cause & Glossary of tire terminology
driver’s side door pillar. tread separation, and failure of the
. Cold tire pressure
Example: tire(s). Possible resulting loss of
vehicle control could lead to an The pressure in a tire that has been
accident. driven less than 1 mile or has been
standing for three hours or more.
! Measuring and adjusting air . Maximum inflation pressure
pressure to achieve proper in-
The maximum cold inflation pres-
flation
sure to which a tire may be inflated.
Check and, if necessary, adjust the . Recommended inflation pres-
pressure of each tire (including the sure
spare) at least once a month and The cold inflation pressure recom-
before any long journey. Check the mended by a vehicle manufacturer.
tire pressures when the tires are . Intended outboard sidewall
cold. Use a pressure gauge to (1) The sidewall that contains a
adjust the tire pressures to the

Black plate (361,1)
whitewall, bears white lettering production options weight. determined by distributing to each
or bears manufacturer, brand, . Normal occupant weight axle its share of the curb weight,
and/or model name molding that 150 lbs (68 kg) times the number of accessory weight, and normal oc-
is higher or deeper than the occupants (3 occupants). cupant weight and dividing by two.
same molding on the other side- . Occupant distribution
wall of the tire, or Distribution of occupants in a vehi- & Tire care – maintenance and
(2) The outward facing sidewall cle, 2 in front, 1 in rear seat. safety practices
of an asymmetrical tire that has . Production options weight . Check on a daily basis that the
a particular side that must al- The combined weight of those tires are free from serious damage,
ways face outward when mount- installed regular production options nails, and stones. At the same time,
ing on a vehicle. weighing over 5.1 lbs (2.3 kg) in check the tires for abnormal wear.
. Accessory weight . Inspect the tire tread regularly
excess of those standards items
The combined weight (in excess of which they replace, not previously and replace the tires before their
those standard items which may be considered in curb weight or acces- tread wear indicators become visi-
replaced) of floor mats, leather sory weight. ble. When a tire’s tread wear
seats and cross bars to the extent . Vehicle capacity weight
indicator becomes visible, the tire
that these items are available as is worn beyond the acceptable limit
The total weight of cargo, luggage
factory-installed equipment and must be replaced immediately.
and occupants that can be added to
(whether installed or not). With a tire in this condition, driving
the vehicle.
. Curb weight at even low speeds in wet weather
. Vehicle maximum load on a tire
The weight of a motor vehicle with can cause the vehicle to hydro-
Load on an individual tire that is plane. Possible resulting loss of
standard equipment including the determined by distributing to each
maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and vehicle control can lead to an
axle its share of the maximum accident.
coolant and air conditioning. loaded vehicle weight and dividing . To maximize the life of each tire
13
. Maximum loaded vehicle weight by two.
The sum of curb weight, accessory and ensure that the tires wear
. Vehicle normal load on a tire
weight, vehicle capacity weight and uniformly, it is best to rotate the
Load on an individual tire that is
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (362,1)
tires every 7,500 miles (12,000 km). of occupants and cargo should examples:
Rotating the tires involves switch- never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs”
Example 1A
ing the front and rear tires on the on your vehicle’s placard.
right-hand side of the vehicle and The vehicle placard also shows
similarly switching the front and seating capacity of your vehicle.
rear tires on the left-hand side of The total load capacity includes the
the vehicle. (Each tire must be kept total weight of driver and all pas-
on its original side of the vehicle.) sengers and their belongings, any
Replace any damaged or unevenly cargo, any optional equipment such
worn tire at the time of rotation. as a trailer hitch, roof rack or bike
After tire rotation, adjust the tire carrier, etc., and the tongue load of
pressures and make sure the wheel a trailer. Therefore cargo capacity
nuts are correctly tightened. A can be calculated by the following
tightening torque specification and method.
a tightening sequence specification Vehicle capacity weight of the
for the wheel nuts can be found Cargo capacity = Load limit − (total vehicle is 900 lbs (408 kg), which
“Flat tires” section in chapter 9. weight of occupants + total weight is indicated on the vehicle placard
of optional equipment + tongue with the statement “The combined
& Vehicle load limit – how to load of a trailer (if applicable)) weight of occupants and cargo
determine should never exceed 900 lbs or
For towing capacity information and 408 kg”.
The load capacity of your vehicle is weight limits, refer to “Trailer towing”
determined by weight, not by avail- section in chapter 8. For example, if the vehicle has one
able cargo space. The load limit of occupant weighing 154 lbs (70 kg)
your vehicle is shown on the ! Calculating total and load ca-
pacities varying seating con- plus cargo weighing 662 lbs (300
vehicle placard attached to the kg).
figurations
driver’s side B-pillar. Locate the 1. Calculate the total weight.
statement “The combined weight Calculate the available load capa-
city as shown in the following

Black plate (363,1)
Example 1B 2. Calculate the available load ca-

pacity.
2. Calculate the available load ca-

pacity by subtracting the total
weight from the vehicle capacity
weight of 900 lbs (408 kg). 3. The total weight now exceeds
the capacity weight by 92 lbs (42
kg), so the cargo weight must be
reduced by 92 lbs (42 kg) or more.
For example, if a person weighing Example 2A
176 lbs (80 kg) now enters the
same vehicle (bringing the number
3. The result of step 2 shows that a
of occupants to two), the calcula-
further 84 lbs (38 kg) of cargo can tions are as follows:
be carried. 1. Calculate the total weight.
13
Vehicle capacity weight of the
vehicle is 900 lbs (408 kg), which
is indicated on the vehicle placard
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (364,1)
with the statement “The combined 2. Calculate the available load ca- occupants to three), and a child
weight of occupants and cargo pacity. restraint system weighing 11 lbs (5
should never exceed 408 kg or kg) is installed in the vehicle for the
900 lbs”. child to use, the calculations are as
follows:
For example, the vehicle has one
1. Calculate the total weight.
occupant weighing 165 lbs (75 kg)
plus cargo weighing 375 lbs (170
kg). In addition, the vehicle is fitted
3. The result of step 2 shows that a
with a trailer hitch weighing 22 lbs
further 162 lbs (73 kg) of cargo can
(10 kg), to which is attached a
be carried.
trailer weighing 1,764 lbs (800 kg).
10% of the trailer weight is applied Example 2B
to the trailer tongue (i.e. Tongue
load = 176 lbs (80 kg)).
1. Calculate the total weight.
2. Calculate the available load ca-

pacity.
For example, if a person weighing

143 lbs (65 kg) and a child weighing
40 lbs (18 kg) now enter the same
vehicle (bringing the number of

Black plate (365,1)
3. The total weight now exceeds The GVWR and front and rear . Suspension, bearings, axles and
the capacity weight by 32 lbs (15 GAWRs are determined by not only other parts of the body could break
kg), so the cargo weight must be the maximum load rating of tires but or experience accelerated wear
reduced by 32 lbs (15 kg) or more. also loaded capacities of the vehi- that will shorten vehicle life.
cle’s suspension, axles and other . Tires could fail.
& Determining compatibility of parts of the body. . Tread separation could occur.
tire and vehicle load capaci- Therefore, this means that the . Tire could separate from its rim.
ties
vehicle cannot necessarily be & Steps for Determining Cor-
The sum of four tires’ maximum loaded up to the tire’s maximum
load ratings must exceed the max- rect Load Limit
load rating on the tire sidewall.
imum loaded vehicle weight 1. Locate the statement “The com-
(“GVWR”). In addition, sum of the & Adverse safety conse- bined weight of occupants and
maximum load ratings of two front quences of overloading on cargo should never exceed XXX
tires and of two rear tires must handling and stopping and pounds” on your vehicle’s placard.
exceed each axle’s maximum on tires 2. Determine the combined weight
loaded capacity (“GAWR”). Original Overloading could affect vehicle of the driver and passengers that
equipment tires are designed to handling, stopping distance, vehicle will be riding in your vehicle.
fulfill those conditions. and tire as shown in the following. 3. Subtract the combined weight of
The maximum loaded vehicle This could lead to an accident and the driver and passengers from
weight is referred to Gross Vehicle possibly result in severe personal XXX kilograms or XXX pounds.
Weight Rating (GVWR). And each injury. 4. The resulting figure equals the
axle’s maximum loaded capacity is . Vehicle stability will deteriorate. available amount of cargo and
referred to Gross Axle Weight Rat- . Heavy and/or high-mounted luggage load capacity. For exam-
ing (GAWR). The GVWR and each loads could increase the risk of ple, if the “XXX” amount equals 13
axle’s GAWR are shown on the rollover. 1,400 lbs (635kg). and there will be
vehicle certification label affixed to . Stopping distance will increase. five- 150 lbs (68 kg) passengers in
the driver’s door. . Brakes could overheat and fail. your vehicle, the amount of avail-
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (366,1)
able cargo and luggage load capa- Uniform tire quality grading form to Federal Safety Require-
city is 650 lbs. (1,400 − 750 (5 6 standards ments in addition to these grades.
150) = 650 lbs.)
5. Determine the combined weight This information indicates the rela- & Treadwear
of luggage and cargo being loaded tive performance of passenger car The treadwear grade is a compara-
on the vehicle. That weight may not tires in the area of treadwear, tive rating based on the wear rate of
safely exceed the available cargo traction, and temperature resis- the tire when tested under con-
and luggage load capacity calcu- tance. This is to aid the consumer trolled conditions on a specified
lated in Step 4. in making an informed choice in the government test course.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a purchase of tires. For example, a tire graded 150
trailer, load from your trailer will be Quality grades can be found where would wear one and one-half (1-1/
transferred to your vehicle. Consult applicable on the tire sidewall be- 2) times as well on the government
this manual to determine how this tween tread shoulder and maxi- course as a tire graded 100. The
reduces the available cargo and mum section width. For example: relative performance of tires de-
luggage load capacity of your ve- Treadwear 200 Traction AA Tem- pends upon the actual conditions
hicle. perature A of their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the norm
The quality grades apply to new due to variations in driving habits,
pneumatic tires for use on passen- service practices and differences in
ger cars. However, they do not road characteristics and climate.
apply to deep tread, winter type
snow tires, space-saver or tempor- & Traction AA, A, B, C
ary use spare tires, tires with The traction grades, from highest to
nominal rim diameters of 12 inches lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those
or less, or to some limited produc- grades represent the tire’s ability to
tion tires. stop on wet pavement as measured
All passenger car tires must con- under controlled conditions on spe-

Black plate (367,1)
cified government test surfaces of grade C corresponds to a level of

asphalt and concrete. A tire marked performance which all passenger
C may have poor traction perfor- car tires must meet under the
mance. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-
dards No. 109. Grades B and A
WARNING represent higher levels of perfor-
The traction grade assigned to mance on the laboratory test wheel
this tire is based on straight- than the minimum required by law.
ahead braking traction tests, WARNING
and does not include accel-
eration, cornering, hydroplan- The temperature grade for this
ing, or peak traction charac- tire is established for a tire
teristics. that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive
speed, underinflation, or ex-
& Temperature A, B, C cessive loading, either sepa-
The temperature grades are A (the rately or in combination, can
highest), B, and C, representing the cause heat buildup and possi-
tire’s resistance to the generation of ble tire failure.
heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled con-
ditions on a specified indoor labora-
tory test wheel. Sustained high
temperature can cause the material 13
of the tire to degenerate and reduce
tire life, and excessive temperature
can lead to sudden tire failure. The

Black plate (368,1)
Reporting safety defects DC 20590. You can also obtain

(USA) other information about motor ve-
hicle safety from
If you believe that your vehicle has http://www.safercar.gov.
a defect which could cause a
crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately in-
form the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in
addition to notifying Subaru of
America, Inc.
If NHTSA receives similar com-
plaints, it may open an investiga-
tion, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehi-
cles, it may order a recall and
remedy campaign. However,
NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between
you, your dealer, or Subaru of
America, Inc. To contact NHTSA,
you may call the Vehicle Safety
Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
http://www.safercar.gov; or write
to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400
Seventh Street, SW., Washington,

Black plate (27,1)
Index
14

Black plate (2,1)
14-2 Index
A B
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) ..................................... 7-17 Battery .................................................................... 11-42
Warning light ................................................. 3-13, 7-17 Jump starting .......................................................... 9-8
Accessories....................................................... 5-2, 11-45 Replacement (Remote keyless entry system) .............. 2-7
Accessory power outlet................................................. 6-8 Booster seat .............................................................. 1-29
Active head restraint..................................................... 1-6 Brake
Air cleaner element ................................................... 11-15 Booster ....................................................... 7-16, 11-27
Air conditioner ............................................................. 4-7 Fluid ................................................................... 11-25
Air filtration system..................................................... 4-12 Pad and lining...................................................... 11-29
Air flow selection.......................................................... 4-2 Parking ....................................................... 7-26, 11-30
Alarm system ............................................................ 2-13 Pedal .................................................................. 11-27
All-Wheel Drive warning light ....................................... 3-16 System.................................................................. 7-16
Aluminum wheel cleaning............................................ 10-3 Brake pedal
Aluminum wheels...................................................... 11-37 Free play............................................................. 11-27
Antenna system........................................................... 5-2 Reserve distance.................................................. 11-28
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ..................................... 7-17 Brake system............................................................. 7-16
Arming the system ..................................................... 2-13 Warning light.......................................................... 3-15
Armrest..................................................................... 1-10 Braking ..................................................................... 7-16
Ashtray ..................................................................... 6-11 Tips ...................................................................... 7-16
AT OIL TEMPerature warning light ............................... 3-13 Breaking-in of new brake pads and linings................... 11-29
Audio set .................................................................... 5-3 Bulb
Auto-dimming mirror/compass...................................... 3-29 Chart .................................................................... 12-9
Automatic climate control system ................................... 4-8 Replacing ............................................................ 11-46
Automatic transmission ............................................... 7-11
Capacities ............................................................. 12-4 C
Fluid.................................................................... 11-20 Capacities ................................................................. 12-4
Selector lever ........................................................ 7-12 Cargo area
Shift lock release ................................................... 7-14 Bars...................................................................... 6-14
Temperature warning light (AT OIL TEMP)................. 3-13 Cover.................................................................... 6-13
Automatic/Emergency Locking Retractor (A/ELR) ........... 1-11 Light ...................................................................... 6-2
Tie-down hooks...................................................... 6-14

Black plate (3,1)
Index 14-3
Catalytic converter ....................................................... 8-3 Ventilation grille ...................................................... 4-11
Center Climate control system
Console .................................................................. 6-4 Automatic ............................................................... 4-8
Ventilators ............................................................... 4-3 Manual................................................................... 4-3
Center and side ventilators............................................ 4-3 Clock ........................................................................ 3-19
Changing Clutch
Flat tire ................................................................... 9-4 Fluid ................................................................... 11-26
Oil and oil filter ...................................................... 11-9 Pedal .................................................................. 11-28
Charge warning light .................................................. 3-12 Coat hook.................................................................. 6-12
CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunction Convenience net ......................................................... 6-6
indicator lamp ......................................................... 3-12 Coolant ................................................................... 11-12
Checking Cooling system ........................................................ 11-12
Brake pedal free play ............................................ 11-27 Corrosion protection............................................ 8-10, 10-4
Brake pedal reserve distance ................................. 11-28 Cruise control ............................................................ 7-28
Clutch function...................................................... 11-28 Set indicator light.................................................... 3-19
Clutch pedal free play............................................ 11-28 Cruise control indicator light ......................................... 3-19
Engine oil level ...................................................... 11-8 Cup holder ................................................................. 6-7
Fluid level ............................... 11-20, 11-24, 11-25, 11-26 Front passenger’s.................................................... 6-7
Gear oil level ........................................................ 11-22 Rear passenger’s .................................................... 6-8
Child restraint systems ............................................... 1-24
Installation with A/ELR seatbelt................................ 1-26 D
Lower and tether anchorages .................................. 1-31 Dashboard storage compartment ................................... 6-6
Child safety .................................................................... 5 Daytime running light system ....................................... 3-21
Locks ................................................................... 2-17 Differential gear oil
Chime Front................................................................... 11-21
Key ........................................................................ 3-5 Rear ................................................................... 11-22
Seatbelt ........................................................ 1-12, 3-10 Dimensions................................................................ 12-2
Cigarette lighter ......................................................... 6-10 Disarming the system ................................................. 2-15
Cleaning Disc brake pad wear warning indicators ........................ 7-16
Aluminum wheels................................................... 10-3 Dome light .................................................................. 6-2
Interior .................................................................. 10-5 Door

Black plate (4,1)
14-4 Index
Locks ..................................................................... 2-4 F

Open warning light ................................................. 3-16 Flat tires ..................................................................... 9-4
Drive belts................................................................ 11-18 Floor mat................................................................... 6-12
Driving Fluid level
All-Wheel Drive vehicle ........................................... 3-16 Automatic transmission ......................................... 11-20
Car phone/cell phone .................................................. 7 Brake.................................................................. 11-25
Drinking ..................................................................... 6 Clutch ................................................................. 11-26
Drugs ........................................................................ 6 Power steering ..................................................... 11-24
Foreign countries ..................................................... 8-4 Front
Pets .......................................................................... 7 Differential gear oil................................................ 11-21
Snowy and icy roads ................................................ 8-9 Fog light button ...................................................... 3-24
Tips................................................................ 7-10, 8-5 Seatbelt pretensioners ............................................ 1-20
Tired or sleepy............................................................ 7 Seats ..................................................................... 1-2
Front lip spoiler ...................................................... 8-25
E Front seats
Electrical system........................................................ 12-3 Fore and aft adjustment ..................................... 1-3, 1-4
Electronic Brake Force Distribution Reclining .......................................................... 1-3, 1-5
(EBD) system ................................................. 3-15, 7-18 Fuel ........................................................................... 7-2
Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)............................. 1-11 Economy hints ........................................................ 8-2
Engine Filler lid and cap...................................................... 7-3
Compartment overview ........................................... 11-6 Gauge.................................................................... 3-7
Coolant................................................................ 11-12 Requirements ......................................................... 7-2
Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide) ............................ 5, 8-2 Fuses ..................................................................... 11-43
Hood .................................................................... 11-4 Fuses and circuits ...................................................... 12-6
Oil........................................................................ 11-8
Overheating .......................................................... 9-11 G
Starting................................................................... 7-7 GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)............................... 8-12
Stopping ................................................................. 7-9 Glove box................................................................... 6-4
Exterior care.............................................................. 10-2 GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)........................... 8-12

Black plate (5,1)
Index 14-5
H Vehicle Dynamics Control operation.......................... 3-16
Hazard warning flasher ........................................... 3-6, 9-2 Indicator lights
Head restraint adjustment ............................................. 1-6 Vehicle Dynamics Control ........................................ 7-22
Rear....................................................................... 1-8 Inside mirror .............................................................. 3-29
Headlight Interior light................................................................. 6-2
Beam leveler ......................................................... 3-23
Flasher ................................................................. 3-21 J
Headlights........................................................ 3-20, 11-48 Jack and jack handle .................................................. 9-15
Heater operation .......................................................... 4-5 Jump starting .............................................................. 9-8
High beam indicator light ............................................ 3-17
High mount stop light................................................. 11-51 K
High/low beam change (dimmer).................................. 3-21 Key
Hill holder (MT vehicles) .................................... 7-27, 11-29 Interlock release ...................................................... 3-5
Horn......................................................................... 3-32 Keyless entry system ............................................... 2-7
Hose and connections ............................................... 11-12 Number .................................................................. 2-2
Reminder chime ...................................................... 3-5
I Replacement........................................................... 2-4
Ignition switch.............................................................. 3-3 Keys .......................................................................... 2-2
Light....................................................................... 3-5
Illuminated entry .......................................................... 2-8 L
Illumination brightness control...................................... 3-23 Leather seat materials................................................. 10-5
Immobilizer.................................................................. 2-3 Light
Indicator light........................................................... 2-4 Cargo area ............................................................. 6-2
Indicator light Control switch ........................................................ 3-20
Cruise control ........................................................ 3-19 Dome..................................................................... 6-2
Cruise control set................................................... 3-19 Map ....................................................................... 6-3
High beam ............................................................ 3-17 Limited slip differential (LSD)........................................ 7-15
Shift position (AT vehicles) ...................................... 3-17 Loading your vehicle ................................................... 8-11
Traction Control system OFF ................................... 3-14 Low fuel warning light .......................................... 3-8, 3-16
Turn signal ............................................................ 3-17 Low tire pressure warning light..................................... 3-17
Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF ................................ 3-14 Lower and tether anchorage ........................................ 1-31

Black plate (6,1)
14-6 Index
LSD (Limited slip differential) ....................................... 7-15 Manual transmission ............................................. 11-19
Lumbar support ........................................................... 1-5 Rear differential.................................................... 11-22
M Oil pressure warning light ............................................ 3-12
Main fuse................................................................. 11-44 Outside mirrors .......................................................... 3-30
Maintenance Outside temperature indicator ....................................... 3-9
Precautions ........................................................... 11-3 Overhead console ....................................................... 6-6
Schedule .............................................................. 11-3 Overheating engine .................................................... 9-11
Seatbelt ................................................................ 1-19
Tools .................................................................... 9-15 P
Malfunction indicator lamp........................................... 3-12 Parking
Manual Brake.................................................................... 7-26
Climate control system ............................................. 4-3 Brake stroke ........................................................ 11-30
Seat ....................................................................... 1-3 Light switch ........................................................... 3-23
Transmission ........................................................... 7-9 Tips ...................................................................... 7-26
Transmission oil.................................................... 11-19 Parking your vehicle ................................................... 7-25
Map light..................................................................... 6-3 Pcket ......................................................................... 6-7
Maximum load limits................................................... 8-18 Periodic inspections ..................................................... 8-4
Meters and gauges ...................................................... 3-6 Power
Mirrors ...................................................................... 3-29 Door locking switch.................................................. 2-6
Moonroof .................................................................. 2-21 Seat....................................................................... 1-4
Steering ................................................................ 7-15
N Steering fluid........................................................ 11-24
New vehicle break-in driving.......................................... 8-2 Windows ............................................................... 2-18
Precautions against vehicle modification................ 1-23, 1-58
O Preparing to drive ........................................................ 7-7
Odometer/Tripmeter ..................................................... 3-6
Off road driving............................................................ 8-6 R
Oil filter..................................................................... 11-9 Rear
Oil level Combination lights ................................................ 11-50
Engine.................................................................. 11-8 Gate ............................................................. 2-20, 9-14
Front differential gear ............................................ 11-21 Seats ..................................................................... 1-7

Black plate (7,1)
Index 14-7
Viscous limited slip differential ................................. 7-15 Rear combination light .......................................... 11-50
Rear differential Rocking the vehicle .................................................... 8-11
Gear oil ............................................................... 11-22 Roof rail and crossbar................................................. 8-13
Rear seat
Folding down........................................................... 1-9 S
Rear window Safety
Defogger button ..................................................... 3-28 Precautions when driving............................................. 4
Wiper and washer switch ........................................ 3-26 Symbol...................................................................... 2
Wiper blades ........................................................ 11-40 Warnings ................................................................... 2
Recommended Seat
Automatic transmission fluid ................................... 11-21 Fabric ................................................................... 10-5
Brake fluid............................................................ 11-26 Heater.................................................................... 1-7
Clutch fluid ........................................................... 11-27 Seat height adjustment................................................. 1-4
OIL grade and Seatbelt......................................................................... 4
viscosity...................... 11-10, 11-11, 11-20, 11-22, 11-23 Extender ............................................................... 1-19
Power steering fluid............................................... 11-25 Maintenance .......................................................... 1-19
Spark plugs.......................................................... 11-18 Pretensioners......................................................... 1-20
Remote keyless entry system ........................................ 2-7 Safety tips ............................................................. 1-10
Replacement Warning light and chime .................................. 1-12, 3-10
Brake pad and lining ............................................. 11-29 Seatbelts ................................................................... 1-10
Wiper blades ........................................................ 11-39 Security ID plate.......................................................... 2-3
Replacing Selector lever............................................................. 7-12
Air cleaner element ............................................... 11-15 Self-leveling rear suspension ....................................... 7-31
Battery (remote keyless entry system) ........................ 2-7 Shift lock release........................................................ 7-14
Lost transmitters (keyless entry system)...................... 2-9 Shift position indicator light .......................................... 3-17
Replacing bulbs ........................................................ 11-46 Shock sensors ........................................................... 2-17
Dome light ........................................................... 11-51 Shopping bag hook..................................................... 6-14
Headlight ............................................................. 11-48 Snow tires ................................................................. 8-10
High mount stop light............................................. 11-51 Snowy and icy roads ................................................... 8-9
License plate light ................................................. 11-50 Sounding a panic alarm ............................................... 2-8
Map light.............................................................. 11-51 Spark plugs ............................................................. 11-17

Black plate (8,1)
14-8 Index
Specifications ............................................................ 12-2 Inspection............................................................ 11-32

Speedometer............................................................... 3-6 Pressures and wear.............................................. 11-33
SRS Replacement........................................................ 11-36
Frontal airbag ........................................................ 1-39 Rotation .............................................................. 11-35
Side airbag ........................................................... 1-51 Types.................................................................. 11-30
SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag) ... 4, 1-35 Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) ....... 7-24, 9-7, 11-31
SRS airbag system Tires ......................................................................... 12-5
Monitors................................................................ 1-56 Tires and wheels ...................................................... 11-30
Servicing............................................................... 1-57 Top tether anchorages ................................................ 1-33
Warning light ......................................................... 3-10 Towing ...................................................................... 9-11
Starting the engine ....................................................... 7-7 All wheels on the ground ......................................... 9-13
State emission testing (U.S. only) .................................. 7-6 Flat-bed truck......................................................... 9-13
Steering wheel Tie-down hooks...................................................... 9-12
Power................................................................... 7-15 Weight .................................................................. 8-18
Tilt ....................................................................... 3-32 Trailer
Stopping the engine ..................................................... 7-9 Connecting ............................................................ 8-16
Storage compartment ................................................... 6-4 Hitch ..................................................................... 8-16
Sun shade ................................................................ 2-22 Hitches.................................................................. 8-21
Sun visors................................................................... 6-3 Towing .................................................................. 8-18
Supplemental Restraint System airbag (SRS) ................ 1-35 Towing tips ............................................................ 8-23
Synthetic leather upholstery ........................................ 10-5 Turn signal
Indicator lights........................................................ 3-17
T Lever .................................................................... 3-22
Tachometer ................................................................. 3-7
Temperature gauge ...................................................... 3-8 U
Temperature warning light (AT OIL TEMP)..................... 3-13 Under-floor storage compartment.................................. 6-15
Temporary spare tire .................................................... 9-2
Tie-down hooks ......................................................... 9-12 V
Tilt steering wheel ...................................................... 3-32 Valet mode ................................................................ 2-15
Tire Vanity mirror ............................................................... 6-3
Chains.................................................................. 8-10 Vehicle

Black plate (9,1)
Index 14-9
Capacity weight ..................................................... 8-12 Waxing and polishing .................................................. 10-3
Identification ........................................................ 12-10 Wear indicators ........................................................ 11-35
Symbols .................................................................... 3 Wheel
Vehicle Dynamics Control Alignment .............................................................. 12-5
OFF indicator light.................................................. 3-14 Aluminum ............................................................ 11-37
OFF switch ........................................................... 7-23 Balance............................................................... 11-34
Operation indicator light .......................................... 3-16 Replacement........................................................ 11-36
System ................................................................. 7-20 Windows ................................................................... 2-18
Warning light ................................................. 3-14, 7-22 Windshield
Ventilator .................................................................... 4-2 Washer fluid......................................................... 11-37
Wiper and washer switches ..................................... 3-25
W Wiper blades........................................................ 11-39
Warning and indicator lights .......................................... 3-9 Wiper deicer .......................................................... 3-27
Warning light Winter driving.............................................................. 8-7
ABS ..................................................................... 3-13 Wiper and washer ...................................................... 3-24
All-Wheel Drive...................................................... 3-16
Anti-lock Brake System........................................... 3-13
AT OIL TEMPerature .............................................. 3-13
Brake system ........................................................ 3-15
Charge ................................................................. 3-12
CHECK ENGINE ................................................... 3-12
Door open............................................................. 3-16
Low fuel.......................................................... 3-8, 3-16
Low tire pressure ................................................... 3-17
Oil pressure .......................................................... 3-12
Seatbelt ................................................................ 3-10
SRS airbag system ................................................ 3-10
Vehicle Dynamics Control ....................................... 3-14
Warranties ..................................................................... 1
Warranties and maintenance ....................................... 8-18
Washing ................................................................... 10-2

Black plate (2,1)
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
Left Page
Black plate (1,1)
13
12
4
11
10
5
9
7 8
6 000134

Black plate (2,1)
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
Left Page
Black plate (2,1)
GAS STATION REFERENCE

& Fuel & Fuel octane rating
! Non-turbo models This octane rating is the average of the Research Octane and
Motor numbers and is commonly referred to as the Anti Knock
Use only unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87 AKI or Index (AKI). Refer to “Fuel” section in this manual.
higher.
! Turbo models & Fuel capacity
Use premium unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 91 AKI 15.9 US gal (60 liters, 13.2 Imp gal)
or higher. If premium unleaded gasoline is not available, regular
unleaded gasoline with octane rating of 87 AKI or higher may & Engine oil
be temporarily used. For optimum engine performance and Use only API classification SM with the words “ENERGY
driveability, it is required that you use premium grade unleaded CONSERVING” and the ILSAC certification mark (starburst
gasoline. mark) displayed on the container (ILSAC GF-4).
& Engine oil capacity

4.2 US qt (4.0 liters, 3.5 Imp qt)
& Cold tire pressure
Tire size P215/60R16 94H P215/55R17 93H
1 1
Wheel size 1666 /2 JJ or 1666 /2 J 1767 JJ
2
Pressure Front Light load 29 psi (200 kPa, 2.0 kgf/cm ) 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2)
Rear Light load 28 psi (190 kPa, 1.9 kgf/cm2) 30 psi (210 kPa, 2.1 kgf/cm2)
Trailer towing 41 psi (280 kPa, 2.8 kgf/cm2) 36 psi (250 kPa, 2.5 kgf/cm2)
Temporary spare tire Size T135/80D16 T135/90D16
2
Pressure 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm )
NOTE
. For the Canada specification non-turbo models, there is a conventional tire installed under the floor of the cargo area.
. For the temporary spare tire, T135/80D16 or T135/90D16 is equipped to the vehicle.

Black plate (2,1)
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
Left Page

2008 Owners Manual Subaru Forester

Încărcat de

Informații document

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

2008 Owners Manual Subaru Forester

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Foreword

Congratulations on choosing a SUBARU vehicle. This Owner’s

is a registered trademark of FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD.

This manual describes the following vehicle types.*

* The illustrated vehicle is one of the FORESTER series.

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

北米Model "ALL_MODEL_SHIRO" EDITED: 2006/ 4/ 17

Warranties ! Vehicle with HID headlights How to use this Owner’s 0

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

Chapter 4: Climate Control Chapter 12: Specifications CAUTION

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

Vehicle symbols Mark Name Mark Name 0

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

Safety precautions when . The SRS airbags deploy with

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

vehicle control could lead to an

& California proposition 65

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1

北米Model "A8130BE-B" Edited: 2007/ 7/ 25

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

& Interior 1) Lower anchorage for child restraint sys-

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

& Instrument panel 1) Door locks (page 2-4)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

& Combination meter 1) Fuel gauge (page 3-7)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

! MT vehicles 1) Fuel gauge (page 3-7)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

! Canada-spec. models 1) Fuel gauge (page 3-7)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

! MT vehicles 1) Fuel gauge (page 3-7)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

Mark Name Page Vehicle Dynamics Control

Low tire pressure warning 3-17

All-Wheel Drive warning 3-16

Low fuel warning light 3-16

or Front passenger’s frontal 3-11

CHECK ENGINE warning High beam indicator light 3-17

Cruise control indicator 3-19

Cruise control set indica- 3-19

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

& Tire changing tools 1) Jack (page 9-15)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

& Cargo area cover 1) Cargo area cover (page 6-13)

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

System servicing ............................................... 1-23

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

1-2 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

北米Model "A8130BE-B" EDITED: 2007/ 7/ 25

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-3

tems, see the “Child restraint sys- ! Reclining the seatback 1

& Manual seat